FIRE ALARM

4100ES
Fire Alarm System

Installation
Guide

574-848
Rev. BD
Cautions, Warnings, and Regulatory Information

Cautions READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS - Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be
and followed to avoid damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depend upon proper
Warnings installation.

DO NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX® PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED- Upon unpacking your Simplex product,
inspect the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify
an authorized Simplex product supplier.

ELECTRICAL HAZARD - Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. All repairs should
be performed by a representative or authorized agent of your local Simplex product supplier.

STATIC HAZARD - Static electricity can damage components. Handle as follows:

• Ground yourself before opening or installing components.
• Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.

EYE SAFETY HAZARD - Under certain fiber optic application conditions, the optical output of this device may exceed eye
safety limits. Do not use magnification (such as a microscope or other focusing equipment) when viewing the output of this device.

SULFURIC ACID WARNING- Battery contains sulfuric acid, which can cause severe burns to the skin and eyes and can
destroy fabric. Replace any leaking or damaged battery while wearing appropriate protective gear. If you come in contact with
sulfuric acid, immediately flush skin or eyes with water for 15 minutes and seek immediate medical attention.

FCC RULES AND REGULATIONS - PART 15 - This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a 
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

IMPORTANT: Verify FACP System Programmer, Executive, and Slave Software compatibility
when installing, or replacing system components. Refer to the Technical
Support Information and Downloads website for compatibility information.

Copyright and © 2017 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown
Trademarks were current as of document revision and are subject to change without notice. Additional
listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex® product supplier for the latest status.
Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. Simplex, and the product names
listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly
prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm Code are registered trademarks of the National
Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

VESDA is a trademark of Xtralis Pty Ltd.
NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code are registered trademarks of the
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

i
Emissions Compliance, Radio Frequency Immunity, Safety and Agency Approvals

EMC Emissions
• FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class A Emission Requirements (USA)
EMC Immunity
• EN50130-4: 1996, Electromagnetic compatibility- Product family standard: Immunity
requirements for components of fire, intruder, and social alarm systems.

System Type:
Fire Alarm Control Panels
4100-9111, 4100-9112, 4100-9113, 4100-9121, 4100-9131, 4100-4100-9132, 
4100-9133, 4100-9211, 4100-9230, 4100-9311, 4100-9314, 400-9331, 4100-9312, 4100-
9313, 4100-9315, 4100-9316, 4100-9332, 4100-9511, 4100-9512, 4100-9513, 4100-9531,
4100-9532, 4100-9533, 4100-9534.
Transponders and Remote Annunciators
4100-9600, 4100-9601, 4100-9610
Analog and Digital Audio Options
4100-9620, 4100-9621
Network Display Units
4100-9141, 4100-9142, 4100-9143, 4100-9144, 4100-9145, 4100-9146, 4100-9241, 4100-
9242, 4100-9342, 4100-9352, 4100-9355, 4100-9542.

Manufacturer’s Name: Simplex Time Recorder Co., D/B/A TEPG-US

Manufacturer’s Address: 50 Technology Drive
Westiminster MA 01441-0001
United States of America.

ii
Listings, Approvals, Codes, and Standards

Listings and This equipment meets the requirements of the following agencies.
Approvals • UL (UL 864)
• ULC (S527)
• FM (Class No. 3010)
• CSFM
• MEA

Codes and If the notification appliances and accessories referenced in Table I are installed in accordance
Standards with either NFPA 12A or NFPA 2001, the system must employ an additional mechanically-
operated manual release mechanism.
The installer should be familiar with the relevant codes listed below, as well as any other
applicable local codes and standards, when installing a fire alarm system.
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
NFPA 11 Standard for Low-Expansion Foam and Combined Agent Systems
NFPA 11A Standard for Medium- and High-Expansion Foam Systems
NFPA 12 Standard for Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 12A Standard on Halon 1301 Fire Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 13 Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 14 Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems
NFPA 15 Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection
NFPA 16 Standard for the Installation of Deluge Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam-
Water Spray Systems
NFPA 16A Standard for the Installation of Closed-Head Foam-Water Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 17 Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 17A Standard for Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 25 Standard for Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire
Protection Systems
NFPA 70 National Electric Code
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
NFPA 750 Standard on Water Mist Fire Protection Systems
NFPA 2001 Standard on Clean Agent Fire Protection Systems
ULC S524 Standard for Installation of Fire Alarm Systems (Canadian Systems)
UL 1076 Standard for Safety for Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems

Environmental The 4100ES and all modules are rated to operate at ambient temperatures from 32oF - 120oF
Operating Range (0oC - 49oC).

The 4100ES and all modules are rated for operation at 90oF (32oC), 93% RH 
(non-condensing).

iii
Table of Contents

Cautions, Warnings, and Regulatory Information ..................................................... i

Copyright and Trademarks ....................................................................................... i
Emissions Compliance, Radio Frequency Immunity, Safety and Agency Approvals ii
Listings, Approvals, Codes, and Standards............................................................. iii
Listings and Approvals .............................................................................................iii
Codes and Standards ..............................................................................................iii
Environmental Operating Range .............................................................................iii
List of Figures ......................................................................................................... xv
List of Tables ....................................................................................................... xviii

Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System ............................. 1-1

Introduction ..........................................................................................................................1-1
In this chapter ......................................................................................................................1-1
System Configurations ................................................................................................... 1-2
Overview .............................................................................................................................1-2
Standalone Configuration ............................................................................................... 1-3
Overview ..............................................................................................................................1-3
System Design .....................................................................................................................1-3
MINIPLEX Configuration ................................................................................................. 1-4
Overview ..............................................................................................................................1-4
System Design .....................................................................................................................1-4
RUI Communication .............................................................................................................1-5
Network Configuration .................................................................................................... 1-6
Overview ..............................................................................................................................1-6
Hub and Star Configurations ................................................................................................1-6
Connection Loops ................................................................................................................1-7
System Design .....................................................................................................................1-7
Network Communication ......................................................................................................1-7
4100ES Back Box PIDs ................................................................................................... 1-8
Overview ..............................................................................................................................1-8
4100ES Back Boxes ............................................................................................................1-8
4100ES PIDs ..................................................................................................................... 1-9
Overview ..............................................................................................................................1-9
Basic Control Panels (United States) ...................................................................................1-9
Basic Control Panels (Canada) ..........................................................................................1-10
Basic Control Panels (International) ..................................................................................1-12
Transponders .....................................................................................................................1-13
Remote Annunciator ..........................................................................................................1-13
Remote Display Assemblies ..............................................................................................1-14
Basic Audio Selections ......................................................................................................1-14
Utility Cabinets ...................................................................................................................1-14
Master Controller Upgrade Kits ..........................................................................................1-14
Rack Mount Kits .................................................................................................................1-15
Power Distribution Modules ...............................................................................................1-15
Expansion Bays .................................................................................................................1-15
Expansion Battery Chargers for Basic FACPs ...................................................................1-15
Communication Modules ...................................................................................................1-15
Power Supplies ..................................................................................................................1-16
Signaling Modules ..............................................................................................................1-16
Annunciator Modules .........................................................................................................1-17

7
Table of Contents

Transponders and Transponder Components ...................................................................1-17

Audio Operator Interfaces ..................................................................................................1-17
Audio Controller Boards .....................................................................................................1-17
Telephones/Microphones ...................................................................................................1-18
Additional Audio Modules ..................................................................................................1-18
Common Audio Options .....................................................................................................1-18
Amplifiers ...........................................................................................................................1-18
Miscellaneous Modules ......................................................................................................1-20
4100 PIDs (Non-4100ES/4100U) .................................................................................... 1-21
Overview ............................................................................................................................1-21
System Types and Options ................................................................................................1-21
Master Controller Option Module .......................................................................................1-21
NAC Modules .....................................................................................................................1-22
IDC Modules ......................................................................................................................1-22
Optional Modules ...............................................................................................................1-22
Auxiliary Relay Controls .....................................................................................................1-22
Audio Controllers and Amplifiers ........................................................................................1-23
Audio Options ....................................................................................................................1-23
Annunciation Modules ........................................................................................................1-23
Miscellaneous Modules ......................................................................................................1-24
Network Modules ...............................................................................................................1-24
System Accessories ...........................................................................................................1-24

Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components ......................................................... 2-1

Introduction ..........................................................................................................................2-1
In this chapter ......................................................................................................................2-1
Introduction to the FACP ................................................................................................ 2-2
Overview ..............................................................................................................................2-2
CPU Bay ..............................................................................................................................2-2
SPS CPU Bay Overview .................................................................................................. 2-3
SPS CPU Master Motherboard ............................................................................................2-3
Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719) ........................................................................2-4
Master Controller Daughter Card LEDs ...............................................................................2-5
Master Controller Switches ..................................................................................................2-5
System Power Supply (SPS) ...............................................................................................2-6
EPS CPU Bay Overview .................................................................................................. 2-7
The Power Distribution Interface ..........................................................................................2-7
EPS CPU RUI+ Master Motherboard ..................................................................................2-7
Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719) ........................................................................2-8
Master Controller Daughter Card LEDs ...............................................................................2-9
Master Controller Daughter Card Switches .........................................................................2-9
Extended Power Supply with IDNet 2 ...............................................................................2-10
FACP Operator Interface ............................................................................................... 2-12
Operator Interface ..............................................................................................................2-12
FACP Expansion Bays .................................................................................................. 2-13
Additional CPU Bay Modules .............................................................................................2-13
Expansion Bays .................................................................................................................2-13
FACP Power Requirements .......................................................................................... 2-14
System Power ....................................................................................................................2-14

8
Table of Contents

Power Requirements .........................................................................................................2-14

Overview ............................................................................................................................2-15
Specifications .....................................................................................................................2-15
Mounting the Back Boxes ..................................................................................................2-16
Step 2. Mounting the System Electronics ................................................................... 2-18
Overview ............................................................................................................................2-18
Mounting the System Electronics Bays ..............................................................................2-18
Step 3. Trim Kit Application (optional) ........................................................................ 2-21
Trim Application .................................................................................................................2-21
Step 4. Mounting the Door ............................................................................................ 2-22
Overview ............................................................................................................................2-22
Attaching Doors ................................................................................................................2-23
Reversing the Door ...........................................................................................................2-24
Step 5. Installing Motherboards into the CPU Bay ..................................................... 2-25
Overview ............................................................................................................................2-25
4100ES CPU Bay Placement Guidelines ..........................................................................2-25
Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays ........................................................ 2-26
Overview ............................................................................................................................2-26
4100ES Placement Guidelines ..........................................................................................2-26
Motherboard Placement Guidelines for a 4100ES bay ......................................................2-27
Mixed 4100 Motherboard/4100ES 4”x5” Card Placement Guidelines ...............................2-28
Installing 4 X 5 Cards .........................................................................................................2-29
Installing Motherboards into a 4100ES Expansion Bay .....................................................2-30
Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays ................................................................ 2-31
Overview ............................................................................................................................2-31
Guidelines ..........................................................................................................................2-31
Power Distribution Module Connections ............................................................................2-31
SPS CPU Card Interconnections in the CPU Bay .............................................................2-34
SPS CPU Card Interconnections in Expansion Bays ........................................................2-34
SPS CPU Basic Bay-To-Bay Interconnections ................................................................2-34
EPS CPU Bay Interconnections .........................................................................................2-36
EPS CPU Interconnections in Expansion Bays .................................................................2-36
EPS CPU Basic Bay-To-Bay Interconnections ..................................................................2-36
Connecting to 4100 Motherboards .....................................................................................2-37
Step 8. Configuring Cards ............................................................................................ 2-39
Overview ............................................................................................................................2-39
Master Motherboard Configuration ....................................................................................2-39
Master Controller Daughter Card Configuration ................................................................2-39
SPS Configuration .............................................................................................................2-40
EPS Configuration .............................................................................................................2-40
PDI Configuration ...............................................................................................................2-40
Configuring Other Cards ....................................................................................................2-40
Step 9. Installing and Removing Batteries .................................................................. 2-41
Installing and Removing Batteries in a One Bay Cabinet ..................................................2-41
Installing and Removing Batteries in a Multi-Bay Cabinet .................................................2-42
Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures ......................................... 2-43
System Power Up Procedure .............................................................................................2-43
System Power Down Procedure ........................................................................................2-43
The Terminal Block Utility Module ............................................................................... 2-44

9
Table of Contents

Overview ............................................................................................................................2-44
Mounting to the Electronics Bay ........................................................................................2-44

Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components .................................... 3-1

Introduction ..........................................................................................................................3-1
In this chapter ......................................................................................................................3-1
Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders ...................................................................... 3-2
Overview ..............................................................................................................................3-2
Transponder Cabinets .........................................................................................................3-2
Transponder Interface Cards (TICs) and Audio Riser Modules ...........................................3-2
Basic TICs ............................................................................................................................3-2
The Local Mode TIC ............................................................................................................3-3
TIC Audio Risers ..................................................................................................................3-3
TIC Illustrations ....................................................................................................................3-4
Local Mode Specifications ...................................................................................................3-5
LEDs ....................................................................................................................................3-6
Card Specifications ..............................................................................................................3-6
MINIPLEX System Guidelines ........................................................................................ 3-7
Overview ..............................................................................................................................3-7
Guidelines ............................................................................................................................3-7
Configuring Cards ........................................................................................................... 3-8
Overview ..............................................................................................................................3-8
TIC Configuration .................................................................................................................3-8
CPU Motherboard DIP Switch (SPS Configuration Only) ...................................................3-8
Configuring Other Cards ......................................................................................................3-8
TIC/Riser Mounting .......................................................................................................... 3-9
Overview ..............................................................................................................................3-9
Mounting Instructions ...........................................................................................................3-9
TIC/Motherboard Interconnections .............................................................................. 3-10
Interconnections .................................................................................................................3-10
RUI Wiring ...................................................................................................................... 3-11
Overview ............................................................................................................................3-11
RUI/RUI+ Specifications ....................................................................................................3-11
Wiring Configurations .........................................................................................................3-11
MINIPLEX Audio Wiring ................................................................................................ 3-12
Overview ............................................................................................................................3-12
Analog Interconnections ....................................................................................................3-12
Digital Interconnections (4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller) ...........................................3-13

Chapter 4 Networking ........................................................................................ 4-1

Introduction ..........................................................................................................................4-1
In this chapter ......................................................................................................................4-1
Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card .......................................................... 4-2
Overview ..............................................................................................................................4-2
Network Module Illustrations ................................................................................................4-3
NIC Card LED Indications ....................................................................................................4-3
4100 Motherboard Options ..................................................................................................4-4
NIC Card Modules ...............................................................................................................4-5
Requirements and Limitations .............................................................................................4-6

10
Table of Contents

Step 1. Configuring Network Cards ............................................................................... 4-7

Overview ..............................................................................................................................4-7
Motherboard Jumper Settings ..............................................................................................4-7
NIC Card Address Setting ....................................................................................................4-7
NIC Card Jumper Settings ...................................................................................................4-7
Wired Media Card Jumper Settings .....................................................................................4-7
Modem Media Card Jumper Settings ..................................................................................4-8
Fiber Media Jumper Settings (746-109 only) .......................................................................4-8
Step 2. Mounting Media Cards to the NIC ..................................................................... 4-9
Overview ..............................................................................................................................4-9
Media Card Mounting ...........................................................................................................4-9
Step 3. Mounting Network Cards ................................................................................. 4-10
Daughter Card Installing ....................................................................................................4-10
Step 4. Wiring Network Cards ...................................................................................... 4-11
Overview ............................................................................................................................4-11
Wiring Guidelines ...............................................................................................................4-11
Wiring Distances ................................................................................................................4-12
Related Documentation .....................................................................................................4-12
Fiber-Optic Wiring ..............................................................................................................4-13
Fiber Optic Connection Types ...........................................................................................4-13
4190-9010 Coupler Requirements .....................................................................................4-14
Wiring with the Wired Media Card .....................................................................................4-15
Modem Guidelines .............................................................................................................4-17
Modem Wiring ....................................................................................................................4-17
Wiring Illustrations ..............................................................................................................4-18
Wired Media Style 7 Wiring ................................................................................................4-18
Fiber Optic Style 7 Wiring ..................................................................................................4-19
Wired Media and Fiber Optic Style 7 Wiring ......................................................................4-20
Modem Media Wiring (Non-4100ES/4100U Only) .............................................................4-21
Network Audio Wiring ................................................................................................... 4-22
Head-End Audio Network Configuration ............................................................................4-22
Locations on the Network Audio Riser Controller Module .................................................4-22
Card Specifications ............................................................................................................4-23
Analog Interconnections ....................................................................................................4-24
Digital Interconnections for the 4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller ..................................4-25
Distributed Microphone Interconnections ...........................................................................4-26
Reference for MCC DARIC Installation ..............................................................................4-26
Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug ............................................................................. 4-27
Overview ............................................................................................................................4-27
Installing a Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug .................................................................4-27

Chapter 5 The System Power Supply (SPS) .................................................... 5-1

Introduction ..........................................................................................................................5-1
In this chapter ......................................................................................................................5-1
SPS Specifications .......................................................................................................... 5-2
Input/Output/Battery Specifications ......................................................................................5-2
SPS Current Consumption ...................................................................................................5-3
SPS Configuration ........................................................................................................... 5-4
Overview ..............................................................................................................................5-4

11
Table of Contents

Jumper Settings ...................................................................................................................5-4

Setting the Device Address ..................................................................................................5-4
SPS LED Indications ....................................................................................................... 5-5
LEDs ....................................................................................................................................5-5
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................. 5-6
Overview ..............................................................................................................................5-6
IDNet Power Monitor Trouble ..............................................................................................5-6
Extra Device .........................................................................................................................5-6
Class A Trouble ...................................................................................................................5-6
Earth Fault Search ...............................................................................................................5-6
Short Circuit .........................................................................................................................5-6
Channel Fail .........................................................................................................................5-6
No Answer/Bad Answer .......................................................................................................5-6
Output Abnormal ..................................................................................................................5-6

Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring ................................................................ 6-1

Introduction ..........................................................................................................................6-1
In this chapter ......................................................................................................................6-1
General Field Wiring Guidelines .................................................................................... 6-2
General Guidelines ..............................................................................................................6-2
Power-Limited Guidelines ....................................................................................................6-3
Power Supply Wiring Distances ..................................................................................... 6-5
Overview ..............................................................................................................................6-5
Class A NAC Wiring Table ...................................................................................................6-5
Class B NAC Wiring Table ...................................................................................................6-6
SPS NAC Field Wiring Guidelines .................................................................................. 6-7
Guidelines ............................................................................................................................6-7
SPS NAC Wiring .............................................................................................................. 6-8
Class A NAC Wiring .............................................................................................................6-8
Class B NAC Wiring .............................................................................................................6-9
SPS IDNet Field Wiring Guidelines .............................................................................. 6-10
IDNet Wiring .......................................................................................................................6-10
Guidelines ..........................................................................................................................6-10
SPS IDNet Wiring ........................................................................................................... 6-11
Class A Wiring ...................................................................................................................6-11
Class B Wiring ...................................................................................................................6-12
SPS Auxiliary Power Wiring ......................................................................................... 6-13
Guidelines ..........................................................................................................................6-13
Wiring .................................................................................................................................6-14
SPS Auxiliary Relay Wiring .......................................................................................... 6-15
Guidelines ..........................................................................................................................6-15
Wiring .................................................................................................................................6-15

Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2 ............................................................................... 7-1

Introduction ..........................................................................................................................7-1
In this chapter ......................................................................................................................7-1
EPS Specifications .......................................................................................................... 7-2
Card Specifications ..............................................................................................................7-2

12
Table of Contents

EPS Configuration ........................................................................................................... 7-3

Setting the EPS Address .....................................................................................................7-3
Earth Connect Jumper .........................................................................................................7-4
Battery Disconnect Jumper ..................................................................................................7-4
EPS IDNet 2 Configuration .............................................................................................. 7-5
Setting the Address ..............................................................................................................7-5
Connections ..................................................................................................................... 7-6
Connection to the Power Distribution Module ......................................................................7-6
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................. 7-7
LED Trouble Indicator Overview ..........................................................................................7-7
System Trouble LED Codes ................................................................................................7-7
SLC Channel Trouble LED Codes .......................................................................................7-8
Trouble Messages ...............................................................................................................7-9

Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring ................................................................... 8-1

Introduction ..........................................................................................................................8-1
In this chapter ......................................................................................................................8-1
EPS Wiring Overview ...................................................................................................... 8-2
General Wiring Guidelines ...................................................................................................8-2
Power-Limited Guidelines ....................................................................................................8-2
EPS Class B IDNAC Wiring ............................................................................................. 8-3
Wiring Overview ...................................................................................................................8-3
IDNAC Wiring Guidelines .....................................................................................................8-3
IDNAC Speaker Wiring Application Guidelines ....................................................................8-3
Ferrite Beads .......................................................................................................................8-4
EPS Wiring Tables ........................................................................................................... 8-5
Class B Wiring Tables ..........................................................................................................8-5
EPS Wiring to Devices .................................................................................................... 8-7
Class B Wiring to IDNAC Devices .......................................................................................8-7
4009 IDNAC Repeater .........................................................................................................8-7
Dual Class A Isolator (DCAI) ...............................................................................................8-7
Calculating Class B wiring with Isolators .............................................................................8-8
EPS Auxiliary Power Wiring ........................................................................................... 8-9
AUX/ NAC Terminal .............................................................................................................8-9
IDNet 2 Card Wiring ....................................................................................................... 8-10
Wiring Overview .................................................................................................................8-10
Wiring Parameters .............................................................................................................8-10
Class A Wiring ...................................................................................................................8-11
Class B Wiring ...................................................................................................................8-12

Chapter 9 PC Software Connections ............................................................... 9-1

Introduction ..........................................................................................................................9-1
In this chapter ......................................................................................................................9-1
Software Modes ............................................................................................................... 9-2
Software Modes ...................................................................................................................9-2
Ethernet Service Port and Serial Service Port .............................................................. 9-4
Ethernet Service Port Overview (0566-719 only) .................................................................9-4
Serial Service Port Overview ...............................................................................................9-4

13
Table of Contents

Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application .................................................................. 10-1

Introduction ........................................................................................................................10-1
In this chapter ....................................................................................................................10-1
Application of 4100ES as a UL2572 Mass Notification System ................................. 10-2
General Information ...........................................................................................................10-2
Hierarchy of Operator Interfaces ........................................................................................10-2
Priority of Signals ...............................................................................................................10-3
Overriding Fire Alarm Signals ............................................................................................10-3
Timing Equations ...............................................................................................................10-4
Appliance Control Equations ..............................................................................................10-4
Public Accessible Panic Switches ......................................................................................10-4
Programming and Configuration ................................................................................. 10-5
Programming the 4100ES to Meet MNS Requirements ....................................................10-5
Minimum Configuration for LOC and ACU .........................................................................10-5
Access and Security Information for the 4100ES System .................................................10-6
Voice Control Centers ........................................................................................................10-6
Configuration Limitations ...................................................................................................10-6
Amber Strobes ...................................................................................................................10-7
MNS Wiring ........................................................................................................................10-7

Appendix A The Device Configuration DIP Switch .........................................A-1

Overview ............................................................................................................................. A-1
The Service Port ............................................................................................................. A-2
Overview ............................................................................................................................. A-2

Chapter B Installing 4100 FACP Components (Non-4100ES/4100U) ............B-1

Introduction ......................................................................................................................... B-1
In this chapter ..................................................................................................................... B-1
Introduction to FACPs .................................................................................................... B-2
Overview ............................................................................................................................. B-2
Master Controller Bay ......................................................................................................... B-2
Master Motherboards and Controllers ................................................................................ B-3
Universal Power Supply (UPS) ........................................................................................... B-5
Operator Interface ............................................................................................................... B-6
Additional CPU Bay Modules .............................................................................................. B-6
Expansion Bays .................................................................................................................. B-6
System Power ..................................................................................................................... B-7
Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes ....................................................................................... B-8
Overview ............................................................................................................................. B-8
Specifications ...................................................................................................................... B-8
Installing the Back Box(es) ................................................................................................. B-9
Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes ................................................... B-10
Overview ........................................................................................................................... B-10
Installing the System Electronics Bays ............................................................................. B-10
Step 3. Configuring Modules ....................................................................................... B-14
Overview ........................................................................................................................... B-14
Master Motherboard Configuration ................................................................................... B-14
565-333 Master Controller Configuration .......................................................................... B-14
565-148 Master Controller Configuration .......................................................................... B-15

14
Table of Contents

UPS Configuration ............................................................................................................ B-15

Configuring Other Cards ................................................................................................... B-16
Step 4. Interconnecting Master Controller Bay Cards .............................................. B-17
Overview ........................................................................................................................... B-17
Interconnecting Cards ....................................................................................................... B-17
Step 5. Installing Motherboards into Expansion Bays .............................................. B-18
Overview ........................................................................................................................... B-18
Guidelines ......................................................................................................................... B-18
Installing Motherboards ..................................................................................................... B-18
Connecting the 733-525 Harness ..................................................................................... B-19

Chapter C Installing 4100 MINIPLEX Components (Non-4100ES/4100U) ....C-1

Introduction ......................................................................................................................... C-1
In this chapter ..................................................................................................................... C-1
Introduction to MINIPLEX Systems ............................................................................... C-2
Overview ............................................................................................................................. C-2
MINIPLEX System Components .................................................................................... C-4
Overview ............................................................................................................................. C-4
The RUI Card ...................................................................................................................... C-4
Transponder Cabinets ........................................................................................................ C-4
The Remote Interface Card (RIC) ....................................................................................... C-5
MINIPLEX System Guidelines ....................................................................................... C-6
Overview ............................................................................................................................. C-6
Guidelines ........................................................................................................................... C-6
Installing Modules into Back Boxes ............................................................................. C-7
Overview ............................................................................................................................. C-7
Guidelines ........................................................................................................................... C-7
Installing the RUI Motherboard ........................................................................................... C-7
Installing the RIC II Motherboard ........................................................................................ C-8
Connecting the 733-525 Harness ....................................................................................... C-9
MINIPLEX Wiring .......................................................................................................... C-11
Overview ........................................................................................................................... C-11
Wiring Configurations ........................................................................................................ C-11
Class A Wiring .................................................................................................................. C-11
Class B Wiring .................................................................................................................. C-11
Wiring Illustration .............................................................................................................. C-12

Appendix D Checking System Wiring ..............................................................D-1

Overview ............................................................................................................................. D-1
Using the Volt/ Ohm Meter .................................................................................................. D-1
Checking System Wiring ............................................................................................... D-2
Meter Readings ................................................................................................................... D-2

Appendix E References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions ...........E-1

Overview ............................................................................................................................. E-1

Appendix F Labels ............................................................................................. F-1

15
Table of Contents

Appendix G Earth Fault Diagnostics ............................................................... G-1

Overview .............................................................................................................................G-1
In this chapter .....................................................................................................................G-1
General Guidelines ......................................................................................................... G-2
General Guidelines .............................................................................................................G-2
Earth Fault Searching from the Front Panel ................................................................ G-3
Overview .............................................................................................................................G-3
Access Level Selection .......................................................................................................G-3
Starting the Earth Fault Search ...........................................................................................G-3
Search Option A: Select Location .......................................................................................G-4
Search Option B: Select Channel .......................................................................................G-5
Search Option C: Last Search Result .................................................................................G-5
Completing the Search .......................................................................................................G-5
Search Results ................................................................................................................ G-6
Overview .............................................................................................................................G-6
Non-Point Faults .................................................................................................................G-6
Point Faults .........................................................................................................................G-6
Fault Not Found ..................................................................................................................G-7
No Fault ..............................................................................................................................G-7
Result Not Available ............................................................................................................G-7
Earth Fault Search Example .......................................................................................... G-8
Earth Fault Search Example ...............................................................................................G-8

Appendix H Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and

Accessories ........................................................................................................H-1

Appendix I EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices ..................................... I-1

EPS Compatible Devices ......................................................................................................I-1
EPS Compatible Appliances .................................................................................................I-1

Appendix J Cooper Wheelock Appliances Compatible With 4100ES Wheelock

Protocol For Special Applications ................................................................... J-1
Overview ..............................................................................................................................J-1
Synchronizing Horn Strobes ................................................................................................J-1
Synchronizing strobes ..........................................................................................................J-2
Appliances with synchronizing strobes ................................................................................J-3
Synchronizing horns ............................................................................................................J-4
Coded audible appliances ....................................................................................................J-5
Non-synchronizing appliances .............................................................................................J-5

Appendix K Audio Equipment Compatible with 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm K-1
Overview ............................................................................................................................. K-1
Compatible Audio System Components ............................................................................. K-1
Compatible Notification Appliances .................................................................................... K-2
Audio Options Alongside Compatible Equipment ............................................................... K-3

16
List of Figures Figure 1-1. Standalone 4100ES System.............................................................................. 1-3
Figure 1-2. MINIPLEX 4100ES System .............................................................................. 1-5
Figure 1-3. Hub/Ring Configuration .................................................................................... 1-6
Figure 1-4. Interconnected Loop Configuration................................................................... 1-7
Figure 2-1. The CPU Bay..................................................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2-2. Master Motherboard (566-227)......................................................................... 2-3
Figure 2-3. Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719) ..................................................... 2-4
Figure 2-4. System Power Supply (566-071) ...................................................................... 2-6
Figure 2-5. The Power Distribution Interface (PDI) ............................................................. 2-7
Figure 2-6. RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard (566-938)....................................................... 2-7
Figure 2-7. Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719) ..................................................... 2-8
Figure 2-8. EPS with IDNet 2 (566-872) ........................................................................... 2-10
Figure 2-9. IDNet 2 Card................................................................................................... 2-11
Figure 2-10. Operator Interface......................................................................................... 2-12
Figure 2-11. Flexible User Interface.................................................................................. 2-12
Figure 2-12. Expansion Bays ............................................................................................ 2-13
Figure 2-13. System Power............................................................................................... 2-14
Figure 2-14. Back Box Installation Diagram...................................................................... 2-16
Figure 2-15. Back Box side views (plastic and metal doors).............................................. 2-17
Figure 2-16. Removing the Shipping Studs ...................................................................... 2-18
Figure 2-17. Mounting the PDM Bracket (2-Bay Box Shown)........................................... 2-19
Figure 2-18. Installing the System Electronics Bay Assembly .......................................... 2-20
Figure 2-19. Semi-Flush Trim Kit ...................................................................................... 2-21
Figure 2-20. Applying the Trim.......................................................................................... 2-21
Figure 2-21. Front and Back View of a Glass Door........................................................... 2-22
Figure 2-22. Front and Back view of a Solid Door ............................................................ 2-22
Figure 2-23. Reversing the Lock Catch............................................................................. 2-23
Figure 2-24. Securing the Dress Panel ............................................................................. 2-23
Figure 2-25. Hinge Pin Alignment ..................................................................................... 2-23
Figure 2-26. The Ground Wire .......................................................................................... 2-24
Figure 2-27. CPU Bay Card Placement ............................................................................ 2-25
Figure 2-28. Expansion Bay 4” X 5” Card Placement ....................................................... 2-26
Figure 2-29. Expansion Bay Motherboard Placement ...................................................... 2-27
Figure 2-30. Mixed Module Placement ............................................................................. 2-28
Figure 2-31. Slave Card/PDI Connection.......................................................................... 2-29
Figure 2-32. Installing the Motherboard in a 4100ES Expansion Bay............................... 2-30
Figure 2-33. Wiring Looped Through Ferrite Bead ........................................................... 2-31
Figure 2-34. FACP Power Supply Assembly Connector (EPS shown)............................. 2-32
Figure 2-35. XPS/PDM Connection .................................................................................. 2-33
Figure 2-36. Bay-to-Bay Interconnections......................................................................... 2-34
Figure 2-37. Basic CPU Interconnections ......................................................................... 2-37
Figure 2-38. Power and Communication Wiring for Motherboards ................................... 2-38
Figure 2-39. One Bay Battery Installation ......................................................................... 2-41
Figure 2-40. Multi-Bay Battery Installation ........................................................................ 2-42
Figure 2-41. Terminal Block Utility Module Mounting........................................................ 2-44
Figure 3-1. Transponder Interface Cards............................................................................. 3-4
Figure 3-2. TIC Mounting .................................................................................................... 3-9
Figure 3-3. Transponder Cabinet Interconnections........................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-4. Loop Wire Through Ferrite Bead as Shown ................................................... 3-11
Figure 3-5. TIC Wiring to the Host Panel .......................................................................... 3-11
Figure 3-6. Analog Audio Interconnections ....................................................................... 3-12
Figure 3-7. Digital Interconnections (4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller) ........................ 3-13
Figure 4-1. 4100-6014 Network Interface Card.................................................................... 4-3
Figure 4-2. UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-274) ............................................. 4-4
Figure 4-3. UT Motherboard without City Connection (565-275) ........................................ 4-4
Figure 4-4. The 4100/4120-0143/ 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card............................... 4-5
Figure 4-5. The 4100/4120-0142 Wired Media Card (565-413).......................................... 4-5
Figure 4-6. The 4100-6055 Modem Media Card (565-279 or 566-338).............................. 4-6
Figure 4-7. Media Card Mounting ....................................................................................... 4-9
Figure 4-8. Installing the Daughter Card ........................................................................... 4-10
Figure 4-9. The Transient Suppressor .............................................................................. 4-12
Figure 4-10. Fiber Wiring .................................................................................................. 4-13
Figure 4-11. Coupler Wiring .............................................................................................. 4-15

17
List of Figures Figure 4-12. Wired Media Interconnections Between 4100ES Motherboards .................. 4-16
Figure 4-13. Modem Wiring............................................................................................... 4-17
Figure 4-14. Wired Media, Style 7 Wiring ......................................................................... 4-18
Figure 4-15. Fiber Optic, Style 7 Wiring ............................................................................ 4-19
Figure 4-16. Wired Media and Fiber Optic, Style 7 Wiring................................................ 4-20
Figure 4-17. Modem Media Wiring (Non-4100ES/4100U Only)........................................ 4-21
Figure 4-18. Network Audio Riser Controller Module........................................................ 4-22
Figure 4-19. Analog Audio Interconnections ..................................................................... 4-24
Figure 4-20. Digital Audio Interconnections (4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller)............ 4-25
Figure 4-21. Distributed Microphone Interconnections ..................................................... 4-26
Figure 4-22. Installing a Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug ............................................ 4-27
Figure 6-1. Power-Limited Wiring......................................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6-2. The EOL Relay ................................................................................................. 6-4
Figure 6-3. Class A NAC Wiring.......................................................................................... 6-8
Figure 6-4. Class B Wiring .................................................................................................. 6-9
Figure 6-5. Loop Wiring as Shown.................................................................................... 6-10
Figure 6-6 . Class A Wiring ............................................................................................... 6-11
Figure 6-7. Class B Wiring ................................................................................................ 6-12
Figure 6-8. Auxiliary Power Wiring.................................................................................... 6-14
Figure 6-9. Auxiliary Relay Wiring..................................................................................... 6-15
Figure 7-1. EPS Card Layout .............................................................................................. 7-2
Figure 7-2. DIP Switch SW2 ............................................................................................... 7-3
Figure 7-3. Earth Connect Jumper Positions ...................................................................... 7-4
Figure 7-4. Battery Disconnect Jumper Positions ............................................................... 7-4
Figure 7-5. DIP Switch SW1 ............................................................................................... 7-5
Figure 7-6. PDM/Battery Connections ................................................................................ 7-6
Figure 7-7. LED Location .................................................................................................... 7-7
Figure 8-1. Power-Limited Wiring Guidelines...................................................................... 8-2
Figure 8-2. Ferrite Bead Installation.................................................................................... 8-4
Figure 8-3. Class B Wiring .................................................................................................. 8-7
Figure 8-4. Class B Wiring With Isolators ........................................................................... 8-8
Figure 8-5. AUX/NAC Terminal........................................................................................... 8-9
Figure 8-6. Simple NAC Wiring ........................................................................................... 8-9
Figure 8-7. Class A Jumper Setting .................................................................................. 8-11
Figure 8-8. IDNet 2 Class A Wiring ................................................................................... 8-11
Figure 8-9. Class B Jumper Setting .................................................................................. 8-12
Figure 8-10. IDNet 2 Class B Wiring ................................................................................. 8-12
Figure 9-1. Service and Diagnostic Interface ....................................................................... 9-2
Figure 9-2. Data Transfer Interface..................................................................................... 9-2
Figure 9-3. Bootloader Interface ......................................................................................... 9-3
Figure 9-4. CPU card ports ................................................................................................. 9-4
Figure 9-5. Front Panel Ethernet Service Port .................................................................... 9-4
Figure 10-1. Supervisory and Trouble LEDs for both MNS and Fire ................................. 10-5
Figure 10-2. Voice Message Configuration Example........................................................ 10-6
Figure A-1. DIP Switch SWx ................................................................................................ A-1
Figure B-1. Master Controller Bay (4100) ............................................................................ B-2
Figure B-2. UT Motherboard (565-161)............................................................................... B-3
Figure B-3. UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-213)............................................. B-3
Figure B-4. UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-274)............................................. B-3
Figure B-5. UT Master Controller (565-333) ....................................................................... B-4
Figure B-6. UT Master Controller (565-148) ....................................................................... B-4
Figure B-7. Universal Power Supply ................................................................................... B-5
Figure B-8. Operator Interface ............................................................................................ B-6
Figure B-9. Master Controller and Expansion Bays ............................................................ B-6
Figure B-10. Power and Comm Lines ................................................................................. B-7
Figure B-11. Back Box Installation Diagram ....................................................................... B-9
Figure B-12. Removing the Shipping Studs ...................................................................... B-10
Figure B-13. Inserting the Mounting Screws ..................................................................... B-11
Figure B-14. Installing the System Electronics Bay Assembly.......................................... B-12
Figure B-15. Master Controller Bay Interconnections ....................................................... B-17
Figure B-16. Installing the Motherboard in an Expansion Bay .......................................... B-18
Figure B-17. Power and Communication Wiring for Motherboards................................... B-20
Figure C-1. MINIPLEX System Design ................................................................................C-3

18
List of Figures Figure C-2. The Remote Unit Interface Card ...................................................................... C-4
Figure C-3. The RIC II Card ................................................................................................ C-5
Figure C-4. Installing the RUI Motherboard in the CPU Bay............................................... C-7
Figure C-5. Installing the RIC II Motherboard into a 4100 Expansion Bay.......................... C-8
Figure C-6. Power and Communication Wiring for the Transponder Cabinet (4100) ....... C-10
Figure C-7. MINIPLEX Wiring ........................................................................................... C-12
Figure G-1. Earth Fault Example .........................................................................................G-8

19
List of Tables

Table 2-1. CPU Components .............................................................................................. 2-2

Table 2-2. Master Controller Bootloader LEDs .................................................................... 2-5
Table 2-3. Master Controller Switches ................................................................................ 2-5
Table 2-4. Master Controller Bootloader LEDs .................................................................... 2-9
Table 2-5. Master Controller Switches ................................................................................ 2-9
Table 2-6. Power Requirements ........................................................................................ 2-14
Table 2-7. Contents of the Back Box Bay Mounting Hardware Kit .................................... 2-15
Table 2-8. Recommended Torque for Mounting Hardware ............................................... 2-18
Table 3-1.TIC Specifications ............................................................................................... 3-6
Table 4-1. Electrical and Environmental Specifications ....................................................... 4-6
Table 4-2. Wiring Distances .............................................................................................. 4-12
Table 4-3. Dual Fiber Optic Cable Communications Distance Examples .......................... 4-14
Table 4-4. Single Fiber Optic Cable Communications Distance Examples* ...................... 4-14
Table 4-5. CPU Motherboard Wired Media Connections .................................................. 4-16
Table 4-6. Network Audio Riser Controller Specifications ................................................. 4-23
Table 5-1. Input and Output Specifications ......................................................................... 5-2
Table 5-2. SPS Current Specifications ................................................................................ 5-3
Table 6-1. Class A Wiring Distances ................................................................................... 6-5
Table 6-2. Class B Wiring Distances ................................................................................... 6-6
Table 7-1. Card Specifications ............................................................................................ 7-2
Table 7-2. EPS Card Addresses ......................................................................................... 7-3
Table 7-3. 4100-3109 Card Addresses ............................................................................... 7-5
Table 7-4. The 8 EPS indicator LEDs. ................................................................................ 7-7
Table 7-5. System Trouble LED Codes ............................................................................... 7-7
Table 7-6. SLC Channel Trouble LED Codes ..................................................................... 7-8
Table 7-7. EPS Trouble Messages ...................................................................................... 7-9
Table 8-1. UTP Wiring Limit Based on Alarm Current ......................................................... 8-5
Table 8-2. UTP Wiring Limit Based on Communication ...................................................... 8-5
Table 8-3. Ohms per 1000 ft ................................................................................................ 8-5
Table 8-4. UTP Wiring Limit for Speakers and Speaker/Visible devices based on Communication
8-6
Table 8-5. AUX/NAC Wiring Specification ........................................................................... 8-9
Table 8-6. NAC Wiring Limits .............................................................................................. 8-9
Table 8-7. IDNet 2 Card Wiring Parameters ...................................................................... 8-10
Table 10-1. Minimum Configuration for LOC and ACU ..................................................... 10-5
Table A-1. Card Addresses ................................................................................................ A-2
Table B-1. Back Box Specifications .................................................................................... B-8
Table B-2. Contents of the Back Box Mounting Hardware Kit ............................................ B-8
Table B-3. Recommended Torque for Mounting Hardware .............................................. B-12
Table B-4. UPS SW1 Battery Configurations ................................................................... B-15
Table D-1. Acceptable Zone and Signal Circuit Meter Readings ....................................... D-2
Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions .................................... E-1
Table H-1. Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories H-1
Table I-1. Compatible Devices ............................................................................................. I-1
Table I-2. Compatible Appliances ......................................................................................... I-1
Table J-1. Synchronizing Horn Strobes ............................................................................... J-1
Table J-2. Synchronizing strobes ........................................................................................ J-2
Table J-3. Appliances with synchronizing strobes ............................................................... J-3
Table J-4. Synchronizing horns ........................................................................................... J-4
Table J-5. Coded audible appliances .................................................................................. J-5
Table J-6. Non-synchronizing appliances ............................................................................ J-5
Table K-1. Compatible Audio System Components ........................................................... K-1
Table K-2. Compatible Notification Appliances .................................................................. K-2
Table K-3. Audio Options That May Be Configured Alongside Compatible Equipment ..... K-3

20
 Chapter 1
Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System
Introduction The 4100ES is an expandable fire alarm system that can be used as a standalone system with
one host panel, or as a wide-ranging system with several remote back boxes, with or without
multiple host panels. This chapter is an overview of standalone, MINIPLEX®, and network
4100ES system concepts.

Two types of 4100ES Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACP) configurations are described in this
manual:

• The “SPS configuration”, which refers to FACPS that use a System Power Supply (SPS)
card as the FACP’s Central Processing Unit’s (CPU) powers supply.
• The “EPS configuration”, which refers to FACPS that have an Extended Power Supply
(EPS) module fitted with an IDNET 2 card as the CPU FACP power supply

References to “non-4100ES/4100U”, “Legacy 4100”, “4120”, or “4020” throughout the

manual are for retrofit applications only.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

System configurations 1-2

Standalone configuration 1-3

MINIPLEX configuration 1-4

Network configuration 1-6

4100ES Back Box PIDs 1-8

4100ES PIDs 1-9

4100 PIDs (non-4100ES/4100U) 1-21

1-1
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

System configurations

Overview The 4100ES is available as a standalone system with one host panel, or as an expansive system
with several remote back boxes, with or without multiple host panels. The type of 
configuration used depends on the size of the site into which it is being installed.

The following types of configurations are offered:

Standalone. Comprised of one FACP and its assorted notification appliances, initiating
devices, and signaling line circuit devices.

MINIPLEX. A standalone system plus remote transponder cabinets, which allow for
additional slave modules to be used. Typically used for multi-level buildings and small 
multi-building applications.

Network. A multi-FACP system connected by network cards. Each panel maintains the status
and control of its own circuit points while monitoring and controlling activity at other
locations. Network nodes may perform similar tasks, or may be dedicated to specific functions.

This chapter outlines the fundamental concepts of each configuration

1-2
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

Standalone configuration

Overview The standalone version of the 4100ES is used for smaller or single-building applications. A
standalone system is ideally placed into a small building that requires a limited number of
notification appliances and initiating devices.

If a small building is being expanded, or if other buildings are being constructed in the same
general area (as in a campus application), the standalone 4100ES can be expanded into one of
the larger systems described later.
.

System design The standalone 4100ES uses one FACP (one, two, or three bays) containing the following:
• Central Processing Unit (CPU)
• System Power Supply for the 4100ES FACP (Universal Power Supply for 4100 Legacy
Upgrade)
• Optional slave cards

All appliances and devices are connected to that one FACP, as shown in Figure 1-1.

To additional IDNet devices, up to 250 total

TrueAlarm smoke
to Device sensor with base
- IDNET IN +
+IDNET IN -

Supervised IAM

Remote line
powered isolator
FIRE ALARM

PULL DOWN

Addressable 1 + 24V ZONE PWR + 5

2 0V ZONE PWR - 6

station
3 +IDNET IDC + 7
4 - IDNET IDC - 8

1 5

2 6

4
SIMPLEX TIME RECORDER CO.

4090-9101
MONITOR ZAM, CLASS B
INSTAL. INSTR. 574-183

DATE CODE:

1
7

8
to Device(s)

Monitor, signal, and

Relay IAMs
TrueAlarm thermal
sensor with base

AB C D EF G HI
ZONE SI G AUX

SYSTEM IS NORMAL 1 2 3
08:23:43 am MON 11-DEC-00 JKL
FB
M NO
IO
PQ R
I DNe t

ALARMS SYSTEM WARNINGS AC Power

4 5 6
Fire Alarm Priority 2 Alarm Supervisory Trouble Alarm Silenced S TU VW X Y Z/
P A L
7 8 9
'SP' ( ) ,0:
Fire Alarm Priority 2 Supv Trouble Alarm System
NET ADDR
Ack Ack Ack Ack Silence Reset DEL
0

Event More Enter C/Exit

Time Info P revi ous

Menu
On Next
Enable
Arm

Off Lamp
Disable Auto
Disarm Test

Emergency Operating Instructions

Alarm or Warning Condition How t o Silence Building Signals
System indi cator flashing. Tone On. Press Alarm Silence.

How to Acknowledge / View Events How t o Reset System

Press ACK located und er flashing indicato r. Press System Reset.
Repeat operation until all events are acknowledged. Press Ack to silence tone device.
Local tone will silence .

Fire Control

Figure 1-1. Standalone 4100ES system

1-3
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

MINIPLEX configuration

Overview The MINIPLEX version of the 4100ES Fire Alarm System, which is designed for moderately
larger applications than the standalone configuration, allows up to 2000 monitor and/or control
points and 2000 annunciator points to be controlled by a single FACP.

Like the standalone system, only one CPU is used. Remote Unit Interface (RUI) data and
power is distributed from the host panel to remote boxes called transponder cabinets. The exact
system design varies, depending on whether the system is a 4100 or a 4100ES:

• 4100ES: Transponder interface cards (TICs), located in transponder cabinets, take the RUI
data and power directly from the CPU motherboard and distribute it to modules nearby,
thereby expanding the system’s status from standalone to MINIPLEX.
• 4100: Remote interface cards (RICs), located in transponder cabinets, take the RUI data
and power from the remote unit interface (RUI) card in the host panel and distribute it to
modules nearby, thereby expanding the system’s status from standalone to MINIPLEX.

System design The MINIPLEX 4100ES FACP must contain the following:
• CPU
• System Power Supply for the 4100ES (Universal Power Supply for 4100 Legacy Upgrade)
• 4100 only (non-4100ES/4100U): Remote unit interface (RUI) Card
• Optional slave cards

Each transponder cabinet, meanwhile, must contain a Transponder Interface Card (TIC) and
any number of optional slave cards.

1-4
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

MINIPLEX configuration (continued)

RUI communication 4100ES power and data from the CPU may have to be routed over long distances in a
MINIPLEX system. An RUI line, routed from either the CPU in the 4100ES or the RUI card in
the 4100ES, allows the power and data to travel longer distances. Once the RUI line terminates
at a remote box, the TIC (4100ES) or RIC (4100) at that box distributes the CPU’s power and
data to the remote modules.

Figure 1-2 outlines this process in a typical 4100ES MINIPLEX setup.

Risers from 4100ES to

Remote Transponders RUI I/F Slave
RUI
Analog Audio 9th Floor
Digital Audio (DAR) Transponder
FF Telephone
Shown wired as Style 7 Slave Slave
Unit
(Style 4 also supported)

RUI I/F Slave

6th Floor
Transponder
Slave Slave
Unit

Transponders may be located

further apart (within the 2500'
limit) as called for by the
application requirements.

RUI I/F Slave

3rd Floor
Transponder
Unit
Slave Slave

4100ES

RUI Risers - 4 MAX (same channel) Note:

(from CPU Motherboard or Remote
Unit Interface Card)
Digital Audio Riser
(from Digital Audio Controller)
Although not shown, nested
RUI is supported up to one
level deep.

Analog Audio Risers - 2MAX

(from Analog Audio Controller)

FF Telephone Riser
(from Phone Controller)

Figure 1-2. MINIPLEX 4100ES system

1-5
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

Network configuration

Overview The 4100ES can be expanded to a network system by using network interface cards (NICs).
When a NIC is installed into a 4100ES host panel, it is used to connect to up to 98 other
network nodes. Nodes may consist of other host 4100ES panels, or they may be completely
different: 4010 FACPs, TrueSite® Workstation, and Voice Command Centers (VCCs) are all
examples of what could be used as nodes. A node is a self-sufficient CPU that controls
appliances and devices, which also has the capability of controlling and communicating with
other nodes.

The network configuration supports two prevalent architectures, or wiring configurations: hub
or ring, or star. A networked system can also use a combination of the two.

Hub and star The hub configuration consists of a main loop with nodes connected in a radial manner. The
configurations star configuration consists of several nodes connected directly to one common node. Physical
bridge cards are used for the star configuration. Physical bridges reduce the amount of wire that
would otherwise be needed to connect all nodes in a loop, and therefore cut down on system
response time. A combination of the two styles is illustrated in Figure 1-3.

4100U Panel

Fire Control

Ring Topology
Network,
Style 7/Class A

Hub Node, 4100ES

TrueSite Workstation Star Topology

Connections

4100/4120 Panel

Fire Control

Figure 1-3. Hub/Ring configuration

1-6
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

Network configuration (continued)

Connection loops Network loops can be joined via physical bridge cards. There may be no more than two Style 7
network loops (two hub configurations) connected in tandem. For every two loops that are
interconnected (using one physical bridge), there can be a maximum of three physical bridges
used in a star configuration. See Figure 1-4.

Remote Node

Physical Bridge Link

Fire Control Fire Control

Hub
Local Loop Node
Remote Loop
Fire Control Fire Control

TrueSite Workstation Hub Node Physical Bridge Link TrueSite Workstation

Physical Bridge Links

Fire Control Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 3 Loop 4

1 2 3
Physical Bridging
(Star Configuration)
Fire Control

Up to Four Network Loops can be

connected using 3 Physical Bridges

Figure 1-4. Interconnected loop configuration

System design To be used as a network node, a 4100ES panel must contain the following:
• CPU
• System Power Supply
• 4100 Network Interface Card
• Optional slave cards

Network Network communication is achieved via the 4100-6014 Network Interface Card (NIC). Each
communication network node requires a NIC. Once the FACP is a network node, it may be programmed to be
fully in control of other nodes, or to be fully passive, or anywhere in between.

Overview
This section lists all back box PIDS for the 4100ES Fire Alarm System.

1-7
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES Back Box PIDs

Overview This section lists all back box PIDS for the 4100ES Fire Alarm System.

4100ES Back The 4100ES Back Boxes are shipped as follows:

Boxes
Box and door enclosures:
2975-9441 One Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panels – Red (743-934)
2975-9442 Two-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-935)
2975-9443 Three-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-936)
2975-9444 One-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-937)
2975-9445 Two-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-938)
2975-9446 Three-Bay Back Box, Glass Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-939)
2975-9447 One-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-940)
2975-9448 Two-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-941)
2975-9449 Three-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Red (743-942)
2975-9450 One-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-943)
2975-9451 Two-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-944)
2975-9452 Three-Bay Back Box, Solid Door and Dress Panel – Platinum (743-945)
Doors and Dress Panels:
4100-2104 One-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-950)
4100-2105 Two-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-951)
4100-2106 Three-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-952)
4100-2114 One-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-953)
4100-2115 Two-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-954)
4100-2116 Three-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Platinum (743-955)
4100-2124 One-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-956)
4100-2125 Two-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-957)
4100-2126 Three-Bay Glass Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-958)
4100-2134 One-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-959)
4100-2135 Two-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-960)
4100-2136 Three-Bay Solid Door and Dress Panel - Red (743-961)
Back Boxes by themselves:
2975-9407 One-Bay Red Box (742-414)
2975-9408 Two-Bay Red Box (742-416)
2975-9409 Three-Bay Red Box (742-418)
2975-9438 One-Bay Back Box - Platinum (743-946)
2975-9439 Two-Bay Back Box - Platinum (743-947)
2975-9440 Three-Bay Back Box - Platinum (743-948)
Accessories:
2975-9812 Red Trim Band (742-638)
2975-9813 Semi-Flush Trim Band – Platinum (743-949)

1-8
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs

Overview This section lists the PIDs (model numbers) that are supported by the 4100ES Fire Alarm
System. There are two basic types of PIDs listed here:

• PIDs denoting standard installations, such as host panels containing multiple, already
functioning modules
• PIDs denoting individual modules or back boxes
- offered as an after-market product for standard installations
- offered as options or aftermarket product for configured installations

The 4100ES features either a 2x40 alphanumeric display, or the multi-line LCD of the Flexible
User Interface.

Note: Software-related PIDs, such as vertical market software packages and programmer options, are not
listed in this manual.

Basic Control Control panels available in the U.S. that use the SPS:
Panels (United • 4100-9111 2x40 Master Controller – Domestic (742-830)
States) 4100-9114 Flexible User Interface Master Controller – Domestic (743-201)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux.
Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger and 9 A Total Signal/Card
Power.
• 4100-9121 2x40 Redundant Master Controller – Domestic (742-729)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), Displays (2), CPU Cards (2), System Power Supply that includes 
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux.
Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger and 9 A Total Signal/Card
Power. Occupies two bays.
• 4100-9122 Flexible User Interface Redundant Master Controller – Domestic (743-239)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), Display, CPU Cards (2), System Power Supply that includes 
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux.
Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger and 9 A Total Signal/Card
Power. Occupies two bays.
• 4100-9131 Master Controller – Domestic (742-844)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), No Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux.
Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger and 9 A Total Signal/Card
Power.

Control panels available in the U.S. that use the EPS:

• 4100-9311 Master Controller – Domestic (743-1026)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) 2x40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel (RUI+), Power 
Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points,
1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC 
(127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger
(ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 
207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power 
(6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.

Continued on the next page

1-9
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Basic Control • 4100-9314 Master Controller – Domestic (743-1027)

Panels (United (120VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm (English) Display with raised keys, CPU Card, Isolated
States) RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250
Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points,
3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah
Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/
Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring
power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.
• 4100-9331 Master Controller– Domestic (743-1028)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) No Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution
Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated
IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per
IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for
charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts 
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.

Basic Control Control panels available in Canada that use the SPS:
Panels(Canada) • 4100-9112 2x40 Master Controller – Canadian English (742-831)/
4100-9115 Flexible User Interface Master Controller – Canadian English (743-202)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux.
Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, Battery Cutout Circuit,
and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.
• 4100-9113 2x40 Redundant Master Controller – Canadian French (742-832)/
4100-9116 Flexible User Interface Redundant Master Controller –
Canadian French (743-203)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux.
Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, Battery Cutout Circuit,
and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.
• 4100-9132 Master Controller – Canadian English (742-845)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), No Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250
Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24
VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, Battery Cutout Circuit, and 9 A
Total Signal/Card Power.
• 4100-9133 Master Controller – Canadian French (742-846)
(120 VAC 60 HZ), No Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250
Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay, 24
VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, Battery Cutout Circuit, and 9 A
Total Signal/Card Power.

Continued on the next page

1-10
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Basic Control Control panels available in Canada that use the EPS:
Panels (Canada) • 4100-9312 Master Controller – Canadian English (743-1029)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) 2x40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution
Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated
IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per
IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for
charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts 
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.
• 4100-9313 Master Controller – Canadian French (743-1030)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) 2x40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution
Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated
IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per
IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for
charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts 
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.
• 4100-9315 Master Controller – Canadian English (743-1031)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power 
Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points,
1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127
devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC
Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.
• 4100-9316 Master Controller – Canadian French (743-1032)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power 
Distribution Interface Board, Power Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that
includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable
TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/
Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries)
and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V),
54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault
Detection.
• 4100-9332 Master Controller – Canadian English (743-1033)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) No Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution
Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated
IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per
IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for
charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts 
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.

1-11
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Basic Control International control panels that use the SPS:

Panels • 4100-9211 2x40 Master Controller – International (742-848)/
(International) 4100-9212 Master Controller – 220/240 V (743-204)
4100-9214 Master Controller – China 220/240V (743-765) (220/230/240 VAC 50/60 HZ),
Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3
Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux. Relay,
24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power.
• 4100-9213 Flexible User Interface Master Controller – 220/240 V (743-333)
(120 VAC 60 HZ) Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes 
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 V Aux. Relay,
24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, and 9 A Total Signal/Card Power
• 4100-9230 Master Controller – International (742-849)
(220/230/240 VAC 50/60 HZ), No Display, CPU Card, System Power Supply that includes
250 Addressable/Analog Points, 3 Class A/B NACs, 1 IDNet channel, 24 VDC Aux.
Relay, 24 VDC Aux. Power Tap, 50 Ah (Max) Battery Charger, and 9 A Total Signal/Card
Power.
International control panels that use the EPS:
• 4100-9511 Master Controller – International (743-1034)
(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2x40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power 
Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points,
1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127
devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC
Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection.
• 4100-9512 Master Controller – International (743-1035)
(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm Display (with Slide-in Labels for Language 
Customization), CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board,
Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel,
189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux.
Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50
Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power
(9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth
Fault Detection.
• 4100-9513 Master Controller – International (743-1036)
(120VAC 50/60HZ) InfoAlarm Display (with Slide-in Labels for Language 
Customization), CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power Distribution Interface Board,
Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points, 1 Isolated IDNet channel,
189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127 devices per IDNAC), 24VAux.
Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC Listed for charging external 50
Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts Notification Appliance Power
(9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A), System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth
Fault Detection.
• 4100-9531 Master Controller 250PTS (1 Loop) – International (743-1037)
(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2 X 40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power
Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points,
1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127
devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC
Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection, Power Distribution Module.

1-12
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Basic Control • 4100-9532 Master Controller 500PTS (2 Loops) - International 743-1038)

Panels (220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2 X 40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power
(International) Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points,
1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127
devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC
Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection, Power Distribution Module, IDNet
(4 X 5) Module.
• 4100-9533 Master Controller 750PTS (3 Loops)- International (743-1039)
(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2 X 40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power
Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points,
1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127
devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC
Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection, Power Distribution Module, 2 IDNet
(4 X 5) Modules.
• 4100-9534 Master Controller 500PTS (5 Loops)- International (743-1040)
(220/230/240VAC 50/60HZ) 2 x 40 Display, CPU Card, Isolated RUI channel, Power 
Distribution Interface Board, Power Supply that includes 250 Addressable/Analog Points,
1 Isolated IDNet channel, 189 Addressable TrueAlert Points, 3 Class B IDNAC (127
devices per IDNAC), 24VAux. Power Tap/Simple NAC, 115 Ah Battery Charger (ULC
Listed for charging external 50 Ah batteries) and 9A Total Signal/Card Power, 207 Watts
Notification Appliance Power (9A @ 23V), 54 Watts field wiring power (6V drop, 9A),
System, IDNet and RUI+ Earth Fault Detection, Power Distribution Module, IDNet
Module 250 points (4100-3107).

Transponders This section lists the two transponder cabinets, both of which include an expansion bay with a
power distribution interface (PDI) and a transponder interface card (TIC):
• 4100-9600 Basic Transponder (742-866). Includes a basic TIC.
• 4100-9601 Local Mode Transponder (742-867). Includes a local mode TIC.

Remote • 4100-9610 Remote Annunciator (742-868). Includes an expansion bay with a power
Annunciator distribution interface (PDI) and a transponder interface card (TIC).
• 4100-9611 Remote Annunciator (743-081). Includes an expansion bay with a power
distribution interface (PDI) and a transponder interface card (TIC).

1-13
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Remote Display • 4100-9401 Red Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly - Domestic
Assemblies (743-187). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC 
(566-692).
• 4100-9402 Beige Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly - Domestic
(743-188). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).
• 4100-9421 Red Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly – Canadian French
(743-189). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).
• 4100-9422 Beige Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly – Canadian French
(743-190). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC 
(566-692).
• 4100-9441 Red Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly – International
(743-191). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).
• 4100-9442 Beige Flexible User Interface Remote Display Assembly – International
(743-192). Includes a remote box with a Flexible User Interface display and a TIC (566-692).

Basic Audio This section lists the two audio cabinets, both of which include an audio expansion bay with a
Selections power distribution interface (PDI), audio controller board, and a microphone module.
• 4100-9620 Basic Audio with Microphone – Analog (742-869)
• 4100-9601 Basic Audio with Microphone – Digital (742-870)
Note: Refer to Appendix K for information about 520 Hz compatible audio components.

Utility Cabinets This section lists the two utility cabinets, which contain mounting rails for bays and mounting
plates for 2120 modules.

• 4100-9642 Two-Bay Utility Cabinet Kit (for 2120 Equipment) (742-871). Includes 
two-bay mounting rails and two 4100 (non-4100ES/4100U) expansion bays.
• 4100-9643 Three-Bay Utility Cabinet Kit (for 2120 Equipment) (742-872). Includes 
three-bay mounting rails and three 4100 (non-4100ES/4100U) expansion bays.

Note: The rack-mount option is not Listed for security applications and cannot be used to 
provide monitoring of security parts.

Master Controller Upgrade kits are used for retrofitting newer modules into old-style systems.
Upgrade Kits • 4100-7150 Master Controller Upgrade with 2x40 Display (old 4100 to Rev 10 or higher)
(742-592)
• 4100-7151 Master Controller Upgrade with No Display (old 4100 to Rev 10 or higher)
(742-394)
• 4100-7152 Master Controller Upgrade with 2X40 Display, operator interface and power
supply (old 4100 to Rev 10 or higher) (742-922)
• 4100-7153 Flexible User Interface Display Upgrade (4100ES with 2x40 display to
Flexible User Interface display) (743-240)
• 4100-7154 Master Controller Upgrade with Flexible User Interface Display (old 4100 to
Rev 10 or higher) (743-241)
• 4100-7158 NXP Master Controller Upgrade w/o Display (Legacy 4100 to Rev 13 or
higher) (743-777
• 4100-9833 Master Controller Upgrade with 2x40 Display in One-Bay Beige Enclosure
(4020) (742-804)
Note: The rack-mount option is not Listed for security applications and cannot be used to 
provide monitoring of security parts.

1-14
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Rack Mount Kits • 4100-2140 Bay Mounting Kit (742-741)

• 4100-2144 PDM Mounting Kit (742-547)
Note: The rack-mount option is not Listed for security applications and cannot be used to 
provide monitoring of security parts.

Power • 4100-0634 Power Distribution Module 120 V (742-396)

Distribution • 4100-0635 Power Distribution Module 220/230/240 V (742-513)
Modules
Expansion Bays • 4100-2300 Non-Audio Expansion Bay (742-839)
• 4100-2301 Expansion Bay Upgrade Kit (742-602)
• 4100-2320 Audio Expansion Bay (742-873)

Expansion The expansion battery chargers listed here are used with the standard control panels listed
Battery Chargers above.
for Basic FACPs • 4081-9306 External 120 V Battery Cabinet with Charger for 110 Ah Batteries; Red (637-029)
• 4081-9308 External 220-240 V Battery Cabinet with Charger for 110 Ah Batteries; Red 
(637-030)

Communication The following communication modules can be added on to 4100ES systems.

Modules • 4100-3102 MAPNET II Interface Module (742-696)
• 4100-3103 MAPNET Isolator Module (742-725)
• 4100-3109 IDNet 2 Card, 2 Loops (743-1442)
• 4100-3110 IDNet 2+2 Card, 4 Loops (743-1441)
• 4100-6014 Network Interface Card (NIC) (742-701)
• 4100-6030 Service Modem Module (742-584)
• 4100-6031 City Card with Disconnect (742-403)
• 4100-6032 City Card without Disconnect (742-404)
• 4100-6033 Alarm Relay Card (742-402)
• 4100-6034 Tamper Switch with IDNet IAM (742-648)
• 4100-6036 Physical Bridge (Style 4) (742-702)
• 4100-6037 Physical Bridge (Style 7) (742-703)
• 4100-6038 Dual RS-232 Interface Card (742-704)
• 4100-6039 Modem Bridge (2120) (742-705)
• 4100-6041 DC Powered FSK Modem (2120) (742-707)
• 4100-6042 Communication Line Repeater (2120) (742-708)
• 4100-6043 RS-232/ DC Comm Converter (2120) (742-709)
• 4100-6044 DC Comm/ RS-232 Converter (2120) (742-710)
• 4100-6045 Decoder Module (742-711)
• 4100-6047 Building Interface Card (743-872)
• 4100-6048 VESDA Interface Kit (742-714)
• 4100-6052 DACT (742-700)
• 4100-6054 Fiber-Optic Line Driver (2120) (742-715)
• 4100-6055 Modem Media Card (742-841)
• 4100-6056 Wired Media Card (742-619)
• 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card (742-620)
• 4100-6058 Style 7 Interface Module (DC Comm – 2120) (742-604)
• 4100-6059 Decoder Module (2120) (742-596)
• 4100-6062 TFX Interface (743-278)

Continued on the next page

1-15
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Communication • 4100-6065 BMUX Communication Module (743-645)

Modules • 4100-6069 BACpac Ethernet (743-747)
• 4100-6080 DACT Side Mounted (743-1041)

Power Supplies The power supplies listed below can be used with 4100ES systems.
• 4100-5101 Expansion Power Supply (XPS) (120 VAC) (60 Hz) (742-383)
• 4100-5102 Expansion Power Supply (XPS) (220/230/240 VAC) (50/60 Hz) (742-384)
• 4100-5103 Expansion Power Supply (XPS) (120 VAC) (60 Hz) (Canada) (742-385)
• 4100-5111 System Power Supply (SPS) (120 VAC) (60 Hz) (742-631)
• 4100-5112 System Power Supply (SPS) (220/230/240 VAC) (50/60 Hz) (742-632)
• 4100-5113 System Power Supply (SPS) (120 VAC) (60 Hz) (Canada) (742-633)
• 4100-5115 Expansion NAC Module (XNAC) (742-386)
• 4100-5120 TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS) (120 VAC) (742-659)
• 4100-5121 TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS) (120 VAC) (Canada) (742-660)
• 4100-5122 TrueAlert Power Supply (TPS) (220/230/240 VAC) (742-661)
• 4100-5124 TrueAlert Class A Adapter Module (742-662)
• 4100-5125 Remote Power Supply (RPS) (120 VAC) (742-628)
• 4100-5126 Remote Power Supply (RPS) (120 VAC) (Canada) (742-629)
• 4100-5127 Remote Power Supply (RPS) (220/230/240 VAC) (742-300)
• 4100-5152 12 V, 2 A Power Option (742-718)
• 4100-5153 13 A Utility Power Supply (24 VDC/120 VAC) (2120) (742-719)
• 4100-5154 13 A Utility Power Supply (24 VDC/240 VAC) (2120) (742-720)
• 4100-5155 8 A Expansion Power Supply with 4 A Charger 120/240 VAC (2120) (742-517)
• 4100-0156 8 VDC Converter (742-816)
• 4100-5311 120 V 50/60 Hz EPS with IDNet 2 Card
• 4100-5313 220/230/240 V 50/60 Hz EPS with IDNet 2 Card
• 4100-5325 120 V 50/60 Hz EPS
• 4100-5327 220/230/240 V 50/60Hz EPS

Signaling The signaling modules listed below can be used with 4100ES systems.
Modules • 4100-5005 8-Zone Module (Class B) (742-655)
• 4100-5015 8-Zone Module (Class A) (742-721)
• 4100-3201 4-Relay Module (2 A) (742-722)
• 4100-3202 4-Relay Module (10 A) (742-723)
• 4100-3203 8-Relay Module (3 A) (742-724)
• 4100-3204 4-Point Relay Module (2 A) (742-948)
• 4100-3206 8-Point Relay Module (3 A) (742-949)

1-16
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Annunciator The following annunciator modules are available for the 4100ES.
Modules • 4100-1279 2-inch (51-mm) Blank Display Module (742-519)
• 4100-1280 8-Switch/8-LED Display Card (Red LEDs) (742-509)
• 4100-1281 8-Switch/8-LED Display Card (Yellow LEDs) (742-508)
• 4100-1282 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (1 red / 1 yellow LED per switch) (742-408)
• 4100-1283 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (2 yellow LEDs per switch) (742-409)
• 4100-1284 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (1 red / 1 green LED per switch) (742-407)
• 4100-1285 16-Switch/16-LED Display Card (Red LEDs) (742-507)
• 4100-1286 Hands Off Auto (HOA) Switch Display Card (742-514)
• 4100-1287 24-Switch/24-LED Display Card (Red LEDs) (742-506)
• 4100-1288 LED/Switch Controller Card (742-410)
• 4100-1289 Expansion LED/Switch Controller Card (No mounting plate) (742-626)
• 4100-1290 24-Point Graphic I/O Module (742-726)
• 4100-1291 Remote Unit Interface Card (742-727)
• 4100-1292 Remote Command Center (742-737)
• 4100-1293 Panel-Mounted Printer (742-739)
• 4100-1294 LED/Switch Slide-In Label Kit (for up to 3 Bays) (742-863)
• 4100-1295 HOA Module (No Text) with 24 Switches and 24 Red LEDs (742-874)

Transponders and The following is a list of transponder cabinets and components for the 4100ES.
Transponder • 4100-9600 Basic Transponder (Expansion Bay with PDI and Basic TIC) (742-866)
Components
• 4100-9601 Local Mode Transponder (Expansion Bay with PDI and Local Mode TIC)
(742-867)
• 4100-0620 Basic Transponder Interface Card (TIC) (742-520)
• 4100-0621 Analog Audio Riser Module (742-534)
• 4100-0622 Digital Audio Riser Module (742-535)
• 4100-0625 Local Mode TIC (742-521)
• 4100-0632 Terminal Block Utility Module (742-695)
• 4100-0633 Transponder Cabinet Tamper Switch (742-738)
• 4100-1341 MCC Digital Audio Riser Module (743-850)

Audio Operator The following modules are used only with the 4100U and 4100ES systems.
Interfaces • 4100-1252 Audio Operator Interface – 1 Channel (742-798)
• 4100-1253 Audio Operator Interface – 1.5 Channel (742-801)
• 4100-1254 Audio Operator Interface – 2 Channel (742-799)
• 4100-1255 Audio Operator Interface – 3-8 Channel (742-800)

Audio Controller The following audio controller boards are used with the audio operator interface.
Boards • 4100-1210 Audio Controller Board – Analog, 1.5 Channels (742-517)
• 4100-1211 Audio Controller Board – Digital (742-387)
• 4100-1311 Audio Controller Board – Digital (743-446)

1-17
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Telephones/ The following phone and microphone assemblies are used with audio operator interfaces.
Microphones
• 4100-1270 Master Telephone with Phone Card and 3 NACs (742-865)
• 4100-1271 Remote Master Telephone (742-597)
• 4100-1243 Microphone (742-523)
• 4100-1244 Remote Microphone (742-821)
• 4100-1265 Degraded Fail-Safe Mode Microphone Pre-Amp (Master – 743-238)
• 4100-1269 Degraded Fail-Safe Mode Microphone Pre-Amp (Slave – 743-306)

Additional Audio Optional modules for the 4100ES audio system are listed below.
Modules
• 4100-0623 Network Audio Interface Module (742-522)
• 4100-1240 Aux Audio Input Board (742-388)
• 4100-1241 Audio Message Memory Expansion Module, 8 Minute (742-518)
• 4100-1242 Audio Message Memory Expansion Module, 32 Minute (742-393)
• 4100-1272 Telephone Expansion Card (742-600)
• 4100-1273 Class A Telephone Adapter Module (742-599)
• 4100-1274 Microphone Mux Module (743-808)
Common Audio • 4100-1245 Flex 50 Expansion NAC Board with 3 Class B NACs (742-540)
Options • 4100-1246 Flex 50 Class A Adapter (Converts 3 on-board NACs to Class A) (742-539)
• 4100-1248 100 Watt Expansion NAC Board with 6 Class B NACs (742-524)
• 4100-1249 100 Watt Class A Adapter (Converts 6 on-board NACs to Class A) (742-543)
• 4100-1259 Constant Supervision NAC 25 VRMS with 3 Class A/B Constant Supervision
NACs (Converts 3 on-board NACs to Constant Supervision) (743-163)
• 4100-1260 Constant Supervision NAC 70 VRMS with 3 Class A/B Constant Supervision
NACs (Converts 3 on-board NACs to Constant Supervision) (743-164)
• 4100-1266 Expansion Signal Card Expansion NAC Board with 3 Class B NACs
(743-302)
• 4100-1267 Expansion Signal Card Class A Adapter (Converts 3 on-board NACs to
Class A (743-303)
• 4100-1268 Expansion Signal Card Constant Supervision NAC Adapter, 25 or 70 VRMS
with 3 Class A/B Constant Supervision NACs (Converts 3 on-board NACs to Constant
Supervision) (743-304)
• 4100-5116 Expansion Signal Card with 3 Class B NACs (743-159)

Amplifiers Note: The following amplifiers are used only in the 4100U and 4100ES systems, and are not compatible
with the Constant Supervision NAC (CSNAC) option.
100 W Analog Amplifiers:
• 4100-1214 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-550)
• 4100-1215 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-551)
• 4100-1216 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (742-552)
• 4100-1217 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (742-553)
• 4100-1218 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-554)
• 4100-1219 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-555)
• 4100-1220 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-550)
• 4100-1221 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-551)

Continued on the next page

1-18
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Amplifiers • 4100-1222 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (742-552)

• 4100-1223 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (742-553)
• 4100-1224 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-554)
• 4100-1225 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-555)
100 W Digital Amplifiers (except for 4100-1230 and -1236 [95 W]):
• 4100-1228 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-544)
• 4100-1229 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-545)
• 4100-1230 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (742-546)
• 4100-1231 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (742-547)
• 4100-1232 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-548)
• 4100-1233 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-549)
• 4100-1234 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-544)
• 4100-1235 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-545)
• 4100-1236 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (742-546)
• 4100-1237 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (742-547)
• 4100-1238 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (742-548)
• 4100-1239 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (742-549)
Analog Flex Amplifiers:
• 4100-1212 Analog Flex 50 W Amp – 25 VRMS (742-794)
• 4100-1213 Analog Flex 50 W Amp – 70 VRMS (742-795)
• 4100-1261 Analog Flex 35 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-001)
• 4100-1262 Analog Flex 35 W Amp – 70 VRMS (742-002)
Digital Flex Amplifiers:
• 4100-1226 Digital Flex 50 W Amp – 25 VRMS (742-796)
• 4100-1227 Digital Flex 50 W Amp – 70 VRMS (742-797)
• 4100-1263 Digital Flex 35 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-003)
• 4100-1264 Digital Flex 35 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-004)

Note: The following amplifiers are only used in the 4100U and 4100ES systems, and are compatible with
the Constant Supervision NAC (CSNAC) option and 4100U Master Firmware Revision 11.08 or later.
100 W Analog Amplifiers:
• 4100-1314 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-438)
• 4100-1315 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-439)
• 4100-1316 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (743-440)
• 4100-1317 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (743-441)
• 4100-1318 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-442)
• 4100-1319 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-443)
• 4100-1320 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-438)
• 4100-1321 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-439)
• 4100-1322 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (743-440)
• 4100-1323 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (743-441)
• 4100-1324 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-442)
• 4100-1325 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-443)

Continued on the next page

1-19
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100ES PIDs (continued)

Amplifiers 100 W Digital Amplifiers:

• 4100-1328 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-449)
• 4100-1329 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-450)
• 4100-1330 Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (743-451)
• 4100-1331 Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (743-452)
• 4100-1332 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-453)
• 4100-1333 Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-454)
• 4100-1334 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-449)
• 4100-1335 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-450)
• 4100-1336 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 25 VRMS – Canada (743-451)
• 4100-1337 Backup Amp – 120 VAC, 70 VRMS – Canada (743-452)
• 4100-1338 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 25 VRMS (743-453)
• 4100-1339 Backup Amp – 220/230/240 VAC, 70 VRMS (743-454)
Analog Flex Amplifiers:
• 4100-1312 Analog Flex 50 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-436)
• 4100-1313 Analog Flex 50 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-437)
• 4100-1361 Analog Flex 35 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-444)
• 4100-1362 Analog Flex 35 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-445)

Digital Flex Amplifiers:

• 4100-1326 Digital Flex 50 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-447)
• 4100-1327 Digital Flex 50 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-448)
• 4100-1363 Digital Flex 35 W Amp – 25 VRMS (743-455)
• 4100-1364 Digital Flex 35 W Amp – 70 VRMS (743-456)

Miscellaneous The following modules are for 4100ES systems:

Modules • 4100-0650 Battery Shelf (for 50 Ah batteries) (742-840)
• 4100-0640 Memory Add-On Module for Flexible User Interface (743-279)
• 4100-5128 Battery Distribution Terminal Module (742-843)
• 4100-9854 4100U/4100ES Module Legacy Bay Mounting Kit (743-856)

1-20
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100 PIDs (non-4100ES/4100U)

Overview This section lists the 4100, non-4100ES/4100U, PIDs that are supported by the 4100ES Fire
Alarm System (in retrofit applications). There are two basic types of PIDs listed here:

• PIDs denoting standard installations, such as host panels containing multiple, already
functioning modules
• PIDs denoting individual modules or back boxes:
- offered as after-market product for standard installations
- offered as options or aftermarket product for configured installations

Note: Software-related PIDs, such as vertical market software packages and programmer options, are not
listed in this book.

System Types There are six standard types of 4100 control panels used with the 4100. A PID identifies each
and Options system type. These PIDs are combined with the more specific PIDs listed after this topic to
meet the requirements of custom installations:

• 4100-8001 Fire Alarm Control Panel

• 4100-8002 Remote Annunciator Panel
• 4100-8010 MINIPLEX Fire Alarm Control Panel
• 4100-8019 MINIPLEX Fire Alarm Control Panel with Transponder
• 4100-8201 Fire Alarm Control Panel with Audio
• 4100-8210 MINIPLEX Fire Alarm Control Panel with Audio
• 4100-8901/8909 Add-On to Existing System or Annunciator
• 4100-6050/6051 Power Limited Panel/Non-Power Limited Panel

Master Controller 4100-6001 240 VAC Controller Power Input

Option Module

1-21
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100 PIDs (Non-4100ES/4100U) (continued)

NAC Modules Notification appliance circuit (NAC) modules are listed below.
• 4100-4001 2-Circuit (Style Y)
• 4100-4011 2-Circuit (Style Z)
• 4100-4321 6-Circuit (Style Y)
• 4100-4331 6-Circuit (Style Z)

IDC Modules Initiating device circuit (IDC) modules are listed below.
See 579-832 for 2-Wire Detector Compatibility Chart.
• 4100-5004 8-Zone (Style B)
• 4100-5014 8-Zone (Style D)

Optional Modules Miscellaneous optional modules are listed below.

• 4100-0104 Additional Battery Charger (120 V)
• 4100-0105 5 A Power Supply (120 V; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0108 Expansion 8 A Power Supply (Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0110 MAPNET II Addressable Module
• 4100-0111 MAPNET II Isolator Module
• 4100-0113 Dual RS-232 Module
• 4100-0114 Additional Battery Charger (240 V)
• 4100-0115 5 A Power Supply (240 V; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0117 MINIPLEX 8 A Remote Power Supply (Power Limited)
• 4100-0118 8 A Power Supply (240 V; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0119 2 A Converter (12 VDC; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0123 2120 Communications Module (Style 7)
• 4100-0124 Enhanced Charger Package
• 4100-0129 25.5 V Limiter Module
• 4100-0136 Decoder Module
• 4100-0137 RS-232 Module for 2120 Communications (Style 7)
• 4100-0139 Service Modem
• 4100-0153 Contact Closure DACT
• 4100-0154 VESDA Interface (Aftermarket Only)
• 4100-0155 Serial DACT
• 4100-0304 Remote Unit Interface (RUI) Module (Style 7)
• 4100-0451 Panel-Mounted Printer
• 4100-0540 4-20 mA ZAM Modules (2 per plate)
• 4100-1108 8 A Power Supply (120 VAC; Power Limited)

Auxiliary Relay The following modules are auxiliary relay controls.

Controls • 4100-3001 4-Relay, 2 A (with feedback)
• 4100-3002 4-Relay, 10 A (with feedback)
• 4100-3003 8-Relay, 3 A (with feedback)

1-22
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100 PIDs (Non-4100ES/4100U) (continued)

Audio Controllers The following modules can be used in 4100ES Upgrade/Retrofit applications, but cannot be
and Amplifiers used with 4100ES audio modules.
• 4100-0210 Single-Channel Audio Controller Board
• 4100-0211 Dual-Channel Audio Controller Board
• 4100-0212 Triple-Channel Audio Controller Board
• 4100-0201 25 VRMS/25 W Audio Amplifier (no Power Supply; Power Limited)
• 4100-0202 25 VRMS/Dual 25 W Audio Amplifier (with Power Supply; Power Limited)
• 4100-1203 25 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (120 VAC; Power Limited)
• 4100-0203 25 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (120 VAC; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0213 25 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (240 VAC; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0207 70 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (120 VAC; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-0217 70 VRMS/100 W Audio Amplifier (240 VAC; Non-Power Limited)
• 4100-1207 70 VRMS/90 W Audio Amplifier (120 VAC; Power Limited)

Audio Options The following options can be used in 4100ES Retrofit/Upgrade systems with 4100 Back
Boxes.
• 4100-0204 Microphone and Enclosure
• 4100-0205 Master Telephone
• 4100-0206 Redundant Tone Generator
• 4100-0215 Phone Riser Terminal Block

Annunciation • 4100-0301 64/64 LED/Switch Controller

Modules • 4100-0302 24-Point I/O Graphic Interface
• 4100-0401 8-LED Display Card (Red Led)
• 4100-0402 16-Point Display Card (Red/Yellow LEDs)
• 4100-0403 8-Switch/8-LED Display Card (Momentary switches; red LEDs)
• 4100-0404 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (Maintained switches; one red and one green
LED per switch)
• 4100-0405 8-Switch/16-LED Display Card (Maintained switches; one red and one yellow
LED per switch)
• 4100-0408 8-Switch/8-LED Annunciator Control Switch Module
• 4100-0450 Remote Panel LCD

1-23
 Chapter 1 Introduction to the 4100ES Fire Alarm System

4100 PIDs (Non-4100ES/4100U) (continued)

Miscellaneous • 4100-0133 Tamper Switch

Modules • 4100-1010 External Battery Power and Charger

Network Modules The following modules are intended to be used in a networked 4100 system.
• 4120-6014 Modular Interface Board
• 4120-6023 Physical Bridge (Style 4)
• 4120-6024 Physical Bridge (Style 7)
• 4120-0142 Wired Media Card
• 4120-0143 Fiber-Optic Media Card
• 4120-0144 Modem Media Card
• 4120-0156 8 VDC Module (provides 3 A from 28 V tap)

System • 2080-9047 DACT Communication Cable (14 feet [4 meters]) (733-913)

Accessories • 2081-9031 Potted Module for PVCS (740-688)
• 2081-9272 Batteries (6.2 Ah) (112-112)*
• 2081-9274 Batteries (10 Ah) (112-113)*
• 2081-9275 Batteries (18.8 Ah) (112-046)*
• 2081-9276 Batteries (33 Ah) (112-053)*
• 2081-9279 Batteries (110 Ah) (112-123)*
• 2081-9287 Batteries (25 Ah) (112-134)*
• 2081-9288 Batteries (12.7 Ah) (112-133)*
• 2081-9296 Batteries (50 Ah) (112-136)*
• 4190-9803 Replacement Paper for 4100-0451 Panel-Mounted Printer (473-019)

*Or the equivalent.

1-24
 Chapter 2
Installing FACP Components
Introduction This chapter describes installation procedures that apply directly to the Fire Alarm Control
Panel (FACP) as well as each step of the host panel installation for both the FACP SPS and the
EPS CPU configurations. Before beginning the installation, review the next few pages to get a
sense of the types of bays and modules that make up the FACP.

IMPORTANT: Verify FACP System Programmer, Executive, and Slave

Software compatibility when installing, or replacing system
components. Refer to the Technical Support Information and
Downloads website for compatibility information.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

Introduction to the FACP 2-2

SPS CPU Bay Overview 2-3

EPS CPU Bay Overview 2-7

FACP Operator Interface 2-12

FACP Expansion Bays 2-13

FACP Power Requirements 2-14

Mounting Back Boxes 2-15

Step 2. Mounting the System Electronics 2-18

Step 3. Trim Kit Application (optional) 2-21

Step 4. Mounting the Door 2-22

Step 5. Installing Motherboards into the CPU Bay 2-25

Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays 2-26

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays 2-31

Step 8. Configuring Cards 2-39

Step 9. Installing and Removing Batteries 2-41

Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures 2-43

The Terminal Block Utility Module 2-44

2-1
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Introduction to the FACP

Overview 4100 FACPs are back boxes that contain the CPU, operator interface, FACP power supply, the
power distribution module, the power distribution interface, backup batteries, and any
additional modules that the panel requires.
The FACP is the central hub (often referred to as a host panel) of a standalone or MINIPLEX
fire alarm system. In a networked system, the FACP can be connected to other system FACPs,
so that each host panel is a node on the network.

CPU Bay Every FACP contains a CPU bay. The CPU bay is equipped with:
• 1 FACP power supply module.
• 1 RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard:
- In a standalone or MINIPLEX system the CPU motherboard is supplied with a
master controller daughter card attached to it.
- In a networked system a network interface card (NIC) is attached as a second
daughter card to the master motherboard
• 1 Power Distribution Interface (PDI) (EPS configuration only):
- There are eight 2-inch slots on the PDI. Slots 1 and 2 are used for aftermarket
boards. Slots 3 to 8 are taken up by the FACP Power Supply and the CPU Master
Motherboard.

Table 2-1. CPU Components

FACP Power
Configuration PDI Card Master Motherboard Card
Supply

SPS CPU - RUI+ CPU Master SPS

EPS CPU 8 slots Motherboard 566-938 EPS

Disassembled CPU Bay Side-View CPU Bay Front-View with Optional 2” Motherboard Cards

Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8

SR V D

RU I B+

RU I A+
Shield
RU I B-

RU I A-
ND

0V -1
R+

R-

GND
X MIT
R S 232

RTS

CTS
R CV

Port 1
P6

1 2 3

LED1
LED2
LED3

LED4

CPU Master
Motherboard
PDI

1 2 3

Ch a ssis
L + RSRVD L- G ND 0V-2
PI EZ O 24 C R SR VD
XMI T RT S RC V CT S G ND

Optional CPU Master Power Supply

Power Distribution 2“ Motherboards Motherboard
Interface (PDI)
CPU Master (EPS Configuration only)
Daughter Card
FACP Power Supply
(EPS with IDNet 2
card depicted)

Figure 2-1. The CPU Bay

2-2
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

SPS CPU Bay Overview

RUI+ Master The 4100 Master motherboard has two slots, one is dedicated for the system CPU and The
Motherboard other slot is typically used for 4120 Network or RS232 cards. The first RUI channel in the
system is the master motherboard. The RUI+ feature on this card provides electrically-isolated
power for the RUI channel, giving it greater immunity to crosstalk from other channels.
The card is installed on the PDI, occupying the space next to the power supply.
Network Wired
RUI Terminal
Media/RS-232
Block
Terminal Block

RS-232/Network
Switch Card Port 1
Earth Fault
connection to
power supply
(EPS only)

RUI Trouble LEDs

RUI Earth
COMM Fault LEDs

10POS female 10POS female

PDI Connector
(on back)
CPU Slot
NON ISO
RUI
P5

P6

J5 J7
RUI+
ISO

RUI Isolation
Power
Jumpers - See Note

Network/RS232 Slot Power/COMMS to

Adjacent Bay

RS-232/Network
Switch
Card Port 2 Network Wired
Media/RS-232
Terminal Block

Figure 2-2. RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard (566-938)

Note: If the RUI+ Master Motherboard is used to connect to a 4602-6001 (SCU) or 4602-7001 (RCU) move
the P5 and P6 jumpers to the RUI NON ISO position.

2-3
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

SPS CPU Bay Overview (continued)

Master Controller The master controller daughter card mounts onto the master motherboard. The master
Daughter Card controller daughter card contains a service port, a direct drive user interface connection, and a
(566-719) port for a service modem.
COMM JUMPER (P1)
SERVICE PORT
SERVICE MODEM
CONNECTOR (P4)
MODEM
2

COMPACT FLASH
Used for alternative job/
exec storage (card does not “run”
out of compact flash)

LED1 LED2 LED3

CPU BOOTLOADER
LEDs (LED A – LED D)

RESET LED (LED1)

ON: CPU is in reset. If LED is flashing,
CONNECTOR TO CPU board is unable to come out of reset.
MOTHERBOARD (P9) Possibly corrupt CFIG or board needs
to be replaced.
OFF: CPU is running normally.

SERVICE PORT
SERVICE PORT (P5)
BATTERY BACKUP
ON/ OFF JUMPER (P3)

Battery
DISPL AY
BAT ON

DIRECT-DRIVE
DISPLAY PORT (P6)
BAT OFF

SWAP CFIG JUMPER (P15)

ETHERNET CONNECTOR INSERT JUMPER DURING
(J1) RJ45 TYPE BOOT FOR CFIG SWAP
RESET (WARM START) COLD START SWITCH (SW2)
SWITCH (SW1)
HOLD DURING BOOT FOR
COLD START

Figure 2-3. Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719)

2-4
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

SPS CPU Bay Overview (continued)

Master Controller The master controller daughter card LEDs indicate the card status as shown in Table 2-2.
Daughter Card These LEDs show diagnostic status for internal RandD use.
LEDs
Table 2-2. Master Controller Bootloader LEDs

Status Condition LED D LED C LED B LED A

Bootloader Initialization On (0.25s), On (0.25s), On (0.25s), On (0.25s),
Off (0.25s) Off (0.25s) Off (0.25s) Off (0.25s)
Bad Master CRC or No On Off Off Off
Master Present
Diagnostic Fail - RAM On Off Off On
Diagnostic Fail -Bootloader On Off On Off
CRC
Downloading Master On Off On On
Downloading CFIG On On Off Off
Downloading MsgLib On On Off On
Downloading Bootloader On On On Off
Download Successful On On On On

Master Controller
Switches
Table 2-3. Master Controller Switches

Switch Description
Short press (< 3 seconds) to activate a software controlled
reset (warm start).
Press and hold (> 3 seconds) to force a hardware reset (also
a warm start).
Reset (Warm Start)
Generally unless the CPU card appears to be locked up you
(0566-719 only)
should always use the software controlled reset.

A warm start preserves the logs and the disabled status of

any points that are in the disabled state.
Reset (Warm Start) Press (any duration) to cause a warm start. A warm start pre-
(other than 0566-719 serves the logs and the disabled status of any points that are
Cards) in the disabled state.

During startup, insert a jumper to revert to the alternate

(previous) CFIG. Remove the jumper after the system
reboots and CFIG swap are complete. If you are using an
older revision of the CPU card, press and hold this button.
CFIG Swap This is used if the current CFIG is corrupt or for
(0566-719 only) troubleshooting the system.

Note: You will get a "Using previous CFIG" trouble in the system.
This trouble will not clear until a new CFIG is downloaded or
you swap back to the original CFIG.

Cold Start During startup, press and hold this button to clear all history
(0566-719 only) logs and enable any points that were previously disabled.

2-5
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

SPS CPU Bay Overview (continued)

System Power The SPS is the power source for the CPU. The SPS provides 24 VDC card power to the CPU
Supply (SPS) motherboard, which is distributed to other bays up to 2A capacity.

The SPS provides voltage and current information to the CPU card, which can then be
displayed at the user interface. The SPS provides an IDNet channel that supports initiating
devices and some notification appliances, such as the 4009-9201/9301 Audio NAC Extender.
The SPS also has three on-board NACs that support reverse polarity or SmartSync supervision.

Auxiliary power, relay, and city circuit/relay module functions are also supported.

The SPS performs standard fire alarm functions, such as brownout detect, battery transfer,
battery recharge, earth fault detection, and power limiting per UL 864.

Figure 2-4 is an illustration of the SPS.

IDNET TERMINAL BLOCK (TB1) NAC TERMINAL BLOCK (TB2)

POWER/COMM TO
CPU MOTHERBOARD (P6)

IDNET SHIELD SWITCH

(P2)

CITY/RELAY CARD LEGACY POWER/COMM TO

TROUBLE INDICATION CPU
SWITCH (P3) MOTHERBOARD
(P8)

DEVICE ADDRESS
SWITCH (SW1)

AUXILIARY RELAY BATTERY

TERMINAL BLOCK CONNECTORS:
(TB4) P4
P5

AUXILIARY POWER
TERMINAL BLOCK EARTH
(TB3) FAULT
MONITOR
SWITCH (P1)
CITY CARD CITY / RELAY CARD AC
CONNECTOR (P7) MOUNTING AREA CONNECTOR
(bulkhead connector on
steel plate)

Figure 2-4. System Power Supply (566-071)

2-6
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

EPS CPU Bay Overview

The Power In the CPU bay and the expansion bays, power and data are distributed via the PDI. The PDI is
Distribution a wiring board with eight card slots, each of which can accommodate a 4 x 5 slave card. If
Interface legacy motherboards are used, they must be mounted above the PDI using metal standoffs.
Note: Power source jumpers P4 and P5 must be placed in position 2-3 (to the right) for proper operation of
an EPS CPU bay.

POWER/COMMS 4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACE

ASSY 566-084
CONNECTORS
(P1-P3)

POWER SOURCE
JUMPERS
(P4, P5)

AUDIO INTERFACE CONNECTORS (P6, P7)

Figure 2-5. The Power Distribution Interface (PDI)

RUI+ Master The 4100 Master motherboard has two slots, one is dedicated for the system CPU and The
Motherboard other slot is typically used for 4120 Network or RS232 cards. The first RUI channel in the
system is the master motherboard. The RUI+ feature on this card provides electrically-isolated
power for the RUI channel, giving it greater immunity to crosstalk from other channels.
The card is installed on the PDI, occupying the space next to the power supply.
Network Wired
RUI Terminal
Media/RS-232
Block
Terminal Block

RS-232/Network
Switch Card Port 1
Earth Fault
connection to
power supply
(EPS only)

RUI Trouble LEDs

RUI Earth
COMM Fault LEDs

10POS female 10POS female

PDI Connector
(on back)
CPU Slot
NON ISO
RUI
P5

P6

J5 J7
RUI+
ISO

RUI Isolation
Power
Jumpers - See Note

Network/RS232 Slot Power/COMMS to

Adjacent Bay

RS-232/Network
Switch
Card Port 2 Network Wired
Media/RS-232
Terminal Block
Figure 2-6. RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard (566-938)

Note: If the RUI+ Master Motherboard is used to connect to a 4602-6001 (SCU) or 4602-7001 (RCU) move
the P5 and P6 jumpers to the RUI NON ISO position.

2-7
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Master Controller The master controller daughter card mounts onto the master motherboard. The master
Daughter Card controller daughter card contains a service port, a direct drive user interface connection, and a
(566-719) port for a service modem.

COMM JUMPER (P1)

SERVICE PORT
SERVICE MODEM
CONNECTOR (P4)
MODEM
2

COMPACT FLASH
Used for alternative job/
exec storage (card does not “run”
out of compact flash)

LED1 LED2 LED3

CPU BOOTLOADER
LEDs (LED A – LED D)

RESET LED (LED1)

ON: CPU is in reset. If LED is flashing,
CONNECTOR TO CPU board is unable to come out of reset.
MOTHERBOARD (P9) Possibly corrupt CFIG or board needs
to be replaced.
OFF: CPU is running normally.

SERVICE PORT
SERVICE PORT (P5)
BATTERY BACKUP
ON/ OFF JUMPER (P3)

Battery
DISPL AY
BAT ON

DIRECT-DRIVE
DISPLAY PORT (P6)
BAT OFF

SWAP CFIG JUMPER (P15)

ETHERNET CONNECTOR INSERT JUMPER DURING
(J1) RJ45 TYPE BOOT FOR CFIG SWAP
RESET (WARM START) COLD START SWITCH (SW2)
SWITCH (SW1)
HOLD DURING BOOT FOR
COLD START

Figure 2-7. Master Controller Daughter Card (566-719)

2-8
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

EPS CPU Bay Overview (continued)

Master Controller The master controller daughter card LEDs indicate the card status as shown in Table 2-4.
Daughter Card These LEDs show diagnostic status for internal RandD use.
LEDs
Table 2-4. Master Controller Bootloader LEDs

Status Condition LED D LED C LED B LED A

Bootloader Initialization On (0.25s), On (0.25s), On (0.25s), On (0.25s),
Off (0.25s) Off (0.25s) Off (0.25s) Off (0.25s)
Bad Master CRC or No On Off Off Off
Master Present
Diagnostic Fail - RAM On Off Off On
Diagnostic Fail -Bootloader On Off On Off
CRC
Downloading Master On Off On On
Downloading CFIG On On Off Off
Downloading MsgLib On On Off On
Downloading Bootloader On On On Off
Download Successful On On On On

Master Controller
Daughter Card
Switches Table 2-5. Master Controller Switches

Switch Description
Short press (< 3 seconds) to activate a software controlled
reset (warm start).
Press and hold (> 3 seconds) to force a hardware reset (also
a warm start).
Reset (Warm Start)
Generally unless the CPU card appears to be locked up you
(0566-719 only)
should always use the software controlled reset.

A warm start preserves the logs and the disabled status of

any points that are in the disabled state.
Reset (Warm Start) Press (any duration) to cause a warm start. A warm start pre-
(other than 0566-719 serves the logs and the disabled status of any points that are
Cards) in the disabled state.

During startup, insert a jumper to revert to the alternate

(previous) CFIG. Remove the jumper after the system
reboots and CFIG swap are complete. If you are using an
older revision of the CPU card, press and hold this button.
CFIG Swap This is used if the current CFIG is corrupt or for
(0566-719 only) troubleshooting the system.

Note: You will get a "Using previous CFIG" trouble in the system.
This trouble will not clear until a new CFIG is downloaded or
you swap back to the original CFIG.

Cold Start During startup, press and hold this button to clear all history
(0566-719 only) logs and enable any points that were previously disabled.

2-9
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

EPS CPU Bay Overview (continued)

Extended Power The EPS with IDNet 2 is the power source for the CPU and the host cabinet. The EPS provides
Supply with 24 VDC card power to the CPU motherboard.
IDNet 2
The EPS provides voltage and current information to the CPU card, which can then be
displayed at the user interface. The IDNet 2 card on the EPS provides one IDNet channel that
supports initiating devices and some notification appliances, such as the 4009-9201/9301
Audio NAC Extender.

Auxiliary power, relay, and city circuit/relay module functions are also supported.

The EPS performs standard fire alarm functions, such as brownout detect, battery transfer,
battery recharge, earth fault detection, and power limiting in accordance with UL 864.

Figure 2-8 is an illustration of the EPS. See Figure 2-9 for the IDNet 2 card.

)$.!# )$.!# )$.!#  !58

Auxiliary/
IDNAC NAC
Terminals

LEDs

Trouble Scroll
Button
A 4 Pin Harness
B
Address C Card Power /
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Switch D Comms
E
CH1
RUI+ Earth CH2 Connection
CH3 to PDI
Detect COM

IDNET 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

IDNet 2
Card

Battery Disconect
Jumper
Connection
to Bridge

Connection to
Batterries
A- A+ B- B+ A- A+ B- B+
LOOP 2 LOOP 1

City Card Connection Earth Detect Jumper

Figure 2-8. EPS with IDNet 2 (566-872)

Continued on the next page

2-10
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

EPS CPU Bay Overview (continued)

Extended Power The 4100-3109 IDNet 2 is a slave card that provides the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) with
Supply with an isolated IDNet channel which contains two isolated loops.
IDNet 2 This card is compatible with IDNet communicating initiating devices and allows the system
CPU to communicate with up to 250 peripheral devices, such as smoke detectors and pull
stations.

PDI Connector (P5)

IDNET 2
LEDs

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Address
Dip Switch
(SW1)

Loop 1
Loop 2 Class A/B
Class A/B Jumper (P1)
Jumper (P2)

A- A+ B- B+ A- A+ B- B+
LOOP 2 LOOP 1

IDNet Terminal Block (TB1)

Figure 2-9. IDNet 2 Card

2-11
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

FACP Operator Interface

Operator Interface The following images show the two operator interfaces which are available with the 4100ES.
The Operator Interface is used to obtain alarm, supervisory, trouble and other status via the
Liquid Crystal Display and LEDs. Control functions are accessed using dedicated and 
user-programmable keys.

Figure 2-10 is the standard 2x40 LCD Operator Interface. This model includes a 2 line by 40
character Liquid Crystal Display. Figure 2-11 is the Flexible User Interface. This model
includes a multi-line Liquid Crystal Display, which can display more information 
simultaneously.

Figure 2-10. Operator Interface

Figure 2-11. Flexible User Interface

2-12
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

FACP Expansion Bays

Additional CPU 4100-6030 Service Modem Card. CPU mezzanine card. Provides a connection to remote PCs
Bay Modules for diagnostics and programming purposes.

4100-6031 City Card with Disconnect. FACP power supply mezzanine card. Provides two
UL-listed city connections to the municipal fire department or other remote supervising station.
Contains a hardware disconnect switch to allow for testing without alerting the remote station.

4100-6032 City Card. FACP power supply mezzanine card. Same as the 4100-6031, but
without the disconnect and testing option.

4100-6033 Alarm Relay Card. FACP power supply mezzanine card.

4100-6014 Modular Network Interface Card (NIC). A daughter card that mounts to the
CPU motherboard. Performs 4100 networking operations. May be installed with the 4100-6056
Wired Media Card, the 4100-6057 Fiber Media Card, and/or the 4100-6055 Modem Media
Card.

Expansion Bays An FACP always has one CPU bay, but it may have one or two expansion bays as well.
Expansion bays contain a variety of additional modules that the system might require.

MASTER
CONTROLLER BAY
(always on top)

TWO-BAY
CABINET

EXPANSION
BAY

Figure 2-12. Expansion Bays

2-13
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

FACP Power Requirements

System Power The FACP is powered primarily by the FACP power supply, which in turn gets its power from
the power distribution module (PDM). The AC branch circuit and the standby battery connect
to the PDM. AC and battery power are then distributed to power modules from the PDM via
harness.

In expansion bays, the PDM may connect to the following: a secondary system power supply
(SPS)*, an extended power supply (EPS) a remote power supply (RPS), an expansion power
supply (XPS), or a 100 W Amplifier.

Note: *The 4100-5111/5112/5113 SPS is available for expansion bays only.

INCOMING
SPS AC POWER

AC
BTRY

XPS

BTRY PDM
AC

XPS SPS = System Power Supply

XPS = Expansion Power Supply
PDM = Power Distribution Module
BTRY
AC

BATTERY BATTERY

Figure 2-13 System Power

IMPORTANT: AC power must be provided to the 4100ES from a dedicated

branch circuit.

Power Table 2-6. Power Requirements

Requirements 120V, 50/60 Hz, 4.6A each
EPS
220/230/240 V, 50/60 Hz, 2.3 A each
SPS/XPS/RPS/TPS/ 120V, 60 Hz, 4A each
100W Amplifier 220/230/240V, 50/60 Hz, 2A each

2-14
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes

Overview Three different sizes of system back boxes are available, accommodating one, two, or three
electronics bays. These back boxes are shipped in large containers separate from the system
electronics. If system electronics containers are shipped with the back box containers, store the
system electronics containers in a safe, clean, and dry location until the back box installation is
completed, and you are ready to install the system electronic bays.

Note:
• Conductor entrance and routing restrictions apply to power-limited systems only.
• All back box PIDs are listed in Chapter 1.

Specifications Table 2-7 lists the specifications for the back boxes.

Table 2-7. Back Box Specifications

PID Description Height Width Rough Opening

Number Size Weight Box Trim Door Box Height Width
2975-9410/9407/ 1 Bay 55 lb. 20-¾ in. 23-½ in. 26-3/8 in. 26-3/8 in. 21-¼ in. 26 ¼ in.
9438 (25 kg) (527 mm) (597 mm) (670 mm) (670 mm) (540 mm) (667 mm)
2975-9411/9408/ 2 Bay 125 lb. 36-¼ in. 39-1/8 in. 26-3/8 in. 25-¾ in. 36-¾ in. 26 ¼ in.
9439 (57 kg) (921 mm) (994 mm) (670 mm) (654 mm) (933 mm) (667 mm)
2975-9412/9409/ 3 Bay 185 lb. 52-1/8 in. 55 in. 26-3/8 in. 25-¾ in. 52 5/8 in. 26 ¼ in.
9440 (84 kg) (1,324 mm) (1,397 mm) (670 mm) (654 mm) (1,337 (667 mm)
mm)

Make sure that you have the necessary hardware before you begin the installation procedure.
The Back Box Bay Mounting Hardware Kit should have all of the items listed in Table 2-8.

Table 2-8. Contents of the Back Box Bay Mounting Hardware Kit

Quantity Per Back Box

Part Number Description
1-Bay Box 2-Bay Box 3-Bay Box
268-010 Lockwasher (No. 8) 4 8 12
490-011 Washer 4 8 12
426-033 Screw (No. 8 Torx, 5/16 in.) 4 8 12

2-15
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes (continued)

Mounting the Mount the back box as shown in Figure 2-14. Use the holes in the back box to secure it to the
Back Boxes wall.
• For mounting to a wooden wall structure, the back box must be attached with 
four 3/8-inch-diameter x 1-½-inch-long (9.5 mm x 38 mm) fasteners and four 3/8-inch-
diameter (9.5 mm) washers.
• For surface mounting, secure the box to the wall using the tear-drop mounting holes on
the back surface.
• For semi-flush mounting, secure the box to the wall studs using the knockouts on the
sides of the box. Note that the front surface of the back box must protrude at least ½ inch
(sheet metal door) or 3 inches (plastic door) from the finished wall surface.
IMPORTANT: Power-limited systems have back box entrance and routing
restrictions for field wiring. Do not locate power-limited wiring in
the shaded areas of the back box shown in Figure 2-14. These
areas are reserved for non power-limited circuitry such as AC
power, batteries, and the city connection.

ALIGNMENT MARKERS
FOR WALL STUDS: PANEL
6” (152 mm) FRONT
6 29/32”
4” (102 mm) (175 mm)
24”
(610 mm)
WALL

TOP 16” TOP

(406 mm)

22”
(559 mm)
USE 4 HOLES TO USE 4 HOLES TO
WALL

(ONE
BAY) SECURE BACKBOX SECURE BACKBOX
TO THE WALL TO THE WALL

RESERVED
3 17/32” FOR ADDITIONAL
(90 mm)
BATTERIES BACK BOX
5 17/32” (SEE NOTE 6)
(140 mm)

See Notes 3 and 5

Figure 2-14. Back Box Installation Diagram

Figure 2-14 notes:
1. Dimensions shown are typical for all surface and 4. Do not install any power-limited wiring in the
semi-flush installations. shaded area of the back box as shown in
2. Use suitable punch when conduit is required. Figure 2-14. This area is reserved for non power-
Knockouts are not provided. Locate and create  limited devices and circuits (for example, AC
on-site as required during installation. power, batteries, and city circuits). The non power-
limited area is determined by the internal barriers,
3. A minimum clearance of 5 inches (127mm) from the but is always below and to the right of these
hinge side is required to provide a maximum door
barriers.
opening of 90 degrees.
5. Minimum distance between boxes is 3 ¼ inches
(83 mm). Maximum distance between boxes is
10 inches (254 mm).

2-16
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes (continued)

Back Box side

views

Side view with plastic door attached Side view with metal door attached

WALL
WALL

8 - 5 /16"
11-11/16" (211 mm)
(297 mm)

Figure 2-15. Height off the wall for Back Box and doors (plastic and metal)

2-17
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 2. Mounting the System Electronics

Overview This section describes the process for removing the CPU and equipment bays that come with
the system modules from their shipping container and installing them into the mounted back
boxes.

Mounting guidelines:
• The CPU bay must be installed in the top bay of the enclosure.
• Expansion bays mount in any bay area within an enclosure.
• Expansion bays mount in a 19” E.I.A rack console using an adapter kit.

Mounting the Perform the following procedure to install the system electronics bays:
System Electronics
Bays 1. Disconnect the 734-008 Harness from P1 on the Power Distribution Interface (PDI).
2. Remove everything from the electronics shipping container, and set the screws aside.
3. Remove the shipping studs that secure the bays to the shipping container.

Figure 2-16. Removing the Shipping Studs

Continued on the next page

2-18
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 2. Mounting the System Electronics (continued)

Mounting the 4. Mount the power distribution module (PDM) to the back box as shown in Figure 2-17.
System Electronics Securely tighten all mounting screws. Refer to Table 2-9 for the recommended torque.
Bay
Table 2-9. Recommended Torque for Mounting Hardware

Screw / Nut Size Recommended Torque

No. 6 7.9 to 8.7 inch/ounces (569 to 626 cm/grams)

No. 8 16.1 to 17.8 inch/ounces (1 159 to 1 282 cm/grams)

No. 10 26.8 to 29.7 inch/ounces (1 930 to 2 139 cm/grams)

CABINET
STANDOFF

Use spacers TAMPER SWITCH

to secure MOUNTING STUDS
PDM to
PDM
cabinet
COVER

PDM
MOUNTING
AREA

INSULATOR
PDM
CONNECTORS

Figure 2-17. Mounting the PDM Bracket (2-Bay Box Shown)

5. If provided, mount the tamper switch assembly to the mounting studs as shown in 
Figure 2-17. Refer to 4100-Series Tamper Switch Installation Instructions (579-195).
6. Using the hardware provided with the back box, insert the required number of mounting
screws to the right and left support holes in the back box as shown in Figure 2-18.
7. Tighten the mounting screws.
Note: Install the mounting screws to within 1/8" from the seated position.

Continued on the next page

2-19
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 2. Mounting the System Electronics (continued)

Mounting the 8. Mount the system electronics bay assemblies in the back box by carefully placing the 
System Electronic assembly onto the four extended screws in the back box, allowing the electronics bay 
Bay assembly to hang from the screws.
9. Securely tighten all mounting screws. Refer to Table 2-9 for the recommended torque.

Figure 2-18. Installing the System Electronics Bay Assembly

At this point, the system is ready for system card installation. For information on card
installation, refer to the Panels’ installation manual.

IMPORTANT: Do not apply power to the system at this time.

2-20
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 3. Trim Kit Application (optional)

Trim Kit Content Trim Kits are used to cosmetically cover wall openings when boxes are mounted semi-flush
into the wall. The kit includes:
• Two top trim bands (shorter)
• Two side trim bands (longer)
• Four corner pieces.

Top Trim Bands (x2)

Corner Pieces (x4)

Side Trim Bands (x2)

Figure 2-19. Semi-Flush Trim Kit

Trim Application After the back box is mounted to the wall, attach the trim in accordance with the following
procedure:
1. Hold the top strip against the top of the back box.
2. Centered the strip on the box width, and mark the end
locations (the top bands are approximately
1" (25 mm) shorter than the box width). Peel off the
adhesive tape release, align it with the marks and
press down to assure adhesion.
3. Place the second top strip beneath the back box and
repeat step 2.
4. The side bands are sized for the 3-bay box, they must
be re-sized for use with 1 and 2 bay boxes. Semi-Flush
Mounted
• For use with a 3-bay box: align, mark, and attach BACK BOX
as was done for the top and bottom bands.
• For use with a 1-bay or 2-bay boxes, cut the bands
approximately 1" (25mm) shorter than the box
height (1-bay boxes are 22" (559 mm) high, 
2-bay boxes are 40" (1016 mm) high). Carefully
cut them to length using a hacksaw or sharp
utility knife.
5. Attach the cut bands using the same procedure as the
top and bottom bands.
6. Each corner piece overlaps the trim strip slightly less
than 3/4" (19mm). Align the corner pieces tight to the
box corner and attach with a drywall or similar screw,
suitable for the wall material (screws are not
supplied).
Figure 2-20. Applying the Trim

2-21
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 4. Mounting the Door

Overview This section describes how to hang and attach glass and solid doors to the back box.
Additionally, this section describes how to reverse doors so that their hinges are on the right
and locks are on the left.

Grounding
Wires
Door
Hinges

Lock

Front View of a 1 Bay Enclosure Door Back View of a 1 Bay Enclosure Door

Figure 2-21. Front and Back View of a Glass Door

Grounding Door
Wires Hinges
Lock

Front View of a 1 Bay Enclosure Door Back View of a 1 Bay Enclosure Door

Figure 2-22. Front and Back view of a Solid Door

2-22
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 4. Mounting the Door (continued)

Attaching Doors Read the following instructions to attach glass or solid doors to the back box. Note that the
hinges and lock catch should already be attached.
Note: A 5/16 hex nut driver is required to complete the following steps.
1. Unscrew the lock catch from the back box and retain the hardware.
2. Flip the lock catch over, and re-attach it to the back box so that the slot now protrudes to the
outside of the back box. See Figure 2-23.

Figure 2-23. Reversing the Lock Catch

3. Remove the door from the packaging.
4. For glass doors:
• Fit the dress panel onto the back box using
the grooves on the dress panel as guides.
• Secure the dress panel to the back box using
the #6 torx screw provided. See Figure 2-24.
5. Align the door hinges with the hinge pins on the
back box, and slide the door down onto the hinge
pins. Secure with
#6 Screw
Figure 2-24. Securing the Dress Panel
Door Hinge

Cabinet Hinge Pin

Figure 2-25. Hinge Pin Alignment

Continued on the next page

2-23
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 4. Mounting the Door (continued)

Attaching Doors 6. Attach the two ground wires to the back box with the # 6 hex flange nuts in the shipping
group (the grounding straps should already be attached to the door). See Figure 2-26.

Door

Back Box

Ground Wire

Figure 2-26. The Ground Wire

7. Remove the B-key that is attached to the door and keep it in a safe place.

Reversing the Read the following instructions to reverse doors so that their hinges are on the right and locks
Door are on the left. Be sure to retain all hardware.

Note: A 5/16 hex nut driver is required to complete the following steps.

1. Disconnect the ground wires from the back box and set them aside.
2. Remove the door (if attached) by lifting it up off the back box’s hinge pins. Set the door
aside.
3. Remove the lock catch and its screws from the right side of the back box.
4. Attach the lock catch to the left side of the back box so that the slot protrudes through the
outside of the back box.
5. Use a 1/8 (3mm) punch and hammer to remove the hinge pins from the hinge leaves on the
back box.
6. Reinsert the hinge pins so that they face lengthwise toward the bottom of the back box.
7. Remove all hinge hardware from the left side of the back box.
8. Attach the hinge hardware to the right side of the back box, so that the hinge pins are facing
toward the top of the back box.
9. Turn the door upside down, align its hinges to the back box hinge pins, and then slide the
door down onto the hinge pins.
10. Re-attach the ground-wire and flange nut to the back box and door.
11. Remove the B-key that is attached to the door, and keep it in a safe place.

2-24
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 5. Installing Motherboards into the CPU Bay

Overview This section contains placement guidelines and physical installation instructions on installing
traditional aftermarket motherboards into the 4100ES CPU bay.

Notes: • If you do not need to install individual motherboards into the CPU bay, but need to install
aftermarket modules into expansion bays, skip to Step 7.
• If you do not need to install any aftermarket modules at all, and if you have followed Steps 1
through 5, you have completed the panel installation and can apply power using the power-up and
power-down procedures.

4100ES CPU Bay Refer to the following guidelines before mounting a motherboard into a CPU bay.
Placement • There are eight 2” (51 mm) slots on the CPU bay. Slots 1 and 2 are the only available slots
Guidelines for aftermarket boards.
• If there are more old style 4100 modules than a CPU bay can accommodate, they should
be placed into the next expansion bay.
• For SPS Configuration only: CPU bays do not include a power distribution interface (PDI)
board, so this bay is reserved for motherboard/daughter card modules only.

Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8

Chassis

2“ Motherboards
CPU Master Power Supply
Motherboard

Figure 2-27. CPU Bay Card Placement

2-25
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays

Overview This section contains placement guidelines and physical installation instructions on installing
4” X 5” cards and traditional motherboards into 4100ES electronics bays.

IMPORTANT: This section applies to aftermarket modules for expansion

bays only. If you do not need to install any aftermarket
modules at all, and if you have followed Steps 1 through 6, you
have completed the panel installation and can apply AC power.

4100ES Refer to the following guidelines before mounting 4” X 5” cards and/or motherboards to an
Placement expansion bay.
Guidelines
• Each expansion bay assembly includes a chassis, two end supports, one LED/switch
frame, and a power distribution interface (PDI) board.
• An expansion bay holds up to eight 4” X 5” modules. A double-size module, such as the
expansion power supply (XPS), takes up two blocks of space as shown below.
• Cards must be added from right to left.

Figure 2-28. Expansion Bay 4” X 5” Card Placement

2-26
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays (continued)

Motherboard • Motherboards can be installed on top of the PDI in expansion bays. The data and power
Placement that would normally be bussed via the PDI is instead routed across the boards by a
Guidelines for a connector from one board to the next.
4100ES bay • Up to eight 2” x 11 ½” motherboards can be installed in an expansion bay if no 4” x 5”
modules are installed in the bay, and if the pins on the left connector (usually P1) on the
leftmost motherboard are removed.
• Motherboards must be added from left to right.
• Relay motherboards must be the rightmost motherboards.

Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8

This Slot 4100 Option Bd

4100 Option Bd

4100 Option Bd

4100 Option Bd

4100 Option Bd

4100 Option Bd

4100 Option Bd
Must
Remain
Empty

Power Distribution
Interface

This slot cannot contain a Up to eight 2” x 11 ½” motherboards can be mounted in an

motherboard unless the pins expansion bay. Seven motherboards fit into Slots 2 through 8; the
on P1 (or leftmost pin eighth can be added in Slot 1 if its leftpost pins are removed.
connector) are removed.

Figure 2-29. Expansion Bay Motherboard Placement

2-27
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays (continued)

Mixed 4100 • As shown in Figure 2-30, motherboards can be installed alongside 4” X 5” cards, if
Motherboard/ necessary.
4100ES 4”x5”
Card Placement
Guidelines

Figure 2-30. Mixed Module Placement

2-28
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays (continued)

Installing 4 X 5 The power distribution interface (PDI) is mounted to the back of each expansion cabinet. The
Cards PDI contains slots for up to eight 4 x 5 slave cards. Since the PDI carries power and data across
the entire bay, it solves most interconnection issues, especially between 4 x 5 cards.

Use the following instructions and Figure 2-31 to mount slave cards to an expansion cabinet.

1. Screw two standoffs and washers to the appropriate holes in the back of the cabinet. These
holes must line up with the screw holes in the card.
2. Plug the card into the appropriate blind mating connector. Seat the card firmly onto the PDI
when installing to ensure complete insertion of the power connector into the PDI.
3. Secure the top of the card to the standoffs with two #6 torx screws and washers.

WASHERS
STANDOFFS
SCREW
RETAINERS
4” X 5” CARD

#6 SCREWS

PDI CONNECTOR PDI

(reverse side)

Figure 2-31. Slave Card/PDI Connection

2-29
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 6. Installing Modules into Expansion Bays (continued)

Installing Use the following procedure when installing motherboards in an expansion bay. Start with the
Motherboards second slot from the left and fill to the right.
into a 4100ES 1. Orient the motherboard with the connector labeled J1 on the right and the header labeled P1
Expansion Bay on the left.
2. Attach four metal threaded standoffs and lockwashers into the screw holes on the chassis.
3. Attach two grey plastic standoffs to the motherboard socket mounting screws.
4. Secure the motherboard to the standoffs using four #6 torx screws as shown below.

METAL
STANDOFFS
SCREW HOLES

PLASTIC STANDOFFS

#6 SCREWS

SCREW HOLES

LOCKWASHERS

Figure 2-32. Installing the Motherboard in a 4100ES Expansion Bay

2-30
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays

Overview Each card has to be interconnected with every other card in its bay. At the same time, bays in
the FACP also have to be connected together. Read this section to ensure that cards and bays
are interconnected.

Guidelines Review the following guidelines before interconnecting modules and bays.

• The FACP power supply provides 24 VDC power to the CPU motherboard.
• The CPU motherboard provides 8 V (3 A capacity) for use by Legacy 4100 slave cards. 24
VDC card power is routed through the motherboard for slave card use.
• 4100 internal comms and power are harnessed to other bays. Do not connect the 8 V at P7
to an 8 V converter on a Goldwing or remote interface card.
• 24 VDC card power from the FACP power supply is rated at 2 A.
• Additional harnesses are provided with the shipping group, but may not be used at the time
of installation. These harnesses should remain with control equipment for future use when
necessary.

Power The power distribution module (PDM) connects to the EPS, SPS, RPS, or XPS in each bay.
Distribution One PDM is used per back box. Use the instructions below to properly connect the PDM to
Module each bay.
Connections
1. Route the black and white AC power wires to the supplied ferrite bead. Loop the wires twice
through the bead as shown in Figure 2-33.

TO AC BREAKER

TO PDM

Figure 2-33. Wiring Looped Through Ferrite Bead

2. Wire 120 VAC to the PDM, keeping AC wires at least 1 inch away from all other wires. AC
power must stay in the right side of the cabinet, in the non-power-limited area.
3. Connect batteries to P5 on the PDM using Harness 734-015. Bend the wire near the PDM so
that it occupies the back of the cabinet.

Continued on the next page

2-31
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)

Power 4. Connect the PDM to the power supply using Harness 734-012 for 120 V systems (734-013
Distribution for 220/230/240 V versions).
Module • Feed red and black wires through the side rail to the front of the power supply to prevent
Connections wire damage when the front panel is inserted.
• Connect the separate red and black wires (with yellow female terminations) to plugs P2
(black) and P3 (red) on the EPS and plugs P5 (black) and P4 (red) on the SPS or RPS.
• Connect the white and black wires, which terminate together in a white snap-on connector,
to the bulkhead connector at the bottom of the EPS, SPS or RPS assembly, as shown in
Figure 2-34.

FERRITE
BEAD

*220/230/240 V PART NUMBERS 120 VAC

APPEAR IN ITALICS. 50, 60 Hz, 4.6 A
Bottom view GROUND
of the EPS assembly 120 V
NEUTRAL
P1
HARNESS
(734-257) P2 BACK BOX
(734-258)* P3 GROUND
P4 SCREW
Bulkhead connector P5
BATTERY
HARNESS
FUSED AT 20 A
PDM
(566-246)
(or 566-248;
P2 BLACK WIRE see below)*
EPS P3
RED WIRE

Second bulkhead HARNESS 733-015

connector here in 120 V TO TRANSFORMER TO 24 V BATTERY
THROUGH BULKHEAD
220/ 230/240 V CONNECTOR
version 566-248

23 0 V A C
2 2 0 V AC

2 4 0 V AC
PDM TERMINAL
BLOCK

50/60 Hz NEUT
2.3 A

Figure 2-34. FACP Power Supply Assembly Connector (EPS shown)

Continued on the next page

2-32
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)

Power 5. Connect the 734-012 Harness (734-013 for 220/230/240 V versions) from the next connector
Distribution on the PDM to the first XPS or EPS.
Module • Connect the separate red and black wires (with yellow female terminations) to the battery
Connections plugs on the respective power supplies.
• Connect the white and black wires, which terminate together in a white snap-on connector,
to the connector at the bottom of the power supply assembly, as shown below. The black
wire must be closer to the wall at the power supply connection point.
6. Repeat step 5 for the second power supply, if applicable.
Note: AC wiring is supervised.

FERRITE
BEAD

*220/230/240 V PART NUMBERS 120 VAC

APPEAR IN ITALICS. 60 Hz, 4 A

120 V GROUND
NEUTRAL
P1

HARNESS P2

BATTERY (734-012) P3
BACK BOX
HARNESS (734-013)* P4
GROUND
FUSED AT 15 A P5
SCREW
Bulkhead connector

PDM
RED WIRE (566-246)
P5 (or 566-248;
P4 see below)*
BLACK WIRE

XPS
ASSEMBLY HARNESS 734-015
TO 24 V BATTERY
Additional bulkhead
connector supplied here

230 V A C
22 0 VA C

2 40 V A C
with 220/230/240 V 566-248
systems

NEUT
PDM TERMINAL
BLOCK

50/60 Hz
2A

Figure 2-35. XPS/PDM Connection

2-33
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)

SPS CPU Card Use the following directions to connect the CPU to the SPS and other motherboards (refer to
Interconnections Figure 2-36).
in the CPU Bay
1. Connect P8 on the SPS to P1 on the CPU motherboard using the eight-position Molex
minifit connector (provided).
2. Make sure connector P3 on the CPU is secured to J1 on the next motherboard to the left.
Repeat this for the third (leftmost) motherboard, if applicable.

SPS CPU Card Expansion bays comprise all bays other than the CPU bay. If you are installing a two- or 
Interconnections three-bay FACP, you will be using expansion bays (refer to Figure 2-38).
in Expansion The power distribution interface (PDI) is mounted to the back of each expansion cabinet. The
Bays PDI contains slots for up to eight 4” X 5” slave cards. Since the PDI carries power and data
across the entire bay, it solves most interconnection issues, especially between 4” X 5” cards.
Refer to “Step 5: Installing Modules into Expansion Bays ” for instructions on mounting 4” X
5” cards to the PDI. Also bear in mind the following variations:

• In a remote expansion cabinet, a transponder interface card (TIC) requires additional

interconnections. This occurs in MINIPLEX systems. Refer to Chapter 3.
• Regular motherboards require non-PDI interconnections to each other and to the CPU.
Refer to “Step 5: Installing Modules into Expansion Bays.”

SPS CPU Basic Panels with two or three bays must be interconnected properly so that they function together as
Bay-To-Bay the central point of a standalone or MINIPLEX system, or as a node on a network.
Interconnections
Generally, the CPU bay connects to a local expansion bay using a circuit from CPU to the
expansion bay’s PDI. If there is a second expansion bay, the PDI on the first expansion bay
connects to the PDI on the second.

Note: Interconnections can become more involved if regular motherboards are used. Refer to “Step 5:
Installing Modules into Expansion Bays” if this is the case.

• To connect from the CPU bay to an expansion bay, route the 734-008 Harness from P2, P3,
or P4 on the CPU motherboard to P1 on the PDI in the adjacent bay.
• To connect two adjacent expansion bays, route the 734-008 Harness from P2 or P3 on the
first PDI to P1 on the PDI in the next bay. Jumpers P4 and P5 are set to positions 2 and 3
(right) to provide card power to the bay from a power supply (SPS, XPS, or RPS) located
in the same bay. Jumpers P4 and P5 are set to positions 1 and 2 (left) to provide card power
to the bay from P1 on the PDI.

2-34
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)

SPS Basic Bay- Figure 2-36 shows the interconnections between three bays in a host panel.
To-Bay
Interconnections

J1/P3

P1 733-996
HARNESS
(LEGACY SYSTEMS)

P6

P8

P10
P2
HARNESS P3
734-008 P4

4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACE

P1 ASSY 566-084

P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7

4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACE

P1 ASSY 566-084

P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7

Figure 2-36. Bay-to-Bay Interconnections

For information on remote expansion bays, refer to Appendix B.

2-35
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)

EPS CPU Bay For the New Configuration:

Interconnections • The FACP power supply and the CPU master motherboard are connected through the PDI
board.
• Connect the power supply’s “RUI+ Earth Detect” (P9 on the EPS card) to the Earth Fault
(P1) on the RUI+ CPU Motherboard card.
• To connect the RUI+ CPU Motherboard to adjacent cards that do not communicate
through the PDI (2” motherboards for example), insert a male-male 10 pin header into the
Motherboards’s female ten pin header (J8) and insert the other end into the adjacent card.

EPS CPU Expansion bays comprise all bays other than the CPU bay. If you are installing a two- or 
Interconnections three-bay FACP, you will be using expansion bays (refer to Figure 2-38).
in Expansion The power distribution interface (PDI) is mounted to the back of each expansion cabinet. The
Bays PDI contains slots for up to eight 4” X 5” slave cards. Since the PDI carries power and data
across the entire bay, it solves most interconnection issues, especially between 4” X 5” cards.
Refer to “Step 5: Installing Modules into Expansion Bays ” for instructions on mounting 4” X
5” cards to the PDI. Also bear in mind the following variations:
• In a remote expansion cabinet, a transponder interface card (TIC) requires additional
interconnections. This occurs in MINIPLEX systems. Refer to Chapter3.
• Regular motherboards require non-PDI interconnections to each other and to the CPU.
Refer to “Step 5: Installing Modules into Expansion Bays.”

EPS CPU Basic Panels with two or three bays must be interconnected properly so that they function together as
Bay-To-Bay the central point of a standalone or MINIPLEX system, or as a node on a network.
Interconnections
• The CPU bay can be connected to a local expansion bay by connecting the P2 or P3
connector on the left end of the CPU PDI card to the expansion bay’s PDI P1 connector.
Figure 2-37 shows a typical interconnect using P2 on the CPU PDI to P1 of the first
expansion bay.
• To connect two adjacent expansion bays, route the 734-008 Harness from P2 or P3 on the
first PDI to P1 on the PDI in the next bay. Jumpers P4 and P5 are set to positions 2 and 3
(right) to provide card power to the bay from a power supply (EPS, SPS, XPS, or RPS)
located in the same bay. Jumpers P4 and P5 are set to positions 1 and 2 (left) to provide
card power to the bay from P1 on the PDI.
Note: Interconnections can become more involved if regular motherboards are used. Refer to “Installing
Modules into Expansion Bays” if this is the case.

Continued on the next page

2-36
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)

EPS CPU Basic Figure 2-37 shows the basic CPU interconnections in a 4100ES EPS FACP.
Bay-To-Bay
Interconnections

RUI+ MOTHERBOARD
566-938
EPS PCB 566-873

P1
P2
P3

CPU BAY TO
EXPANSION BAY
HARNESS (734-008)
P2
P3
CPU BAY

P1
P2
P3

EXPANSION BAY PDIs

P1
P2
P3

Figure 2-37. Basic CPU Interconnections

For information on remote expansion bays, refer to Appendix B.

Connecting to Panels with motherboards on the left side of the expansion bays require some non-PDI
4100 connections. If you need to connect a harness to a motherboard, refer to Figure 2-38 and follow
Motherboards these steps. Make sure to route the power and communication wiring on the left side of the bay.

1. Connect one end of the 733-525 Harness to a motherboard in an adjacent bay. If the adjacent
bay is a CPU bay with no additional motherboards, connect the harness to the P8 and P7
connectors of the CPU motherboard.
• Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P8 connector. Note that the P8
connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the
bottom four pins, not in the middle.
• Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P7 connector. Note that the P7
connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the
bottom four pins, not in the middle.

Continued on the next page

2-37
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 7. Interconnecting Modules and Bays (continued)

Connecting to If the adjacent bay is an expansion bay or a CPU bay with additional motherboards, connect
4100 the harness to the P2 and P3 connectors of the motherboard installed in the leftmost slot. (If
Motherboards 4100-6052 DACT occupies the leftmost slot, connect the harness to the motherboard in the
second slot from the left.) Connect the harness as follows:
• Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2
connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the
bottom four pins, not in the middle.
• Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3
connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the
bottom four pins, not in the middle.
2. Connect the other end of the harness to the leftmost motherboard in the next bay, as
described below. Make sure to route the wiring on the left side of the bay.
• Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that the P2
connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the
bottom four pins, not in the middle.
• Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that the P3
connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four pins or the
bottom four pins, not in the middle.

Blue

White

733-525 Harness

Chassis

Connector with
Blue Wire Goes
to P2

Connector with
White Wire Goes
to P3

Figure 2-38. Power and Communication Wiring for Motherboards

2-38
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 8. Configuring Cards

Overview The all cards and modules in the CPU FACP back box must be configured to operate correctly
in the system via their DIP switch and jumper ports. This section describes the hardware
configuration for the CPU components.

RUI+ Master The CPU motherboard must be jumpered as follows (refer to Figure 2-2):
Motherboard P6 determines whether the RUI SHIELD signal is connected to 24 C or earth.
Configuration
• Position 1 – 2: SHIELD to 24 C (default).
• Position 2 – 3: SHIELD to earth.
Note: Some devices that connect to RUI have inherently grounded shield terminals, in which case 24 C
cannot be used. If 24 C is used, a Negative Ground Fault will occur.

RUI+ Isolation: 
By default the RUI channel of the RUI+ Master motherboard is set to isolated mode. This
provides better noise immunity in larger systems. If you are using an RUI+ Master
Motherboard to connect to a 4602-6001 (SCU) or 4602-4007 (RCU), move jumpers P5 and P6
to the RUI NON ISO position.

P5 and P6
Position 1-2: RUI is isolated (default)
Position 2-3: RUI is not isolated (use for RCU/SCU compatibility)

SW1 and SW2 are used to set the CPU motherboard up to be attached to either a network card
or a RS-232/2120 card.
• On: Network card (NIC) attached to CPU motherboard (default).
• Off: RS-232/2120 card attached to CPU motherboard.

Master Controller The master controller daughter card must be jumpered as follow (refer to Figure 2-6):
Daughter Card P1 is used for engineering diagnostics (COMLAB).
Configuration
• Position 1 – 2: Download or no connection.
• Position 2 – 3: Diagnostic mode.
P3 configures the RAM battery as ON or OFF.
• Position 1 – 2: ON.
• Position 2 – 3: OFF.

2-39
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 8. Configuring Cards (continued)

SPS SW1: Using DIP switch SW1, set the SPS device address. Use the address table in Appendix
Configuration A.
P1: Earth connect jumper. Note that the P1 location is clearly designated on the PCB silk
screen.
• Position 1 – 2: Enables Earth fault monitoring.
• Position 2 – 3: Disables Earth fault monitoring.
Only one power module should be set for earth fault monitoring for each location within a
system. Normally, the SPS in the CPU bay is set to monitor for earth faults. If there is a second
SPS connected to the same set of batteries, that SPS should have earth fault monitoring
disabled. Other power modules that can be set to monitor earth fault conditions are TPS, RPS
and XBC. When located under common 0V with a TPS, the TPS should be set to monitor
earth faults, and other co-located power modules should be set to disable earth fault
monitoring.
P2: If the SPS IDNet outputs are being used, you may change P2 to configure the IDNet shield
connection. Note that the P2 pin 1 location is towards P3.
• Position 1 – 2: Connects the shield to 0 V (default).
• Position 2 – 3: Connects the shield to earth ground.
P3: City Card and Relay Card operation. Note that the P3 pin 1 location is towards P2.
• Position 1-2: Install in pos. 1-2 only if a relay card 4100-6033 is installed and has relay 3
programmed for operation other than "Trouble"
• Position 2-3: (default) For City Card operation and for use with 4100-6033 if relay 3 is
programmed for "activate on trouble" operation
Note: Refer to Chapter 5 for additional SPS configuration information.
Refer to chapter 8 for SPS wiring information.

EPS SW2: Use this switch to set the EPS address as identified in the Panel Programmer job.Use the
Configuration address table in Appendix A.
P18: The Earth Fault Enable/Disable jumper allows you to enable or disable positive and 
negative Earth Fault detection.
• To enable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 1 and 2
• To disable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 2 and 3
P16: The Battery Disconnect jumper can be set so that the FACP shuts down if the battery
levels are too low, instead of letting the system run with diminished capacities. Enabling this
function is mandatory for FACPs installed in Canada.
• To enable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 2 and 3
• To disable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 1 and 2

PDI Configuration P4/P5: The PDI can be configured to draw its power from different sources via P4 and P5.
• To provide power to the EPS CPU bay, set jumpers on P4 and P5 to position 2-3.
• To draw power from an XPS, SPS, RPS, TPS, or EPS on the PDI, set jumpers on P4 and
P5 to position 2 – 3.
• To draw power from P1 (from the XPS, TPS, EPS, SPS or RPS), set jumpers on P4 and P5
to position 1 – 2 (default).
• To remove power from the PDI, remove the jumper from P4.

Configuring Other Refer to the appropriate installation instructions to configure other cards that are located in
Cards CPU and expansion bays. Refer to Appendix E for a list of publications.

2-40
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 9. Installing and Removing Batteries

Installing and To install the batteries:

Removing
1. Remove the batteries from the
Batteries in a One
packaging and inspect them for
Bay Cabinet
any damage.
2. Tilt the first battery towards you
and insert it into the space at the
bottom of the cabinet.
3. Once inside the cabinet, tilt the
battery back to an upright
position and slide it to the right of
the cabinet.
4. Repeat the proceeding two steps
with the second battery and make
sure it is snugly positioned beside
the first battery.
5. Once both batteries are in place
remove the terminal protectors
from the batteries.
6. Connect the batteries to the panel
using the battery harness:
• Connect the positive terminal
of the left battery to the
positive battery input on the
panel using the red cable.
• Connect the negative terminal
of the right battery to the
negative battery input on the
panel using the black cable.
• Use the white jumper cable to
connect the two remaining
battery terminals, joining the
two batteries.
7. Power up the panel following the
instructions in “Step 10. System
Negative
Power Up and Power Down Positive
Procedures” on page 43.
Jumper
To remove the batteries:
1. Power Down the Panel following
the instructions in “Step 10.
System Power Up and Power
Down Procedures” on page 43. Figure 2-39. One Bay Battery Installation
2. Remove the harness from the batteries.
3. Fit the battery terminals with terminal protectors.
4. Remove the batteries from the cabinet by tilting them towards you, then taking them out of
the cabinet.
5. Dispose of the old batteries properly.

2-41
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 9. Installing and Removing Batteries (continued)

Installing and To install the batteries:

Removing
1. Remove the batteries from the
Batteries in a
packaging and inspect them for
Multi-Bay Cabinet
any damage.
2. Place the batteries at the bottom
of the cabinet, center them and
gently push them against the back
wall.
3. Once the batteries are in place
remove the terminal protectors
from the batteries.
4. Connect the batteries to the panel
using the battery harness:
• Connect the positive terminal
of the left battery to the
positive battery input on the
panel using the red cable.
• Connect the negative terminal
of the right battery to the
negative battery input on the
panel using the black cable.
• Use the white jumper cable to
connect the two remaining
battery terminals, joining the
two batteries.
5. Power up the panel following the
instructions in “Step 10. System
Power Up and Power Down
Procedures” on page 43.

To remove the batteries:

1. Power Down the Panel following
the instructions in “Step 10.
System Power Up and Power
Down Procedures” on page 43.
2. Remove the harness from the .EGATIVE
batteries. 0OSITIVE
3. Fit the battery terminals with *UMPER
terminal protectors.
4. Remove the batteries from the
cabinet.
Dispose of the old batteries properly.
Figure 2-40. Multi-Bay Battery Installation

2-42
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

Step 10. System Power Up and Power Down Procedures

System Power Up
• Never connect or disconnect power on a 4100ES by
Procedure IMPORTANT: removing the connector from the PDM. This could cause
an improper order of power disconnection which may
shorten the product life.
• If this procedure is not followed, you may cause damage
to the system and/or create a shock hazard.
Power-Up Procedure:
1. Connect only the negative (black) lead of the power supply/charger to the battery.
2. Close and lock the front panel door.
3. Have the appropriate personnel apply AC power to the system from the dedicated circuit
breaker or fused disconnect.
4. Ensure the panel has started properly, observing all safety procedures appropriate for a 
system with AC power applied.
5. Open the panel door and acknowledge all abnormal conditions including the battery 
disconnected trouble condition.
6. Connect the positive (red) lead of the power supply/charger to the battery.
7. Ensure the battery trouble has cleared.
8. Install the panel cover plate (when present), close and lock the door.

System Power •

Down Procedure • Use caution when handling batteries - they can store
WARNING:
! significant energy and present a shock hazard. When
transporting used batteries, be certain the terminals are
removed and/or insulated so they cannot make contact with
conductive objects and create a safety hazard.
• Use caution when AC power is present. The panel must have
power removed while you are performing service on the
system.
Power-Down Procedure:
1. Unlock and open the panel door and remove the cover plate (when present), observing
appropriate safety procedures and warnings when the system has AC power present
2. Disconnect only the positive (red) lead of the power supply/charger from the battery
3. Have appropriate personnel remove AC power from the system from the dedicated circuit
breaker or fused disconnect
4. Mark or tag the circuit breaker or fused disconnect indicating it is off for service

2-43
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

The Terminal Block Utility Module

Overview The 4100-0632 Terminal Block Utility Module is an all-purpose terminal block that mounts to
an electronics bay, above or below the power distribution interface (PDI). Each module utilizes
one block of mounting space.

The terminal block utility module has two 16-position terminal blocks that accept up to a
maximum of 12 AWG wire.

Mounting to the Follow the directions below to mount the terminal block utility module to the electronics bay.
Electronics Bay
1. Align the terminal block utility module to any two compatible screw holes on the electronics
bay. Position the higher terminal block towards the middle of the bay. There are eight 
possible locations: four above and four below the PDI. Refer to Figure 2-41.
2. Secure the terminal block utility module to the electronics bay with two #6 screws and 
lockwashers.
3. The shorting strip may be removed or modified, depending on the application.

SCREW HOLES FOR

MODULE BRACKET

SCREW HOLES FOR

MODULE BRACKET

TERMINAL BLOCK UTILITY MODULE

#6 SCREW AND LOCKWASHER

Figure 2-41. Terminal Block Utility Module Mounting

2-44
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

2-45
 Chapter 2 Installing FACP Components

2-46
 Chapter 3
Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components
Introduction MINIPLEX transponder interface cards (TICs) allow for data and power interconnections
between the 4100 host panel and remote locations. This chapter describes the transponder
installation procedure for 4100ES MINIPLEX systems.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders 3-2

MINIPLEX System Guidelines 3-7

Configuring Cards 3-8

TIC/Riser Mounting 3-9

TIC/Motherboard Interconnections 3-10

RUI Wiring 3-11

MINIPLEX Audio Wiring 3-12

3-1
 Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders

Overview The 4100ES MINIPLEX system is comprised of a host panel containing everything required in
a standalone cabinet (see Chapter 3), plus:
• One or more remote MINIPLEX transponder cabinets
• A transponder interface card (TIC) in each transponder cabinet
This section describes each component.

Transponder RUI Communication wiring from the RUI module in the host panel extends to a transponder
Cabinets interface card (TIC) in a remote transponder cabinet. The transponder cabinet is simply a
2975-94xx Back Box with at least one TIC module in it, and can have one, two, or three bays.

Transponder The following TICs, audio risers, and audio riser controller modules are available for 4100ES
Interface Cards MINIPLEX ® systems:
(TICs) and Audio • Basic Transponder Interface Card (TIC) Module
Riser Modules
• Local Mode TIC Module
• Analog Audio Riser Module
• Digital Audio Riser Module
• Network Audio Riser Controller Module
Transponder Interface Cards (TICs) receive data from 4100ES host panels allowing remote
locations to perform fire alarm functions. TIC modules are optionally available with local
mode operation that provides basic (degraded mode) system functions in the event of a
communication loss with the master panel. TICs receive communications from the 4100ES
host panel using Remote Interface (RUI) communications with either Style 4 or Style 7 wiring.

For audio systems, audio riser modules are required and are connected directly to TIC modules
via ribbon cable. Audio riser modules support Class A and Class B analog wiring, as well as
Style 4 and Style 7 digital audio wiring.

Basic TICs The basic TIC is an addressable device that contains an RUI input, audio riser module
interface, and a port for connecting to other transponder modules.
The basic TICs use the same board, with some variations:
• The basic TIC is an addressable device that contains RUI outputs, an audio riser output, a
user interface output, and a port for connecting to motherboards.
• The only connectors on the addressable network audio interface module are the audio riser
output and a user interface output.

3-2
 Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders (continued)

The Local Mode The local mode TIC contains an RUI input, audio riser module interface, port for connecting to
TIC other transponder modules, and terminal block for connecting to an optional Local Mode
Controller. Local Mode Controllers are mounted remotely from the transponder and are
available in red or beige (flush or surface mount). Model numbers are 4601-9108, -9109, 
-9110, and -9111. Installation instructions are supplied with the controller.
Local mode operation allows a TIC to provide life safety operations in the event of a
communication loss with the master controller. More specifically, this provision means that fire
alarm inputs and outputs within the transponder cabinet can still work in a limited capacity to
allow continued functioning of local initiating devices and notification appliances connected to
the TIC. Local mode is considered a “degraded” mode of operation because full fire alarm
system functionality is not guaranteed.
Because the TIC is a slave module that occupies an RUI address, it can indicate a trouble
condition to the master controller in the event of a hardware failure. When local mode is
initiated, all slave devices locally connected to the TIC are notified by the TIC that local mode
is taking effect. From that point until communication is restored to the master controller, the
TIC “group-polls” all connected local slaves, and the slaves respond only in the event of an
alarm input activation. Other status changes, including troubles, are not reported.

TIC Audio Risers Audio risers are used when digital or analog audio is being transmitted to the transponder
cabinet. They are always mounted directly beneath the TIC, on the leftmost side of the
transponder bay.

Refer to publication 574-844: Communication and audio interface modules installation

instructions to obtain configuration information for 4100-0621, -0622, and 
-1341 Audio riser modules.

3-3
 Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders (continued)

TIC Illustrations Figure 3-1 is an illustration of the various TIC and audio riser circuit boards.

0566-1166 0566-1167
BASIC TIC LOCAL MODE TIC

Figure 3-1. Transponder Interface Cards

3-4
 Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders (continued)

Local Mode Local Mode is supported by the following:

Specifications • 4100-3101/3104/3105 IDNet Card
• 4100-3106 IDNet Quick Connect Card
• 4100-3109 IDNet 2 Card
• 4100-3110 IDNet 2+2 Card
• 4100-5101/5102/5103 Expansion Power Supply NACs (including TrueAlert 
Non-Addressable SmartSync appliances)
• 4100-5111/5112/5113 System Power Supply NACs (including TrueAlert 
Non-Addressable SmartSync appliances)
• 4100-5125/5126/5127 Remote Power Supply NACs (including TrueAlert 
Non-Addressable SmartSync appliances)
• 4100-5120/5121/5122 TrueAlert Power Supply NACs
• 4100-1214 to -1225, 4100-1228 to -1239, 4100-1314 to -1325, 4100-1328 to -1339 100W
Amplifier NACs
• 4100-1212/1213/1226/1227/1312/1313/1326/1327 Flex 50 Amplifier NACs
• 4009-9401 TrueAlert Addressable Controller
• 4100-1270 Phone Controller and 4100-1272/1273 Phone NAC cards
• 4009-9201/9301 IDNet NAC Extender
• 4100-5116 Expansion Signal Card
• 4100-6077 MX Digital Loop Card
Local Mode is NOT supported by, but can co-exist with, the following:
• 4100 Legacy cards
• 4100-3101 to 3103 Auxiliary Relay cards
• 4100-6048 VESDA Interface Kit
• 4100-6043/6044 RS-232/2120 Interfaces
• 4100-1280 to 1287 LED/Switch Annunciators
• 4100-1290 24-Point Graphic I/O Module
• 4602-9101 SCU/ 4602-9102 RCU
• 4603-9101 LCD Annunciator
• 4100-1210/1211/1311 Audio Controller Board
• 4100-6014 Network Interface Card
• 4100-6052 DACT
• 4100-3115 XA Loop Interface Card
• 4100-6065 BMUX COMMs Module
• 4100-6066 TFX Loop Interface
Bear in mind the following limitations when local mode is in effect:
• If an alarm is already activated when local mode is initiated, the alarm remains activated in
local mode.
• Software zones are not supported. Basic TrueAlert channels are supported.
• Alarm verification is not supported. All alarms are reported immediately.
• SMPL is not supported.
• TrueAlarm sensors have fixed thresholds.

3-5
 Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

Introduction to MINIPLEX Transponders (continued)

LEDs The TICs have the following LEDs:

LED1. Illuminates to indicate communication loss with the CPU.
LED2. Illuminates when an RUI ground fault search is active.
LED3. Illuminates when Local Mode is active.
LED4. Illuminates to indicate an RUI Style 7 primary trouble.
LED5. Illuminates to indicate an RUI Style 7 secondary trouble.
Note:
• Refer to Figure 3-1 to see which LEDs are included on which TIC. Most TICs do not contain all LEDs.
• Refer to publication 574-844: Communication and audio interface modules installation instructions, to
obtain LED information for 4100-0621, 4100-0622, and 4100-1341 audio riser modules

Card Table 3-1 lists the specifications for all TICs.

Specifications
Table 3-1.TIC Specifications

Electrical Specifications
Input Voltage 18-33 VDC
Output Voltage 8 V @ 1 A; 100 mV p-p ripple
Input Current 36 mA for all TICs. 82 mA for a local mode TIC connected to a
local mode controller.
Environmental Specifications
Operating Temperature 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
Humidity 10% to 93% relative humidity at 90°F (32°C)

3-6
 Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

MINIPLEX System Guidelines

Overview The rules on this page apply exclusively to MINIPLEX systems. Review each guideline before
installing a MINIPLEX 4100ES system.

Guidelines • All wiring is 18 AWG (minimum) and 12 AWG (maximum).

• All wiring is supervised and power-limited.
• All wiring that leaves the building requires overvoltage protection. Install module inside
an UL-Listed electrical box wherever wire enters or exits the building. A maximum of four
2081-9044 Modules may be connected to one channel. The 2081-9044 is rated for 200 mA
(maximum).
• For Style 4 operation:
- The maximum distance to any device is 2,500 feet (762 m).
- “T” taps are allowed.
- The total maximum cable load (including all “T” taps) is 10,000 feet (3,048 m).
- Maximum allowed line-to-line capacitance (“+” to “-” terminals) is 0.58 uF. For 
applications with shielded wire, be sure that the total capacitance from line to line plus
the shield to either line is no more than 0.58 uF.
• For Style 6 or Style 7 operation, the maximum loop distance is 2,500 feet (762 m). “T”
taps are not allowed.
• RUI comms are wired to remote cabinets from the CPU motherboard to one of the
following transponder interface cards: 4100-0620 or 4100-0625.
• Annunciators and transponder interface cards support Style 7 operation when the system is
wired Class A.
• The master control panel must be a 4100ES Fire Alarm Control Panel.
• The Style 4 RUI card supports MINIPLEX transponders and 4602/4603 serial 
annunciators on the same signaling line circuit.
• Up to 4 RUI cards in the 4100ES Control Panel can be used for distributing transponder
wiring in different directions or for supporting different wiring requirements (such as
using a Style 7 RUI for serial annunciators).
• Up to 31 transponders can be controlled from the 4100ES Control Panel, and can be
distributed as required among the RUI cards.
• A maximum of 30 RUI devices between each TIC is supported.

Note: Old legacy, basic, and local mode TICs have been replaced due to component obsolescence. The
replacement boards listed below are functionally equivalent to the legacy boards.

Table 3-1

Name Legacy Card New Card

Basic Transponder Interface Card 0566-093 0566-1166
Local Transponder Interface Card 0566-094 0566-1167

3-7
 Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

Configuring Cards

Overview The TIC and all other cards to be mounted in the transponder cabinet and attached expansion
bays must be configured to operate correctly in the system via their DIP switch and jumper
ports. The CPU motherboard may have to be configured as well.

TIC Configuration The TIC must be assigned a device address via DIP switch SW1. Refer to Appendix A for the
address switch table.

CPU Motherboard P9 on the CPU motherboard determines whether the RUI SHIELD signal is connected to 24 C
DIP Switch (SPS or earth.
Configuration • Position 1 – 2: SHIELD to 24 VDC (default).
Only)
• Position 2 – 3: SHIELD to Earth.
Some devices that connect to RUI have inherently grounded shield terminals, in which case 24
C cannot be used. If 24 C is used, a Negative Ground Fault will occur.

Configuring Other Refer to the appropriate publication to configure other cards that are located in the transponder
Cards cabinet and attached expansion bays.

3-8
 Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

TIC/Riser Mounting

Overview All TICs and audio riser cards are mounted like any 4 x 5 card. This section describes the TIC/
audio riser card mounting procedure, which is identical to that of other 4 x 5 cards.

Mounting Use the following instructions and Figure 3-2 to mount 4 x 5 slave cards to an expansion
Instructions cabinet.

IMPORTANT:
• The TIC must be mounted in the upper left position of the bay.
• The audio riser card must be mounted directly below the TIC.

1. Screw two standoffs and washers to the appropriate holes in the back of the cabinet. These
holes must line up with the screw holes in the card. See Figure 3-2.
2. Plug the card into the top left PDI connector (P8).
3. Secure the top of the card to the standoffs with two #6 torx screws and washers.

WASHERS

SCREW STANDOFFS
RETAINERS

TIC CARD

#6 SCREWS

PDI CONNECTOR PDI

(reverse side)

Figure 3-2. TIC Mounting

3-9
 Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

TIC/Motherboard Interconnections

Interconnections Use Figure 3-3 to connect the TIC to a motherboard in another bay.

RUI
TMPR SW PRI SEC
24C INPUT SHLD

TB2
P6
TB3

LED4 LED5 POWER/

SW1
SPS COMM

HARNESS OR
734-078 4100
COMM
LOSS
LED1

LED2
TIC RPS
RUI
G.F.
SEARCH

P1

P1
P3

AUDIO RISER CARD

4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACE

PDI 1
ASSY 566-084

HARNESS
734-008

Connectors with
Blue Wire go to P2

4100 POWER DISTRIBUTION INTERFACE

ASSY 566-084

PDI 2

PDI Jumpers
P4 and P5 on the PDI must be configured to provide power to the TIC.
HARNESS 733-525
--- If there is a Power Supply in Bay 1,
• Set Jumpers P4 and P5 in Bay 1 to Positions 2 and 3.
--- If there is no Power Supply in Bay 1 with the TIC, you must obtain
power from Bay 2 or Bay 3.

Connectors with
Option 1
White Wire go to P3 • Set Jumpers P4 and P5 in Bay 1 to Positions 1 and 2.
• Connect one end of Harness 734-008 to Power/Comm
plug on the SPS or RPS (P6) (or P2 on XPS) located in
Bay 2 or Bay 3. Connect the other end of the harness to
P1 in Bay 1.
Option 2
• Set Jumpers P4 and P5 in Bay 1 to Positions 1 and 2.
• Set Jumpers P4 and P5 to Positions 2 and 3 in bay with
power supply that will provide power to the TIC in Bay 1.
• Connect one end of Harness 734-008 to P2 or P3 in bay
that will provide power to the TIC in Bay 1. Connect the
other end of the harness to P1 in Bay 1.

Figure 3-3. Transponder Cabinet Interconnections

3-10
 Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

RUI Wiring

Overview The TIC connects to the CPU via the RUI interface. Wire from the RUI interface to each TIC.
The wiring may be Class A or Class B.

RUI/RUI+ • Output: 24V @ 130mA (RUI), 500 mA (RUI+); 32V maximum (RUI); 25.2V max
Specifications (RUI+).
• Data Rate: 9,600 bits per second.
• 35.5 ohms maximum wiring impedance; 2500 feet maximum wiring distance.

Wiring Class A wiring allows transponder cabinets to communicate with the FACP even in the event
Configurations of a single open circuit somewhere in the loop. Class A wiring requires that two wires are
routed from the CPU motherboard to each TIC, and then back again to the CPU motherboard.

Class B wiring allows “T” tapping, and therefore requires less wiring distance per installation
than Class A.

Figure 3-4 depicts both types of wiring.

Figure Notes:
1. Wire size must be between 18 AWG and 12 AWG.
2. The maximum wiring distance is 2,500 feet (762 m).
3. The maximum cable load is 10,000 feet (3,048 m).
4. Maintain correct polarity on terminal connections.
5. Do not loop wires under terminals.
6. Shield is optional if the RUI+ Master Motherboard is used.
7. Twisted wire is required for RUI. Twisted wire is recommended for improved noise immunity for
RUI+.

Figure 3-4. TIC Wiring to the Host Panel

3-11
 Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

MINIPLEX Audio Wiring

Overview This section describes the Class A and Class B connections from audio controllers to audio
risers, as well as the TIC/riser interconnection. Class A and Class B wiring configurations are
shown for both analog and digital controllers and risers.

Analog Figure 3-5 is an illustration of Class A and Class B wiring from the analog audio controller to
Interconnections analog audio risers that are in turn connected to TICs or the Network Audio Riser Controller
Module.

Node 1 Node 2
Miniplex Node 2 Miniplex
Transponder Control Panel Transponder
1 10
SAA SAA

RISER 1 RISER 2
TB1 4100-0620 4100-0623 4100-0620
4100-1210 BASIC TIC AUDIO RISER BASIC TIC
ANALOG CONTROLLER
AUDIO OR 4100-0625 MODULE OR 4100-0625
CONTROLLER LOCAL LOCAL
MODE TIC MODE TIC

Host Panel
HARNESS HARNESS HARNESS
733-997 733-997 733-997
DASHED
LINES ARE P3 P3 P3
FOR CLASS A
OPERATION P2 P2 P2

4100-0621 4100-0621 4100-0621

ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
RISER RISER RISER
(566-242) (566-242) (566-242)

RISER 2 RISER 1 RISER 2 RISER 1 RISER 2 RISER 1

SEC PRI SEC PRI SEC PRI SEC PRI SEC PRI SEC PRI
TB1 S S TB1 S S TB1 S S
1 10 1 10 1 10

Figure Notes:
1. Leave the 4.7 K, ½ W resistors (378-056; yellow/violet/red) on the “+” to “-” terminals of unused contacts.
2. All wiring is 18 AWG to 14 AWG twisted-shielded pair.
3. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring (including other audio wiring).
4. AC voltage rating: 10 VRMS (maximum).
5. DC voltage rating: 1 VDC (maximum).
6. Maximum number of analog interface cards per audio riser: 31.
7. All wiring that leaves the building requires the 2081-9044 Over voltage protector at each entry or exit to the building.
8. Maximum wire distance: 10,000 feet (3,048 meters).
9. Wiring must be free of all grounds.
10. Set audio input card jumpers as shown in Aux Audio Input Module Installation Instructions 579-160.
11. All riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.

Figure 3-5. Analog Audio Interconnections

3-12
 Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

MINIPLEX Audio Wiring (continued)

Digital Figure 3-6 is an illustration of Style 7 and Style 4 (Class B) digital wiring from the digital
Interconnections audio controller to risers connected to TICs or the Network Audio Riser Controller Module.
(4100-1311 Digital
Audio Controller)
PRIMARY
DAR

Transponder 1 Transponder 2

6 1
+ -SS+ -
PRI SEC
TB2
FERRITE
BEAD
(required on 4100-1311
primary and 4100-0625
DIGITAL 4100-0620
secondary LOCAL
AUDIO BASIC TIC
DAR) MODE TIC
CONTROLLER
(566-409, -1028)
Host Panel

HARNESS P3 HARNESS P3
733-997 733-997

P2 P2

Loop wires once through the

supplied ferrite beads as shown
4100-0622 4100-0622
DIGITAL DIGITAL
DASHED LINES ARE AUDIO AUDIO
FOR STYLE 7 RISER RISER
OPERATION (566-407, -1000)
(566-407, -1000)

SEC PRI SEC PRI

TB1 -+S -+ TB1 -+S -+
1 6 1 6

Figure Notes:
1. All wiring is 24 AWG to 18 AWG, twisted-pair.
2. Maximum wire distance: 2,500 feet (762 meters) from digital audio controller primary to the digital audio riser card.
3. Maximum distance between subsequent nodes: 2,500 feet (762 meters)
4. Maximum line distance and capacitance between nodes:
18 AWG : 40 Ohms maximum, 0.055 µF maximum
24 AWG: 135 Ohms maximum, 0.055 µF maximum
5. All wiring that leaves the building requires the 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector at each entry or exit to the building.
A maximum of four overvoltage protectors are allowed. Each 2081-9044 adds 6 Ohms and 0.006 µF.
6. Wiring must be free of all grounds.
7. Maximum number of digital interface cards per digital audio riser: 31.
8. All riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.
9. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring (including other audio wiring).
10. In applications where no Digital Audio Controller is connected to the field wiring (such as a synchronized audio
application or a non-synchronized application with multiple network microphone s), all DAR interface cards are
wired secondary to primary.
Figure 3-6. Digital Interconnections (4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller)

3-13
 Chapter 3 Installing 4100ES MINIPLEX Components

3-14
 Chapter 4
Networking
Introduction A standalone or MINIPLEX 4100 system becomes a network node when a 4100 Network
Interface Card (NIC) or other compatible network card is installed and connected to another
network node.

This chapter describes each step of how to how to turn a standalone or MINIPLEX FACP into
a network node.

Before beginning the installation, review the next few pages for a detailed description of
network cards and the media cards that mount onto them.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card 4-2

Step 1. Configuring Network Cards 4-7

Step 2. Mounting Media Cards to the NIC 4-9

Step 3. Mounting Network Cards 4-10

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards 4-11

Network Audio Wiring 4-22

Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug 4-27

4-1
 Chapter 4 Networking

Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card

Overview The Network Interface Card (NIC) is a slave card that uses the standard 4100 serial bus to
communicate with the master. The NIC connects FACPs in a network, allowing for
communication between each panel via fiber, modem, or twisted shielded pair wire in a Style 7
wiring configuration.
The NIC is designed to be connected in a point-to-point arrangement, so that one wire fault
does not cause the entire system to fail. The point-to-point arrangement provides the most
secure and fault-tolerant wiring possible.
Two types of media boards can be used with the NIC card.
• The Fiber-Optic Media Card can be used for electrically noisy environments or for
connecting externally to other buildings.
• Non-4100ES/4100U only: the Modem Media Card is typically used when a large 
transmission distance is required.
• The Wired Media Card is used in all other types of applications.

Up to two media boards can be plugged into each NIC. The same NIC can use a combination of
two types of media boards (for example, a NIC may have a wired media card connected to port
1 and a fiber-optic media card connected to port 2).

4-2
 Chapter 4 Networking

Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card (continued)

Network Module Figure 4-1 depicts the 4100-6014 Network Interface Card.
Illustrations

DATA TRANSMIT/
RECEIVE LEDs
(LED2 THROUGH
LED5)

MEDIA CARD
40-PIN
CONNECTORS
(P5, P6)

DATA RATE JUMPER

PORT (P3)

DATA
PROTOCOL
JUMPER PORT
(P3)
MOTHERBOARD
ADDRESS DIP CONNECTOR (P4)
SWITCH (SW2)

YELLOW LED
(LED1) DIAL-UP
SERVICE
MODEM
RESET SWITCH CONNECTOR
(SW1) (P2)
Figure 4-1. 4100-6014 Network Interface Card

NIC Card LED The 4100-6014 NIC has the following LEDs:
Indications LED1 (yellow). Illuminates when
• The host 4100 requests it to illuminate
• A transmission fails
• It is off-line with the 4100 host
• It needs to be configured
LED2 (red). Illuminates when a data ‘0’ is received at the right port.
LED3 (green). Illuminates when a data ‘0’ is transmitted at the right port.
LED4 (red). Illuminates when a data ‘0’ is received at the left port.
LED5 (green). Illuminates when a data ‘0’ is transmitted at the left port.

4-3
 Chapter 4 Networking

Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card (continued)

4100 Motherboard The figures below are illustrations of two motherboards apart from the default CPU
Options motherboard that can be used with the 4100 NIC.
• The 565-274 Master Motherboard holds two daughter cards: the 4100 master controller
card and the 4100 NIC.
• The 565-275 Class B Motherboard holds the 4100 NIC by itself.
CITY CONNECT
FIELD WIRING JUMPERS (P4)
TERMINAL UT MASTER POWER/COMM BUS 2120 COMM/RS-232 CARD
BLOCK (TB1) CONTROLLER CONNECTOR (J3) CONNECTOR (J1)
CONNECTOR (J2)

P5
P6 FIELD WIRING
INTERNAL COMMS
POWER/COMM BUS SYSTEM POWER TERMINAL
CONNECTOR (P2)
CONNECTOR (P1) CONNECTOR (P3) BLOCK (TB2)

P7 P8
Figure 4-2. UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-274)

2120 COMM/RS-232 CARD

FIELD WIRING TERMINAL
CONNECTOR (J1)
BLOCK (TB1)

INTERNAL COMMS POWER/COMM BUS SYSTEM POWER FIELD WIRING

CONNECTOR (P2) CONNECTOR (P1) CONNECTOR (P3) TERMINAL
BLOCK (TB2)

Figure 4-3. UT Motherboard without City Connection (565-275)

4-4
 Chapter 4 Networking

Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card (continued)

NIC Card Modules There are three modules that can be plugged into the 4100-6014 NIC:
• 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card (565-261 or 566-376 or 746-109)
• 4100-6056 Wired Media Card (565-413)
• 4100-6055 Modem Media Card (565-279 or 566-338)
Each module is shown below.

FIBER-OPTIC DATA ASSEMBLY FOR FIBER-OPTIC DATA ASSEMBLY FOR

565-261 AND 566-376: 746-109:
TRANSMIT (U1) TRANSMIT
RECEIVE (U2) RECEIVE

JW1 LAUNCH POWER

SETTING

40-PIN NETWORK INTERFACE

CARD CONNECTOR (J1)

Figure 4-4. The 4100/4120-0143/ 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card

RESERVED (TB1) 40-PIN NETWORK

R1 P2 INTERFACE CARD
CONNECTOR (P1)

Figure 4-5. The 4100/4120-0142 Wired Media Card (565-413)

Continued on next page

4-5
 Chapter 4 Networking

Introduction to the 4100 Network Interface Card (continued)

NIC Card Modules

MODEM TYPE RJ-11

JUMPER PORT CONNECTOR
(P5) (P3)

RS-232
40-PIN NETWORK
CONNECTOR
INTERFACE CARD
(P1) (USED FOR
CONNECTOR (J1)
PHYSICAL
BRIDGE)
DATA
TRANSMISSION
JUMPER PORT
(P4) STATUS LEDs (LED1, LED2)

Figure 4-6. The 4100-6055 Modem Media Card (565-279 or 566-338)

Requirements Refer to Table 4-1 for electrical environmental requirements for the 4100 NIC and media cards.
and Limitations

Table 4-1. Electrical and Environmental Specifications

Electrical Specifications
Network Interface Card
565-516
Network Interface Card 566-
793
Modem Media Card
Fiber
Media Card
Wired Media Card
Environmental Specifications (All Modules)
Operating Temperature
Humidity
Startup, no media cards: 8 VDC @ 110 mA
Nominal, no media cards: 20 to 32 VDC @ 0 mA
Nominal, no media cards: 20 to 32 VDC @ 46 mA
5 VDC @ 180 mA max.
Using 24 VDC power supply: 20 VDC @ 140 mA max.
Using 5 V power supply (GCC/NPU): 5 VDC @ 130 mA max.
4.75 to 5.25 VDC @ 170 mA max.
32o F to 120 oF (0oC× to 49oC)
10% to 93% relative humidity at 90 oF (32 oC)

4-6
 Chapter 4 Networking

Step 1. Configuring Network Cards

Overview The NIC card, along with the each media card, all have jumpers that must be set as shown below.

Motherboard NIC-compatible jumper settings on CPU motherboards depend on which motherboards are used.
Jumper Settings Motherboard 565-274 (Figure 4-2):
• JW1 and JW2 must be installed.
• Jumper plugs P5-P8 must not be installed.
Motherboard 566-227 (Figure 4-2):
P6: Port 1 settings.
P5: Port 2 settings.
• P6/P5 position 1 – 2: Network card (NIC) attached to CPU motherboard (default).
• P6/P5 position 2 – 3: RS-232/2120 card attached to CPU motherboard.
RUI+ Master Motherboard 566-938 (for figure see Chapter 2):
P10: Port 1 settings.
P11: Port 2 settings.
• P10/P11 position 1 – 2: Network card (NIC) attached to CPU motherboard (default).
• P10/P11 position 2 – 3: RS-232/2120 card attached to CPU motherboard.

NIC Card Address Use SW2 to set the NIC card address. Refer to Appendix A for the address table.
Setting
NIC Card Jumper There are two shunt jumper ports on the NIC card that need to be set: P3 and P4. (Figure 4-1)
Settings P3: Determines the NIC data transmission rate, 57.6 kbits/second or 9600 bits/second.
• Position 1 – 2 (the right two pins) or no pins jumpered: 57.6 kbits/second.
• Position 2 – 3 (the left two pins): 9600 bits/second.
P4: Determines the data protocol, 8-bit or 9-bit, that the NIC card is using.
• Position 1 – 2 (the right two pins) or no pins jumpered: 9-bit.
• Position 2 – 3 (the left two pins): 8-bit.
All settings are labeled on the card.

Wired Media Card P2: Tells the system which wire type is to be used. (Figure 4-5)
Jumper Settings Positions 1 – 2, 5 – 6, and 7 – 8: 18 AWG shielded, twisted pair wiring.
Remove all jumpers to specify 24 AWG twisted pair telephone cable wiring.

IMPORTANT: When using the wired media card, the Earth fault
detection is performed on the left port only. Remove R1
(1 Ohm resistor) from the media card on the right port.

4-7
 Chapter 4 Networking

Step 1. Configuring Network Cards (continued)

Modem Media Non-4100ES/4100U only. P4 and P5 on the modem media card tell the system how the card is
Card Jumper being used. (Figure 4-6):
Settings P4: Sets the card up as a network media card or a standalone modem.
• Position 1 – 2 (required): Sets the card up as a network media card, a service modem, or a
physical bridge.
• Position 2 – 3: Sets the card up as a stand-alone modem.
P5: Specifies which connector will be used for data transmission.
• Position 1 – 2: For modem media board or stand-alone modem. Specifies that the 
transmission data comes from the 40-pin connector (J1).
• Position 2 – 3: For service modem or physical bridge. Specifies that the transmission data
comes from the 10-pin RS-232 connector (P1).

Fiber Media JW1 is used to adjust the link power budget. If communication problems are encountered,
Jumper Settings make sure that the fiber connections comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B-3 industry standards.
(746-109 only) The low power setting is preferred for all 62.5um fiber links less than 11dB and 50um fiber
links less than 6.6.dB.
Link Power Budget Settings (62.5um fiber/50um fiber):
Low 11dB / 6.6 dB
Med 16 dB /11.6 dB
High 20.4dB / 17 dB

4-8
 Chapter 4 Networking

Step 2. Mounting Media Cards to the NIC

Overview The 4100-6014 Network Interface Card (NIC) uses media cards to connect to other NICs. This
section describes how the media cards are mounted onto NICs.

Media Card NICs connect to each other via the three types of media cards. The types of media cards in the
Mounting right and left ports are determined by the type of wiring that is being used across cards.
Connect P1 on the wired media card, or J1 on the modem or fiber media cards, to P5 (the left
port) on the NIC.
To connect a second media card to the same NIC, connect it as described above, but use P6 (the
right port) on the NIC. Note that any two types of media cards can be connected to the same
NIC.

MEDIA CARDS
STANDOFFS FIT INTO HOLES

40-PIN
CONNECTION 40-PIN
(MEDIA CARD CONNECTION
P1 OR J1 TO (MEDIA CARD
NIC P5) P1 OR J1 TO
NIC P6)

4100-6014 NETWORK
INTERFACE CARD

Figure 4-7. Media Card Mounting

4-9
 Chapter 4 Networking

Step 3. Mounting Network Cards

Daughter Card The 4100 NIC daughter card, shown in Figure 4-8, inserts into motherboards as follows:
Installing • If the 565-274 Master Motherboard is being used, the NIC daughter card is inserted into
connector J1.
• If the 566-227 Master Motherboard or 565-275 Motherboard is used, the NIC daughter
card is inserted into connector J2.
• If the 566-938 RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard is used, the NIC daughter card is inserted
into connector J6.

Figure 4-8. Installing the Daughter Card

4-10
 Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards

Overview The nodes in the network now have to be wired together, so that the NIC in one host panel
connects to the NIC in the next panel. This section contains guidelines and instructions for NIC
wiring.

Wiring Guidelines Refer to the following guidelines whenever field wiring the NICs.
• Network nodes must be wired right to left port, regardless of the media type selected.
• Style 7 protection is achieved by wiring the nodes in a loop fashion. A single fault (except
an Earth fault) will cause the network to reconfigure for degraded Style 7 (Style 4)
operation. A second fault (except an Earth fault) will result in the network dividing into
two separate networks.
• Style 4 is achieved by wiring the nodes in a linear fashion. Style 4 networks are not 
fault-tolerant and a single fault (except an Earth fault) will result in the network dividing
into two separate networks.
• Earth fault detection is performed on the left port only. When a network Earth fault occurs,
the trouble is only reported on the node whose left port is connected to the span.
• All 18 AWG wiring used with 4100-6056 Wired Media Cards must be twisted-shielded
pair. All 24 AWG (telephone cable) used with 4100-6056 must be twisted pair. When
shielded cable is used, the shield must be terminated to chassis Earth on the left port only.
• It is permissible to use mixed media in a network. For example, some spans may be “wired
media” while others are optical fiber or telephone modem.
• Each NIC has a jumper for selecting between network data rates of 57.6 kbps and
• 9.6 kbps. All cards in the network must be set for the same rate. (When modem media or
physical bridging is used, the data rate must be set for 9.6 kbps).
• Each NIC has a jumper for selecting between 8- and 9-bit network protocols. All cards in
the network must be set for the same network protocol. (When modem media or physical
bridging is used, the protocol must be set for 8-bit).
• All network wiring except the shield is supervised and power limited.
• When wiring leaves the building, 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors are required. One
overvoltage protector is installed where wiring leaves the building; another is installed
where wiring enters the next building.

Continued on next page

4-11
 Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

Wiring Guidelines A 655-158 Transient Suppressor (ordered as part of 748-599) is required for each
modem-to-telephone line connection.

Transient Suppressor Assembly (655-158)

added to RJ-31x as shown. If connecting to a
terminal block, cut off one end of the cable.
Strip back the cable to connect the two center
8 1
wires, normally red and green, to the red and
green wires in the block.
7 2

6 3

5 4
Grn

Telephone Line

Figure 4-9. The Transient Suppressor

Wiring Distances Maximum wiring distances are shown in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2. Wiring Distances

Media Type Size Data Rate Max Distance

Wired 57.6 kbps 7,000 ft (2,134 m)
24 AWG
9.6 kbps 12,000 ft (3,658 m)
57.6 kbps 10,000 ft (3,048 m)
18 AWG
9.6 kbps 17,000 ft (5,182 m)
Optical Fiber 50/125 um 57.6 or 9.6 kbps 10,000 ft (3,048 m)
62.5/125 um 57.6 or 9.6 kbps 15,000 ft (4,572 m)
Modem (Physical Bridge) 24 AWG (dry) 9.6 kbps 15,000 ft (4,572 m)
RS-232 57.6 kbps 50 ft (15 m)
18 AWG
9.6 kbps 300 ft (91 m)

Note:
• 18 AWG fire-rated twisted, shielded pair must not exceed 58 pF per foot and be less than or equal to
6.385 Ohms per 1,000 feet (305 m).
• 24 AWG twisted, unshielded telephone cable must not exceed 22 pF per foot and be less than or equal
to 25.6 Ohms per 1,000 feet (305 m).

Related Refer to the 900-242 Field Wiring Specifications for additional NIC wiring information.
Documentation

4-12
 Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

Fiber-Optic Connectors U1 (transmitter) and U2 (receiver) on the 4100-6057 Fiber-Optic Media Card are
Wiring used to connect 4100-6014 NICs across parts of a network.

Note:
• ST connectors with long strain relief boots are to be used with the fiber optic cable.
• Fiber backbone components must meet or exceed standard EIA/TIA 568-B (Electronic Industries
Alliance/Telecommunications Industry Association) for maximum power losses; single-mode fiber is
preferred; attenuation should be measured at 1310 nm.

Figure 4-10 shows how two network nodes are connected via fiber-optic cable.

Fiber-Optic Cable

U1 U2 U1 U2 U1 U2 U1 U2

FIBER MEDIA CARD

4100-6014
NETWORK
INTERFACE CARD

Figure 4-10. Fiber Wiring

Fiber Optic Dual Fiber Optic Cable Connections. The standard fiber optic connection between network
Connection Types nodes uses two fiber optic cables, one for transmit, and the other for receive. This connection
allows for optimum communications distance.
The available communications distance is determined by the properties of the specific fiber
cable used. Distances can be determined using the information and examples shown in
Table 4-3.
Single Fiber Optic Cable Connections. For applications where a single fiber cable is
available, or where use of a single cable is desired, using a model 4190 9010 Bi-Directional
Coupler at each node combines the separate transmit and receive signals into a single path
(refer to the requirements list).
This connection allows use of a single fiber cable, but it does reduce communications distance
as indicated in the information and examples shown in Table 4-4.

4-13
 Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

4190-9010 The 4190-9010 Coupler (271-012) is used with the 565-261 Fiber Optic Media Board (revision
Coupler “C” or higher), the 566-376 or the 746-109. Two 4190-9010 Bi-Directional Couplers are
Requirements required per connection, one at each node.
The 4190-9010 is equipped with type ST connectors. To make type ST to type ST connections,
an ST to ST coupler, by others, is required. ST to ST Couplers are available from:
Black Box, part number FO200
Fiber Instrument Sales, part number F1-8101
Newark Electronics, part number 95F2097
(or the equivalent)

Table 4-3. Dual Fiber Optic Cable Communications Distance Examples

Power
Fiber Type 1* MIFL 2 Margin Distance 3 Budget 3

50/125 4 dB/km 4 dB 10,000 ft 17 dB

numerical (3.05 km)
aperture = 0.2 3 dB/km 3 dB 15,000 ft
(4.57 km)
62.5/125 4 dB/km 4 dB 13,000 ft 20.4 dB
numerical (3.96 km)
aperture = 0.275 3.75 dB/km 3 dB 15,000 ft
(4.57 km)
*See notes at bottom of page.

Table 4-4. Single Fiber Optic Cable Communications Distance Examples*

Power 4190-9010 ST to ST
Fiber Type 1 MIFL 2 Margin Distance 3 Budget 3
Coupler Loss Coupler Loss
50/125 numerical 3 dB/km 7,650 ft(2.33 3 dB
numerical = 0.2 km)
62.5/125 numerical 3.2 dB/km 2 dB 8,200 ft (2.5 21.4 dB 9.4 dB 2 dB
aperture = 0.275 km)
*Examples made using 4190 9010 Bi-Directional Couplers

Notes for Table 4-3 and Table 4-4:

1. Cable specifications are for 50 or 62.5 micron core with 125 micron cladding, multi-mode
graded index fiber. Wavelength = 850 nm.
2. MIFL = Maximum Individual Fiber Loss. Numbers shown are for example reference only, refer
to specific cable for exact specification.
3. Maximum cable length is determined by distance listed or by reaching budget value, which-
ever is shorter. Maximum distances listed for dual fiber cable are shorter than would be 
calculated. Budget using 4190-9010 Bi-Directional Coupler is the same with either size cable
because the coupler input cables are 62.5/125 fiber allowing launch power to be the same.

Continued on next page

4-14
 Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

4190-9010 Figure 4-11 shows coupler wiring.

Coupler
Requirements

FD4-848-1
Figure 4-11. Coupler Wiring

Wiring with the Refer to the guidelines and figures in this topic to use wired media cards.
Wired Media Card

IMPORTANT: TB1 on the wired media card must not be used when it is
connected to the 4100-6014 NIC.

• When the 565-413 Interface Card is used with 565-516, -407, –409, or 566-793 Network
Card, TB1 on the 565-413 Interface Card cannot be used. Connection to the motherboard
is required as shown.
• The shield should only be connected at one end of the line. The shield is connected to the
left port.
• When wiring leaves the building, 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors are required. One
overvoltage protector is installed where wiring leaves the building; another is installed
where wiring enters the next building.

Continued on next page

4-15
 Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

Wiring with the Table 4-5, lists the 4100ES master motherboard connections for the wired media card.
Wired Media Card
Table 4-5. CPU Motherboard Wired Media Connections

566-227 CPU Master Motherboard RUI+ CPU Master Motherboard (566-938)

Motherboard Port Wired Media Card Motherboard Port for Wired Media Card
for Media Card Connection Media Card Connected Connection
Connected to P5 (Left Port) to P5 (Left Port)
TB1-4 0V TB2-4 0V
TB1-5 Earth ground TB2-5 Earth ground
TB1 TB1-6 INV (-) TB2 TB2-6 INV (-)
TB1-7 None TB2-7 None
TB1-8 NONINV (+) TB2-8 NONINV (+)
Motherboard Port Wired Media Card Motherboard Port for Wired Media Card
for Media Card Connection (Right Media Card Connected Connection (Right
Connected to P6 Port) to P6 Port)
TB3-1 NONINV (+) TB3-1 NONINV (+)
TB3-2 Reserved TB3-2 Reserved
TB3 TB3-3 INV (-) TB3 TB3-3 INV (-)
TB3-4 Earth ground TB3-4 Earth ground
TB3-5 0V TB3-5 0V

Figure 4-12, shows how two CPU motherboards with wired media network cards connect to
each other in the 4100ES.

R+ R-
18 AWG
1 51 5
TB3

8 TB1 1

L+ L-

Figure 4-12. Wired Media Interconnections Between 4100ES Motherboards

4-16
 Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

Modem Review the following guidelines before wiring a network with modem media boards.
Guidelines • Modem media wiring for NICs applies to non-4100ES/4100U systems only.
• Phone Line Classification consists of the following:
- Private leased line for analog data communications
- No dial tone
- Full duplex operation
- No conditioning required
- No signaling required
- Two-wire line interface
- RJ-11 modular jack
• If a four-wire circuit is required, the line must include a data station termination (DST)
device to provide the two-wire interface required by the 4120 network modem. The DST
device should be located as close to the FACP as possible to minimize dry line signal
losses.
• The modem is capable of full duplex V.32bis analog data communications. The transmit
signal level is 10 dbm.
• Telecommunications device: Xecom Model XE1414 or XE1414C V.32bis Two-Wire
Analog Modem
• Modem FCC Registration Number: DWEUSA-75322-FA-E (565-279); 
DWEUSA-35610-M5-E (566-338)

Modem Wiring
IMPORTANT: Modem media wiring for NICs applies to non-4100ES/4100U
systems only.

The Modem Media Card uses RJ-11 connectors to connect 4100-6014 NIC Assemblies across
parts of a network.
Use the RJ-11 connector (P2) to connect nodes that use the modem media card. Do not use
connector P1 (P1 is reserved for when the daughter card is used as a physical bridge). Leased
lines must be analog, full-duplex, private line (no dial tone), with a two-wire RJ-11 interface.
Style 4 requires one circuit; Style 7 requires two circuits.

Standard TELCO Cable

P3 P3 P3 P3

MODEM MEDIA
CARD

4100-6014
NETWORK
INTERFACE CARD

Figure 4-13. Modem Wiring

4-17
 Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

Wiring The following figures show how to wire the NIC. The illustrations use the 565-274 and 
Illustrations 565-275 motherboards only. If you are using the 4100ES motherboard, refer to Figure 4-14
along with the figures below.

Wired Media Style

7 Wiring

SEE NOTE 3 SEE NOTE 3

OR OR
566-826 566-825

Notes:
1. Refer to general wiring precautions in this
chapter, as well as Field Wiring
Specifications: document 900-082 for
4100; 900-242 for 4100ES.
2. When the 565-413 Interface Card is used
with 565-516, -407, –409, or 566-793
Network Card, TB1 on the 565-413
Interface Card cannot be used.
Connection to the motherboard is required
as shown.
3. The shield should only be connected at
one end of the line. The shield is
connected to the left port.
4. On assembly 565-274, JW1 and JW2
must be installed. Jumper plugs must not
be installed on P5-P8.
SEE NOTE 5
5. Each “wired” media cable requires two
ferrite beads, one at each end (included in
the shipping group). Refer to installation
instructions 574-041 for proper bead
mounting.

Figure 4-14. Wired Media, Style 7 Wiring

4-18
 Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

Fiber Optic Style

7 Wiring

SEE NOTE 5
4020
SEE NOTE 5

OV2 FIBER + -I
XMT 7
L- OPTION R RV
L+ RCV
NETWORK ASSY* 0
EARTH
EARTH INTERFACE 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ASSY LEFT PORT XMT RCV XMT RCV
OV1 TB1
R- 565-411 FIBER FIBER
R+ 0R OPTION OPTION
TB2 566-826 TB1 ASSY* ASSY*
MOTHERBOARD
FIBER PORT ASSY
XMT
OPTION LEFT RIGHT 565-275
ASSY* RCV
NETWORK INTERFACE
RIGHT PORT (DAUGHTER CARD)
ASSY 565-409 OR TB2
566-793 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4100 L L O
+ - V
2

SEE NOTE 5 + - I
R R V
0
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
XMT RCV XMT RCV TB1 4002
FIBER FIBER
OPTION OPTION OV2
ASSY* ASSY* FIBER XMT
L- OPTION
MOTHERBOARD L+
ASSY NETWORK ASSY* RCV
PORT EARTH
LEFT RIGHT 565-274 EARTH INTERFACE
ASSY LEFT PORT
OV1
NETWORK INTERFACE 565-432
R-
(DAUGHTER CARD) R+ 0R
ASSY 565-409 OR 566-825
566-793 TB2 TB1

4100 TB2 FIBER XMT

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 OPTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ASSY* RCV
* FIBER OPTION ASSY L L O
565-261, 566-376, or 746-109 RIGHT PORT
+ - V
CAN BE USED 2
FD4-848-2

Notes:
1. Refer to general wiring precautions in this chapter, as well as Field Wiring Specifications: document 900-082 for 4100;
900-242 for 4100ES. For specific information about fiber optic wiring, refer to the 900-143 Fiber Tutorial.
2. The maximum distance between nodes when using the fiber communication path is dependent upon the fiber’s
multimode graded index: 10,000 feet (3,048 m) for 50/125 fiber; 15,000 feet (4,572 m) for 62.5/125 fiber. The maximum
cable O.D. is 0.118 (3 mm). Reference document 900-143 for other fiber sizes.
3. ST connectors with long strain relief boots are to be used with the fiber optic cable.
4. On assembly 565-274, JW1 and JW2 must be installed. Jumper plugs must not be installed on P5-P8.
5. Cable clamps supplied with 748-531 are used to secure the fiber cable.

Figure 4-15. Fiber Optic, Style 7 Wiring

4-19
 Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

Wired Media and

Fiber Optic Style
7 Wiring
SEE NOTE 6
SEE NOTES 7 and 8 FD4-848-3
* FIBER OPTION ASSY
565-261, 566-376, or 746-109
4020
CAN BE USED

OV2
“WIRED” + -
L- LEFT I
L+ MEDIA R R
PORT V
EARTH NETWORK OPTION
0
EARTH INTERFACE ASSY
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
OV1 ASSY 565-413 SEE NOTE 5 XMT RCV “WIRED” TB1
R- 565-411
R+ 0R FIBER MEDIA
566-826 OPTION OPTION
TB2 TB1 ASSY* ASSY
565-413 MOTHERBOARD
FIBER XMT 4100 ASSY
OPTION PORT
LEFT RIGHT 565-275
ASSY* RCV
NETWORK INTERFACE
RIGHT PORT
(DAUGHTER CARD)
ASSY 565-409 OR TB2
566-793 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4002 L L O
+ - V
2
OV2 FIBER
L- XMT
OPTION
L+ RCV
NETWORK ASSY*
EARTH
EARTH INTERFACE
LEFT PORT + - I
OV1 ASSY
R R V
R- 565-432
R+ 0R 0
566-825 “WIRED” 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TB2 TB1
MEDIA “WIRED” XMT RCV TB1
MEDIA FIBER
Notes: OPTION
OPTION OPTION
ASSY RIGHT
565-413 ASSY ASSY*
PORT
1. Refer to general wiring precautions in this 565-413 MOTHERBOARD
ASSY
chapter, as well as Field Wiring Specifications: PORT
565-274
LEFT RIGHT
document 900-082 for 4100; 900-242 for 4100ES. NETWORK INTERFACE
For specific information about fiber optic wiring, refer to the 900-143 Fiber Tutorial. (DAUGHTER CARD)
ASSY 565-409 OR
566-793
2. The maximum distance between nodes when using the fiber communication path is
TB2
dependent upon the fiber’s multimode graded index: 10,000 feet (3,048 m) for 50/125 fiber; 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
15,000 feet (4,572 m) for 62.5/125 fiber. The maximum cable O.D. is 0.118 (3 mm). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Reference document 900-143 for other fiber sizes. L L O
+ - V
2
3. ST connectors with long strain relief boots are to be used with the fiber optic cable.
4. On assembly 565-274, JW1 and JW2 must be installed. Jumper plugs must not be installed on P5-P8.
5. Cable clamps supplied with 748-531 are used to secure the fiber cable.
SEE
6. When the 565-413 Interface Card is used with 565-516, -407, –409, or 566-793 Network Card, TB1 on the 565-413 NOTES 7
Interface Card cannot be used. Connection to the motherboard is required as shown. and 8
7. The shield should only be connected at one end of the line. The shield is connected to the left port.
8. Each “wired” media cable requires two ferrite beads, one at each end (included in the shipping group). Refer to
installation instructions 574-041 for proper bead mounting.
9. When wiring leaves the building, 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors are required. One overvoltage protector is installed
where wiring leaves the building; another is installed where wiring enters the next building.

Figure 4-16. Wired Media and Fiber Optic, Style 7 Wiring

4-20
 Chapter 4 Networking

Step 4. Wiring Network Cards (continued)

Modem Media
Wiring (Non- IMPORTANT: Figure 4-17 applies only to non-4100ES/4100U systems.
4100ES/4100U
Only)

4020

0V 2
MODEM 1+ -
L-
MEDIA VR R
L+
NETWORK ASSY 0
EARTH
EARTH INTERFACE 87654321
ASSY LEFT PORT
0V 1 "WIRED" MODEM TB1
R- 565-518
MEDIA MEDIA
R+ OR ASSY ASSY
TB2 566-826 TB1 565-413
MOTHER
MODEM PORT BOARD
LEFT RIGHT ASSY
MEDIA
ASSY NETWORK INTERFACE 565-275
ASSY 565-516 OR 566-793
RIGHT PORT MODEM
MEDIA TB2
ASSY
12345678
L L 0
4100 + - V
2
PHONE JACK
OR
TELEPHONE
TERMINATION
BLOCK

4020
+ 1 -
0V 2 R V R
MODEM 0
L-
MEDIA 87654321
L+
NETWORK ASSY
EARTH TB1
INTERFACE "WIRED" "WIRED"
EARTH
ASSY LEFT PORT MEDIA MEDIA
0V 1
565-518 ASSY ASSY
R-
OR 565-413 565-413
R+ MOTHER
TB2 566-826 BOARD
TB1 PORT
ASSY
LEFT RIGHT
"WIRED" 565-274
MEDIA ASSY NETWORK INTERFACE
565-413 ASSY 565-516
OR 566-793
RIGHT PORT
4100 TB2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L L 0
+ - V
2

Figure Notes:
1. All wiring is 24 AWG twisted pair.
2. Connections between nodes can be made using unpowered (“dry”) copper wires or through powered (“wet”) leased lines.
3. Maximum cable distance between nodes when using short haul is 24 AWG twisted pair is 15,000 feet (4,572 m).
4. Long haul telephone circuits must be private leased lines for analog data, point-to-point, full duplex, two-wire line interface with RJ-11
termination (where no line conditioning or signaling are required).
5. Modem media board power (565-279/566-338): 180 mA. Maximum at 5 +/- 0.25 VDC.
6. Modem media boards operate only at 9600 bps, with an 8-bit protocol.
7. Refer to general wiring precautions in this document, as well as Field Wiring Specifications: document 900-082 for 4100; 900-242 for
4100ES. Refer to Test Specification 576-241 for instructions on how to communicate with the modem.
8. When using a service modem, connect to the 565-516 or 566-793 board using Cable 733-808 in shipping group 740-850. Use Cable
171-095 to connect the modem to a phone jack and/or a telephone termination block. Cut off one end of Cable 171-095 if connecting
to a telephone termination block. Strip back the cable to connect the two center wires to the red and green wires in the block. Refer
to Test Specification 576-241 for instructions on how to communicate with the modem. Place jumpers across 1-2 of P4 and 2-3 of P5.
9. When wiring leaves the building, 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors are required. One overvoltage protector is installed where wiring
leaves the building; another is installed where wiring enters the next building.
10. Modem media assemblies have part number 565-279 or 566-338.
11. A network can support can support up to 98 physical bridge nodes. Only four modems are permitted per network.

Figure 4-17. Modem Media Wiring (Non-4100ES/4100U Only)

4-21
 Chapter 4 Networking

Network Audio Wiring

Head-End Audio A “Head End” audio network usually contains one node with an audio controller module
Network (4100-1210 Analog Controller Board or 4100-1211 [or -1311] Digital Controller Board), and
Configuration may contain local analog or digital amplifiers. Some configurations may have an audio
controller module located in a non-head end node; for example, an application with backup
local audio in a non-head end node or an application with distributed microphones.
Typically, the other nodes only contain amplifiers, the audio riser interface (4100-0621 Analog
Audio Riser or 4100-0622 Digital Audio Riser), the 4100-0623 and the 4100-1341 Network
Audio Riser Controller Module.
The 4100-0623 Network Audio Riser Controller Module supports audio interconnections when
connected to 4100-0621 Analog Audio Risers or 4100-0622 Digital Audio Risers. It is a
version of the Basic TIC that doesn’t have an RUI input. It communicates via internal slave
communications and is used to control audio riser interface modules in network nodes that are
stand-alone fire alarm control panels.

Locations on the Figure 4-18 shows the DIP switch, LED, and connector locations on the 4100-0623 Network
Network Audio Audio Riser Controller Module.
Riser Controller
Module
RUI
TMPR SW PRI SEC
24C INPUT SHLD

SW1. Baud
TB2
rate/device address TB3

DIP switch (see LED4 LED5

Appendix A)
SW1

LED1. Illuminates
to indicate
communication loss
with the CPU 4100
COMM
LED1
LOSS
RUI LED2
G.F.
SEARCH

P3. Audio riser

connector
P1

P3

AUDIO RISER CARD

Figure 4-18. Network Audio Riser Controller Module

4-22
 Chapter 4 Networking

Network Audio Wiring (continued)

Card Table 4-6 lists the specifications for the 4100-0623 Network Audio Riser Controller Module.
Specifications

Table 4-6. Network Audio Riser Controller Specifications

Electrical Specifications
Input voltage 18-33 VDC
Input Current 25 mA for Network Audio Riser Controller connected to
a network node
Environmental Specifications
Operating Temperature 32oF to 120oF (0oC to 49oC)
Humidity 10% to 93% relative humidity at 90 oF (32oC)

4-23
 Chapter 4 Networking

Network Audio Wiring (continued)

Analog Figure 4-19 is an illustration of Class A and Class B wiring from the analog audio controller to
Interconnections risers connected to the Network Audio Riser Controller Module.
Note: Old legacy 0566-218 Analog Audio Controller was replaced due to component obsolescence. The
replacement board is the 0566-1011 Analog Audio Controller. It is functionally equivalent to the
legacy board.

Node 1 Node 2 Node 3

1 10
SAA SAA

RISER 1 RISER 2
TB1 4100-0623 4100-0623 4100-0623
4100-1210 AUDIO RISER AUDIO RISER AUDIO RISER
ANALOG CONTROLLER CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
AUDIO MODULE MODULE MODULE
CONTROLLER
(566-218, -1011)
Node 1
Host Panel HARNESS HARNESS HARNESS
733-997 733-997 733-997
DASHED
LINES ARE P3 P3 P3
FOR CLASS A
OPERATION P2 P2 P2

4100-0621 4100-0621 4100-0621

ANALOG ANALOG ANALOG
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
RISER RISER RISER
(566-242) (566-242) (566-242)

RISER 2 RISER 1 RISER 2 RISER 1 RISER 2 RISER 1

SEC PRI SEC PRI SEC PRI SEC PRI SEC PRI SEC PRI
TB1 S S TB1 S S TB1 S S
1 10 1 10 1 10

Figure Notes:
1. Leave the 4.7 K, ½ W resistors (378-056; yellow/violet/red) on the “+” to “-” terminals of unused contacts.
2. All wiring is 18 AWG to 14 AWG, twisted-shielded pair.
3. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring (including other audio wiring).
4. AC voltage rating: 10 VRMS (maximum).
5. DC voltage rating: 1 VDC (maximum).
6. The maximum number of analog interface cards per audio riser is 31.
7. All wiring that leaves the building requires the 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector at each entry or exit to the building.
8. The maximum wire distance is10,000 feet (3,048 meters).
9. Wiring must be free of all grounds.
10. Set audio input card jumpers as shown in Aux Audio Input Module Installation Instructions 579-160.
11. All riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.
Figure 4-19. Analog Audio Interconnections

4-24
 Chapter 4 Networking

Network Audio Wiring (continued)

Digital Figure 4-20 is an illustration of Style 7 and Style 4 (Class B) digital wiring from the digital
Interconnections audio controller to risers connected to the Network Audio Riser Controller Module.
for the 4100-1311 Note: Old legacy 0566-409 Digital Audio Controller, 0566-407 DARIC, and 0566-833 MCC DARIC boards
Digital Audio were replaced due to component obsolescence. The replacement boards are the 0566-1028 Digital
Controller Audio Controller, 0566-1000 DARIC, and 0566-1001 MCC DARIC. They are functionally equivalent
to the legacy boards.

NODE N
DAR TO (STYLE 4
PRIMARY ONLY)
INPUT
Node 1 Node 2 Node 3

TB2
4100-0623 4100-0623 4100-0623
4100-1311 AUDIO RISER AUDIO RISER AUDIO RISER
DIGITAL CONTROLLER CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
AUDIO MODULE MODULE MODULE
CONTROLLER
(566-409, -1028)

HARNESS HARNESS HARNESS

Host Panel 733-997 733-997 733-997
P3 P3 P3

Ferrite Bead P2 P2 P2
(required on primary
and secondary DAR)
4100-0622 4100-0622 4100-0622
DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
RISER RISER RISER
(566-407, -1000) (566-407, -1000) (566-407, -1000)

TB3 TB3 TB3

Loop wires once
through the supplied
ferrite beads NODE R
as shown (STYLE 4
ONLY)
DASHED DAR TO
LINES ARE NODE P DAR TO NODE Q PRIMARY
FOR STYLE 7 (STYLE 4 PRIMARY (STYLE 4 INPUT
OPERATION ONLY) INPUT ONLY)

Figure Notes:
1. All wiring is 24 AWG to 18 AWG , twisted-pair.
2. Maximum wire distance: 2,500 feet (762 meters) from digital audio controller primary to the digital audio riser card.
3. Maximum distance between subsequent nodes: 2,500 feet (762 meters).
4. Maximum line distance and capacitance between nodes:
18 AWG: 40 Ohms maximum , 0.05 uF maximum
24 AWG: 135 Ohms maximum, 0.055 uF maximum
5. All wiring that leaves the building requires the 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector at each entry or exit to the building. A maximum of
four overvoltage protectors are allowed. Each 2081-9044 adds 6 Ohms and 0.006 uF.
6. Wiring must be free of all grounds.
7. Maximum number of digital interface cards per digital audio riser: 31.
8. All riser wiring is supervised and power-limited.
9. Audio wiring is not to be mixed in the same jacket with other wiring (including other audio wiring).
10. In applications where no Digital Audio Controller is connected to the field wiring (such as a synchronized audio application or a 
non-synchronized application with multiple network microphone s), all DAR interface cards are wired secondary to primary.

Figure 4-20. Digital Audio Interconnections (4100-1311 Digital Audio Controller)

4-25
 Chapter 4 Networking

Network Audio Wiring (continued)

Distributed A Distributed Microphone is used between audio nodes in a network system where each node
Microphone has its own local audio (its own Digital Audio Controller) but needs to be able to play the
Interconnections microphone channel from a separate node’s Digital Audio Controller.
For a distributed microphone application, the 4100-0622 Digital Riser Interface 
(566-407, -1000) has a single digital to analog converter that can be set to convert any single
channel of the Digital Audio Riser (DAR) stream to analog. This analog output is connected to
a second Digital Audio Controller’s remote microphone input or to the microphone input of a
4100-1240 Input Option Card (566-037). DIP switches configure the channel selection and
density.
Figure 4-21 is an illustration of the distributed microphone application wiring. Refer to the
Switches and Indicators section for switch settings to configure the distributed microphone
channel output.
Figure Notes:
1. Leave the 4.7 K, ½ W
resistors (378-056;
yellow/violet/red) on the
“+” to “-” terminals of
unused contacts.
2. All wiring is 18 AWG to 14
AWG, twisted-shielded
pair.
3. Audio wiring is not to be (566-409, -1028)
mixed in the same jacket
with other wiring
(including other audio
wiring).
4. AC voltage rating: 10
(566-407, -1000)
VRMS (maximum)
5. DC voltage rating: 1 VDC
(maximum)
6. Maximum number of
analog interface cards per
audio riser: 31.
7. All wiring that leaves the
building requires the
2081-9044 Overvoltage
Protector at each entry or
exit to the building.
8. Maximum wire distance:
10,000 feet (3,048 (566-409, -1028)

meters).
9. Wiring must be free of all
grounds.
10. Set audio input card
jumpers as shown in Aux
Audio Input Module
Installation Instructions
579-160.
11. All riser wiring is
supervised and 
power-limited. Figure 4-21. Distributed Microphone Interconnections

Reference for For information of the installation of Multiple Digital Command Centre (MCC) Digital Audio
MCC DARIC Riser Input Option Cards (DARICs) refer to the latest revision of document 574-844.
Installation

4-26
Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug

Overview A Digital Audio Riser Termination Plug (734-183) is provided with every Digital Audio
Controller or Digital Audio Riser Module. You must use this termination plug to properly
terminate the Digital Audio Signal on the PDI.

Installing a Digital To properly terminate the Digital Audio Signal on the PDI, you must install the termination
Audio PDI plug into P7 of the Node’s last bay that has Digital Audio. The Digital Audio Controller should
Termination Plug be the first item and the Digital Audio Termination Plug the last item in the Digital Audio PDI
Bay-to-Bay wiring. See Figure 4-22.

Place the Digital Audio PDI

Termination Plug into P7 of the
Node’s last bay with Digital Audio.

Figure 4-22. Installing a Digital Audio PDI Termination Plug

 Chapter 5
The System Power Supply (SPS)
Introduction This chapter describes how the system power supply (SPS) is installed and configured by the
factory. Check the information in this chapter to make sure the SPS is installed correctly.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

SPS Specifications 5-2

SPS Configuration 5-4

SPS LED Indications 5-5

Troubleshooting 5-6

5-1
 Chapter 5 The System Power Supply (SPS)

SPS Specifications

Input/Output/ Table 5-1 summarizes the specifications for the SPS.

Battery
Specifications
Table 5-1. Input and Output Specifications

AC Input Specifications
SPS in Standard U.S./Canada FACP or 4 A Maximum
4100-5111/5112 SPS
SPS in Standard International FACP or
4100-5113 SPS
DC Output Specifications
All SPSs
SPS IDNet Output (see note)
Battery Charger Specifications
Input Voltage Range
Output Float Voltage
High Voltage Output
Output Current Limit
120 VAC @ 60 Hz, nominal
2 A Maximum
220/230/240 VAC @ 50 or 60 Hz
Minimum: 19.9 VDC (Special Applications)
Maximum: 31.1 VDC
Ripple: 2 VDC p-p @ full load (9 A)
30 V or 35 V @ 1/2A; 36.75V maximum; 3,333 bits
per second
21-33 VDC
27.4 VDC ±500 mV @ 20oC, temperature
compensated at -24mV to -36mV/×C (32oF to
120oF or 0oC to 49oC)
29.1 V @ 3.3 A
1.4 A (For 6.2 - 18 Ah battery)
3.3 A (Default; for 18-50 Ah battery- Canadian; for
18-110 Ah battery - U.S.)

Note:
• The battery circuit is supervised.
• When it is necessary to activate large numbers of output devices on IDNet peripherals (such as piezo
sounders), the output voltage is increased to 35V to provide sufficient voltage at the end of line to
activate the piezo. The higher voltage state is an alarm condition for the purpose of standby battery
calculation. The 30V output is the normal condition and is used to prolong battery standby. The system
CPU will activate the boost feature when 10 LED, Piezo or other outputs are activated.
• AC power must be provided to the 4100ES from a dedicated AC branch circuit. The AC input is
supervised.
• 220/230/240 VAC SPS only: The service branch circuit breaker should be sized to handle at least 150
percent of the total required by all of the power supplies in the system. If more than a 13 A branch
circuit is required then multiple dedicated branch circuits should be used instead.
• The 4100ES is a configurable system. Each system must be evaluated for battery standby
requirements based upon the configuration. 4100ES systems can be configured with multiple sets of
batteries if necessary. A basic 4100ES system can achieve 24 hours standby with 12.7 Ah batteries.
For UL Listed systems, up to 110 Ah batteries may be used. For ULC Listed systems, up to 50 Ah
batteries may be used. Refer to the Sales Engineering battery calculation tool for assistance.

5-2
 Chapter 5 The System Power Supply (SPS)

SPS Specifications (continued)

SPS Current Table 5-2 summarizes battery standby capabilities for the SPS. Voltage assumed is 24 VDC,
Consumption which is the rated battery voltage for lead-acid type batteries.

Table 5-2. SPS Current Specifications

Standby Conditions Current

• No alarms (NACs normal) 175 mA
• IDNet LED ON, no IDNet devices connected
Add to above for each additional set of 50 IDNet devices in standby, with IDNet at 40 mA
30 V
Total current for fully loaded IDNet channel (250 devices) in standby 375 mA
Alarm Conditions Current

• 3 NACs ON 185 mA
• IDNet LED ON, no IDNet devices connected
Add to above for each set of 50 IDNet devices in alarm, 20 LEDs ON 80 mA
Add to above for each set of 50 IDNet devices in alarm, LEDs OFF 50 mA
Total current for a fully loaded IDNet channel (250 devices) in alarm, 20 LEDs ON 475 mA

Note:
• Additional standby conditions: Trouble relay activated, power trouble LED on, IDNet LED on, battery
charger off, auxiliary power load = 0 mA
• Additional alarm conditions: Trouble relay activated, power trouble LED on, IDNet LED on, battery
charger off, auxiliary power load = 0 mA, NAC alarm load = 0 mA, IDNet = 35 V

The Notification Appliance Circuits on the SPS are rated for Special Application and for
Regulated 24 VDC operation per UL864, 9th Edition.
When used with the Notification Appliances listed in Table I (Appendix I) or Table J
(Appendix J), each NAC is rated for 3A, and total SPS capacity is rated at 9A. This rating is the
UL864 Special Application rating. Appliances listed in Table I or Table J are synchronized per
UL864, between all NACs on the SPS, and any NACs on a SPS, RPS, or XPS within the same
4100ES system.
For use with Notification Appliances not listed in Table I or Table J, each circuit is rated for 2A
maximum, with a total Notification Appliance load of 4A per SPS. This rating is the UL 864
Regulated 24 VDC rating. Synchronization of strobes and other appliances requires use of the
associated, Listed, compatible Synchronization Module. Consult supplier of Notification
Appliances for synchronization limits and details.
Simplex Appliances (Table I) May not be mixed with Wheelock Appliances (Table J) on a
single power supply. A 4100ES system with mix of appliances from Table I and Table J will
not meet the UL 864 9th Edition requirement for Visual synchronization (10 milliseconds)
between power supplies. Appliances listed in Table I will be consistently out of visual sync
with appliances in Table J by about 30 milliseconds. Appliances listed Table I will be notably
out of audible sync with appliances in Table J by a consistent (Wheelock leading by 1/2
second). In order to meet the requirements for visual and audible sync system wide, all
appliances in the system must be exclusively from either Table I or Table J.
Non-pulsing, linear-type Notification Appliances, such as horns or bells may be used up to the
full rating (3A / NAC, 9A total for the SPS).

5-3
 Chapter 5 The System Power Supply (SPS)

SPS Configuration

Overview This section contains information about SPS jumpers and DIP switches. Refer to Chapter 4 of
this document for information on setting the jumpers.

Jumper Settings P1: Earth connect jumper. Note that the P1 location is clearly designated on the PCB silk
screen.
• Position 1 – 2: Enables Earth fault monitoring.
• Position 2 – 3: Disables Earth fault monitoring.

Only one power module should be set for earth fault monitoring for each location within a
system. Normally, the SPS in the CPU bay is set to monitor for earth faults. If there is a second
SPS connected to the same set of batteries, that SPS should have earth fault monitoring
disabled. Other power modules that can be set to monitor earth fault conditions are TPS, RPS
and XBC. When located under common 0V with a TPS, the TPS should be set to monitor
earth faults, and other co-located power modules should be set to disable earth fault
monitoring.

P2: If the SPS IDNet outputs are being used, you may change P2 to configure the IDNet shield
connection. Note that the P2 pin 1 location is towards P3.
• Position 1 – 2: Connects the shield to 0 V (default).
• Position 2 – 3: Connects the shield to earth ground.

P3: City Card and Relay Card operation. Note that the P3 pin 1 location is towards P2.
• Position 1-2: Install in position 1-2 only if a relay card 4100-6033 is installed and has relay
3 programmed for operation other than "Trouble"
• Position 2-3: (default) For City Card operation and for use with 4100-6033 if relay 3 is
programmed for "activate on trouble" operation

Setting the Device Refer to Appendix A to set the device address for the SPS with DIP switch SW1.
Address

5-4
 Chapter 5 The System Power Supply (SPS)

SPS LED Indications

LEDs The SPS has the following LEDs:

LED1 (yellow). Illuminates when NAC 1 is ON or in Trouble.
LED2 (yellow). Illuminates when NAC 2 is ON or in Trouble.
LED3 (yellow). Illuminates when NAC 3 is ON or in Trouble.
LED4 (yellow). Illuminates to indicate a communications loss with the system CPU; normally
off. If this LED is blinking, try re-loading the software to FLASH.
LED5 (yellow). Indicates IDNet status.
• Slow blink: Class A open circuit trouble.
• Fast blink: Short circuit trouble.
• On steady: No devices detected/ channel failure.
• Normally off.
LED6 (yellow). Indicates power supply status.
• Single blink: Positive earth fault.
• Double blink: Negative earth fault.
• Triple blink: Battery trouble.
• Quadruple blink: Charger trouble.
• On steady: Overcurrent fault.
• Normally off.
LED7 (green). Illuminates when the power supply is powered from the AC line. Off when the
power supply is de-energized, or when it is using battery backup power.

5-5
 Chapter 5 The System Power Supply (SPS)

Troubleshooting

Overview This section contains explanations of trouble messages that may appear on the 4100ES display
when using the SPS. Heading text in the left margin shows the error message, while the
paragraph next to it describes the likely cause of the message.

IDNet Power There is no output voltage from the power supply.

Monitor Trouble
Extra Device Appears if one or more extra devices (i.e., devices that have not been configured for the IDNet
channel) are one the system. Only one message appears, regardless of the number of extra
devices found.

Class A Trouble There is an open on the IDNet channel. A hardware reset is required to reset the trouble.

Earth Fault Comes up during the Earth Fault Search diagnostic function. Once the search is initiated, the
Search front panel display indicates how far along the search process has progressed (10%, 25%…
75%), and then shows the results of the search. The result either identifies the offending circuit
or indicates that the earth fault could not be found. SPS circuits (IDNet, NAC, and aux power)
are searched. System alarm and trouble processing is suspended during the search.

Short Circuit Appears when a short is detected on the IDNet channel. This status clears automatically when
the short circuit is removed.

Channel Fail Appears when each device on the IDNet channel has been configured, and when none of the
devices are communicating on the channel. This message does not appear if there are no
configured devices on the IDNet channel.

No Answer/Bad Occurs when the 4100ES is put into a diagnostic mode and finds a device not responding, or
Answer responding unreliably. Refer to the ES Panel Programmer’s Manual (574-849) for information
on how to perform this diagnostic.

Output Abnormal Occurs when 24 VDC is not present on TrueAlarm devices or when TrueAlarm sensor bases
with relay driver outputs are not properly supervised or when isolator devices are in isolation
mode.

5-6
 Chapter 6
4100ES SPS Field Wiring
Introduction This chapter shows how 4100ES devices are wired to notification appliances. Most of the
connections shown herein are reverse-polarity NACs, IDNet circuits, and power circuits.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

General Field Wiring Guidelines 6-2

Power Supply Wiring Distances 6-5

SPS NAC Field Wiring Guidelines 6-7

SPS NAC Wiring 6-8

SPS IDNet Field Wiring Guidelines 6-10

SPS IDNet Wiring 6-11

SPS Auxiliary Power Wiring 6-13

SPS Auxiliary Relay Wiring 6-15

6-1
 Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

General Field Wiring Guidelines

General Make sure these guidelines are accounted for before wiring:
Guidelines • All wires must be 18 AWG, or as the local code dictates.
• Conductors must test free of all grounds.
• All wiring must be done using copper conductors only, unless noted otherwise.
• If shielded wire is used,
- the metallic continuity of the shield must be maintained throughout the entire cable length.
- the entire length of the cable must have a resistance greater than 1 Megohm to earth ground.
• Underground wiring must be free of all water.
• In areas of high lightning activity, or in areas that have large power surges, the 2081-9027 Transient
Suppressor should be used on monitor points.
• Wires must not be run through elevator shafts.
• Wires that run in plenum must be in conduit.
• Splicing is permitted. All spliced connections must either be soldered (resin-core solder), crimped in
metal sleeves, or encapsulated with an epoxy resin. When soldering or crimped metal sleeves are
used, the junction must be insulated with a high-grade electrical tape that is as sound as the original
insulating jacket. Shield continuity must be maintained throughout.
• A system ground must be provided for earth detection and lightning protection devices. This
connection must comply with approved earth detection per NFPA780.
• Only system wiring can be run together in the same conduit.

6-2
 Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

General Field Wiring Guidelines (continued)

Power-Limited Make sure these guidelines are accounted for before wiring for power-limited systems:
Guidelines
• Non-power limited field wiring (AC power, batteries, City connection) must be installed and routed in
the shaded areas shown in Table 6-1.
• Power-limited field wiring must be installed and routed in the non-shaded areas shown in Table 6-1,
with the exception of City wiring.
• Excess slack should be kept to a minimum inside the back box enclosure. The wiring should be neatly
dressed and bundled together using wire ties. Anchor power-limited wiring to tie points, as shown in
Figure 6-1.

CONDUIT ENTRANCE
FOR NON-POWER
CONDUIT ENTRANCE LIMITED WIRING
FOR POWER-LIMITED
WIRING

NON-POWER LIMITED
WIRING

POWER-LIMITED
WIRING

TIE POINT
(LOCATION MAY VARY)

Figure 6-1. Power-Limited Wiring

• Tie the wiring located between bays to the internal wiring troughs, if applicable.
• When powering remote units or switching power through relay contacts, power for these circuits must
be provided by a power-limited power supply listed for fire-protective signaling use. An EOL relay must
be used to supervise the auxiliary power circuit.

Continued on next page

6-3
 Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

General Field Wiring Guidelines (continued)

Power-Limited • Auxiliary power only: Supervision must be provided if the auxiliary power circuit is to be wired as a
Guidelines power-limited circuit. In order to connect a circuit using power-limited wiring, the devices being
powered must all be addressable, or a UL Listed EOL relay must be used to supervise the circuit.
Refer to Figure 6-2 for wiring directions for the EOL relay.

TO AUX POWER

Note: The 2098-9739 Relay is RED BLACK

used as an example.
Other UL Listed 24VDC
2098-9739
EOL relays can be used, END OF
depending on the LINE RELAY
application.

YELLOW

LAST IDC
IDC DEVICE RESISTOR

Figure 6-2. The EOL Relay

6-4
 Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

Power Supply Wiring Distances

Overview Before wiring from any type of power supply to notification appliances, check Table 6-1 and
Table 6-2 for wiring distances.

Class A NAC Table 6-1 lists the maximum distances from the NAC terminal block to the last appliance in a
Wiring Table Class A configuration, depending on wire gauge and current. Use Table 6-1 to calculate wire
distances for your application if you are using Class A wiring.

Table 6-1. Class A Wiring Distances

Alarm Current Max Distance Max Distance Max Distance Max Distance DC
@ 24 VDC with 18 AWG with 16 AWG with 14 AWG with 12 AWG Resistance
0.25 A 420 ft. (128 m) 667 ft. (203 m) 1,063 ft. (324 m) 1,691 ft. (515 m) 6 Ohms
0.50 A 210 ft. (64 m) 334 ft. (102 m) 532 ft. (162 m) 845 ft. (258 m) 3 Ohms
0.75 A 140 ft. (43 m) 222 ft. (68 m) 354 ft. (108 m) 564 ft. (172 m) 2 Ohms
1.00 A 105 ft. (32 m) 167 ft. (51 m) 266 ft. (81 m) 423 ft. (129 m) 1.5 Ohms
1.25 A 84 ft. (26 m) 133 ft. (41 m) 213 ft. (65 m) 338 ft. (103 m) 1.2 Ohms
1.50 A 70 ft. (21 m) 111 ft. (34 m) 177 ft. (54 m) 282 ft. (86 m) 1 Ohm
1.75 A 60 ft. (18 m) 95 ft. (29 m) 152 ft. (46 m) 242 ft. (74 m) 0.86 Ohm
2.00 A 53 ft. (16 m) 83 ft. (25 m) 133 ft. (41 m) 211 ft. (64 m) 0.75 Ohm
2.25 A 47 ft. (14 m) 74 ft. (23 m) 118 ft. (36 m) 188 ft. (57 m) 0.67 Ohm
2.50 A 42 ft. (13 m) 67 ft. (20 m) 106 ft. (32 m) 169 ft. (51 m) 0.60 Ohm
2.75 A 38 ft. (12 m) 61 ft. (19 m) 97 ft. (30 m) 154 ft. (47 m) 0.55 Ohm
3.00 A 35 ft. (11 m) 56 ft. (17 m) 89 ft. (27 m) 141 ft. (43 m) 0.50 Ohm

• Max Distance = distance from SPS/RPS to last appliance.

• This table is calculated at 49 degrees Centigrade (120 degrees Fahrenheit). If you are installing in
locations that could be exposed to higher temperatures, refer to NEC Table 8.
• Distances are based on a 3 V drop, and take into account the worst-case panel output voltage.
• If circuit integrity wire is used instead of housing cable in a fire-rated enclosure, reduce wiring
distances by 38 feet (12 m) for every 10 feet (3 m) of potential exposure.

6-5
 Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

Power Supply Wiring Distances (continued)

Class B NAC Table 6-2 lists the maximum distances from the NAC terminal block to the last appliance in a
Wiring Table Class B configuration, depending on wire gauge and current. Use Table 6-2 to calculate wire
distances for your application if you are using Class B wiring.

Table 6-2. Class B Wiring Distances

Alarm Current Max Distance Max Distance Max Distance Max Distance DC
@ 24 VDC with 18 AWG with 16 AWG with 14 AWG with 12 AWG Resistance
0.25 A 840 ft. (256 m) 1,335 ft. (407 m) 2,126 ft. (648 m) 3,382 ft. (1,031 m) 12 Ohms
0.50 A 420 ft. (128 m) 667 ft. (203 m) 1,063 ft. (324 m) 1,691 ft. (515 m) 6 Ohms
0.75 A 280 ft. (85 m) 445 ft. (136 m) 709 ft. (216 m) 1,127 ft. (344 m) 4 Ohms
1.00 A 210 ft. (64 m) 334 ft. (102 m) 532 ft. (162 m) 845 ft. (258 m) 3 Ohms
1.25 A 168 ft. (51 m) 267 ft. (81 m) 425 ft. (130 m) 676 ft. (206 m) 2.4 Ohms
1.50 A 140 ft. (43 m) 222 ft. (68 m) 354 ft. (108 m) 564 ft. (172 m) 2 Ohms
1.75 A 120 ft. (37 m) 191 ft. (58 m) 304 ft. (93 m) 483 ft. (147 m) 1.71 Ohms
2.00 A 105 ft. (32 m) 167 ft. (51 m) 266 ft. (81 m) 423 ft. (129 m) 1.5 Ohms
2.25 A 93 ft. (28 m) 148 ft. (45 m) 236 ft. (72 m) 376 ft. (115 m) 1.33 Ohms
2.50 A 84 ft. (26 m) 133 ft. (41 m) 213 ft. (65 m) 338 ft. (103 m) 1.2 Ohms
2.75 A 76 ft. (23 m) 121 ft. (37 m) 193 ft. (59 m) 307 ft. (94 m) 1.09 Ohms
3.00 A 70 ft. (21 m) 111 ft. (34 m) 177 ft. (54 m) 282 ft. (86 m) 1 Ohm

Note:
• Max Distance = distance from SPS or RPS to last appliance.
• This table is calculated at 49 degrees Centigrade (120 degrees Fahrenheit). If you are installing in
locations that could be exposed to higher temperatures, refer to NEC Table 8.
• Distances are based on a 3 V drop, and take into account the worst-case panel output voltage.
• If circuit integrity wire is used instead of housing cable in a fire rated enclosure, reduce wiring distances
by 38 feet (12 m) for every 10 feet (3 m) of potential exposure.

6-6
 Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

SPS NAC Field Wiring Guidelines

Guidelines Review the following guidelines for NACs before you begin NAC field wiring.

• All wiring is 18 AWG (minimum) to 12 AWG (maximum).

• All wiring is supervised and power-limited.
• The maximum alarm current is 3 A per circuit. The supervisory current is 2.03 mA at 
24 VDC.
• The nominal voltage rating is 24 VDC, 2 V p-p ripple (maximum).
• The total available current from the SPS is 9 A, unless it is used for REGULATED
• 24 VDC notification appliances, where the SPS/RPS is rated for 4Amps notification. Any current used
for card power by modules plugged into the PDI, as well as any auxiliary 24 VDC current, must be
deducted from the total available current.
• Terminal designations “+” and “-” are for the alarm state.
• All 4901-, 4903- and 4904- series appliances are Special Application with SPS. SPS is rated 9A, 3A
per circuit. SPS regulated rating per UL864 is 4A maximum per SPS. Compatible TrueAlert non-
addressable appliances for NACs are:
1
- 4901-series Horn
- 4903-series A/V1
- 4903-series S/V1
- 4904-series V/O1
- 4906-Multi-Candela-series A/V, V/O, S/V, and others1
- 49CMT-series, Multi-Tone1, 2
- 49CMTV-series, Multi-Tone/Multi-Candela1, 2
1
A maximum of 70 appliances can be supported per circuit.
2 Each 49CMT and 49CMTV series appliance counts as 2.7 regular appliances and no
more than 25 49CMT or 20 49CMTV-series appliances may be placed on one circuit.

6-7
 Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

SPS NAC Wiring

Class A NAC To connect the SPS to reverse-polarity, non-addressable notification appliances using Class A
Wiring wiring, read the following instructions and refer to Figure 6-3.

1. Route wire (between 12 and 18 AWG) from the “B+”, “B-”, and SHIELD outputs on TB2 of
the SPS to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral notification appliance. Use NAC1, NAC2,
or NAC3.
2. Route wire from the first appliance to the next one. Repeat for each appliance.
3. Route wire from the last appliance to the A+ and A- inputs on the same NAC circuit of TB1
of the SPS.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each NAC output you want to use.
5. Leave the 10 K, ½ W, brown/black/orange resistor (378-030) on each unused circuit. The
circuit must connect “B+” to “B-” terminals. No external end-of-line resistor is needed for
circuits in use.
BLK

RED 12 AWG to 18AWG

TYPICAL
APPLIANCE

IMPORTANT: Conductors must test RED BLK

free of all grounds.
TYPICAL Leave the 378-030 EOL
APPLIANCE
Resistor (10 K Ohm, ½ W;
brown/black/orange) on
unused circuits

RED BLK

Ferrite beads
required for RF immunity
to CE specified levels.
Use kit 4100-5129. NAC2 NAC3

3
2 P1
1
B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A-
NAC1 NAC1 NAC1

LED1 LED2 LED3

Figure 6-3. Class A NAC Wiring

6-8
 Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

SPS NAC Wiring (continued)

Class B NAC To connect the SPS to appliances using Class B wiring, read the following instructions and
Wiring refer to Figure 6-4.

1. Route wire (between 12 and 18 AWG) from the B+, B-, and SHIELD outputs on TB2 of the
SPS to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral notification appliance. Use NAC1, NAC2, or
NAC3.
2. Route wire from the first appliance to the next one. “T” tapping is not allowed. Repeat for
each appliance.
3. Route wire from the last appliance to the EOLR harness (10K ohm, 1/2W: P/N 733-894,
PID# 4081-9008).
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each NAC output you want to use.
5. Leave the factory installed EOL Resistor (10 K Ohm, ½ W; brown/black/orange) on each
unused circuit. The circuit must connect “B+” to “B-” terminals.

4081-9008 EOL Harness

10K 1/2W (133-894)

RED BLK
RED
Leave the factory installed
TYPICAL EOL Resistor (10 K Ohm, ½
APPLIANCE W; brown/black/orange) on
RED BLK
RED
unused circuits
IMPORTANT: Conductors must test
TYPICAL
free of all grounds. APPLIANCE

RED BLK
BLK
12 AWG to 18AWG

Ferrite bead NAC2 NAC3

required for RF
immunity to CE 3
2 P1
specified levels. Use 1
B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A-
kit 4100-5129.
NAC1 NAC1 NAC1

LED1 LED2 LED3

Figure 6-4. Class B Wiring

Note:
• Notification appliances are rated per individual nameplate label.
• Maintain correct polarity on terminal connections. Do not loop wires under terminals.

6-9
 Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

SPS IDNet Field Wiring Guidelines

IDNet Wiring Up to 250 IDNet initiating devices are supported on the SPS IDNet channel. The SPS supports
both Class A and Class B wiring.
Class A wiring allows IDNet appliances to communicate with the SPS even in the event of a
single open circuit somewhere in the loop. Class A wiring requires that two wires are routed
from the SPS to each IDNet appliance, and then back again to the SPS.
Class B wiring allows “T” tapping, and therefore requires less wiring distance per installation
than Class A. Additionally, Class B wiring does not require end-of-line resistors, because each
IDNet appliance communicates directly to the SPS.

Guidelines Make sure these guidelines are accounted for before installing the cards.
• For Style 4 operation:
- The maximum distance to any device is 2500 feet (762 m) for 126-250 devices, or 4000
feet (1220 m) if 125 or fewer devices are used.
- “T” taps are allowed.
- The maximum total wire allowed is 10,000 feet, or 0.58uF.
- Maximum allowed line-to-line capacitance (“+” to “-” terminals) is 0.58 uF. For 
applications with shielded wire, be sure that the total capacitance from line to line plus
the shield to either line is no more than 0.58 uF.
• For Style 6 operation, the maximum loop distance is 2,500 feet (762 m). “T” taps are not
allowed.
• Use supplied ferrite beads with the SPS. Loop wires once through the supplied ferrite
beads as shown in Figure 6-5.

Figure 6-5. Loop Wiring as Shown

6-10
 Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

SPS IDNet Wiring

Class A Wiring 1. Route wire (between 12 and 18 AWG) from the B+, B-, and SHIELD outputs on TB1 of the
SPS to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral IDNet appliance.
2. Route wire from the first IDNet appliance to the next one. Repeat for each appliance.
3. Route wire from the last IDNet appliance to the A+ and A- inputs on TB1 of the SPS.

IMPORTANT:
x Max. allowed wire capacitance is .58uF. IDNet
IDNet
Maximum distance to any device is 2500 DEVICE
DEVICE

feet (126-250 devices) or 4000 feet (up to IDNet LOOP

(CLASS A / STYLE G)
125 devices) IDNet
IDNet
DEVICE
DEVICE
x Class A wiring must consider the above
limits under worst-case fault conditions.
Neither the "A" or "B" terminals may IDNet
IDNet
exceed the distances noted above. DEVICE
DEVICE

Ferrite beads
required.

3
2 P1
B+ B- SHLD A+ A- 1

IDNet

Figure 6-6. Class A Wiring

6-11
 Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

SPS IDNet Wiring (continued)

Class B Wiring 1. On TB1, jumper B+ to A+, and jumper B- to A-.

2. Route wire (between 12 and 18 AWG) from the A+, A-, and SHIELD outputs on TB1 of the
SPS to a junction box. Begin “T” tapping at the junction box. The maximum distance
between the SPS and an IDNet appliance is 2,500 feet (762 m). The maximum wiring 
distance for any IDNet circuit is 10,000 feet (3,048 m) or 0.58 uF.
Figure 6-7 shows Class B wiring.

IDNet LINES TO DEVICES

(CLASS B / STYLE 4)

Ferrite bead
required.

IMPORTANT:
3
x Max. allowed wire load is 10,000 feet 2 P1
total or .58uF. Maximum distance to B+ B- SHLD A+ A- 1

any device is 2500 feet (126-250 IDNet

devices) or 4000 feet (up to 125
devices)

Figure 6-7. Class B Wiring

6-12
 Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

SPS Auxiliary Power Wiring

Guidelines • All wiring is 18 AWG and 12 AWG.

• All wiring is power-limited.
• When a NAC is configured as an auxiliary power circuit, no end-of-line resistor is used.
• Auxiliary power may be taken from the dedicated auxiliary power tap or from an unused
NAC.
• If auxiliary power is taken from NAC terminals, the NAC must be configured as an
auxiliary power point type in the 4100 Programmer.
• Remove end-of-line resistors from NACs when used for auxiliary power.
• External wiring from the dedicated auxiliary power tap is not supervised unless an end-of-
line relay is wired coil to auxiliary power, and Normally Open contacts are monitored by a
system power point. Relay current must be considered as part of the load. When NACs are
used as aux. power taps, they are supervised for overcurrent or short-circuit faults.
• All wiring that leaves the building requires overvoltage protection. Install module 
2081-9044 wherever wire enters or exits the building. A maximum of four 2081-9044
Modules may be connected to one channel.
• Voltage rating: 24 VDC (nominal), 2 V P-P ripple (maximum).
• The following devices are compatible with 24VDC aux. power:
- 2088-series relays and door holders
- 2098-series four-wire smoke detectors
- 2190-series monitor and signal ZAMs
- 4090-series IDNet ZAMs
- 4098-series four-wire smoke detectors and duct detectors
- 2190-9039 Printer
- 4190-9050/9051 4-20 mA ZAMs
- 4603-9101 LCD Annunciator
• The total auxiliary current available is 5 A. The total current available for the entire SPS is
9A (special application) or 4A regulated 24VDC, including NAC, auxiliary, and card
power.

6-13
 Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

SPS Auxiliary Power Wiring (continued)

Wiring The SPS can connect to auxiliary power appliances via the dedicated auxiliary power tap
(TB3). If more power is needed, any of the three NAC outputs can be used for auxiliary power.

AUXILIARY AUXILIARY AUXILIARY

POWER POWER POWER
Ferrite bead
Required for RF
12 AWG to 18 AWG immunity to CE
specified levels.
Use kit 4100-5129.
TB2 B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A-

Devices

NAC points must be

reconfigured as
auxiliary power Primary Return
output points in the
programmer

SPS TB1 TB2 TB1 TB2

Dedicated auxiliary
power screw terminal 4090-9117 4090-9117
(configured in the 24V
ISOLATOR 0V ISOLATOR
Programmer)
To SPS/
RPS

Class A aux power wiring requires the use

of 4090-9117 IDNet Power Isolators, as
AUX POWER
shown above.
0V 24V TB3

12 AWG to 18 AWG

AUXILIARY
POWER

Figure Notes:
1. Maximum allowed NAC current consumption (aux power plus NACs): 9A (Special Application) or 4A regulated 24V dc.
2. Maximum per NAC: 3 A
3. Maximum allowed auxiliary power current consumption: 5A (total supply).
4. Maximum per auxiliary output: 2 A
5. Class A wiring is possible only if a 4090-9117 Power Isolator is used.
6. International systems require ferrite beads. Use kit 4100-5129.
Figure 6-8. Auxiliary Power Wiring

6-14
 Chapter 6 4100ES SPS Field Wiring

SPS Auxiliary Relay Wiring

Guidelines The SPS includes one on-board, programmable relay.

• All wiring must be between 18 AWG and 12 AWG.

• When power through auxiliary contacts provided by the SPS, wiring is power-limited.
• When power through auxiliary contacts is not provided by the SPS, use an in-line fuse
(208-165). If the power source is not power-limited to the requirements of UL864, wiring
is to be segregated to the non-power-limited spaces of the cabinet.
• The relay circuit is not supervised.
• The relay circuit is rated to switch 2 A at 30 VAC or 30 VDC, resistive load.
• Relay contacts are Form C dry contacts. Suppression is provided to Earth. Do not switch
voltages greater than rating, or damage may result.

Wiring Figure 6-9 shows SPS auxiliary relay wiring.

TB2 B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A-

SPS

Dedicated auxiliary
relay terminal block

NO C NC TB4

12 AWG to 18AWG

NORMALLY
CLOSED
COMMON
NORMALLY
OPEN

Figure 6-9. Auxiliary Relay Wiring

6-15
 Chapter 7
EPS with IDNet 2
Introduction This chapter describes how the EPS with an IDNet 2 card is installed and configured by the
factory. Check the information in this chapter to make sure the EPS is installed correctly.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

EPS Specifications 7-2

EPS Configuration 7-3

EPS IDNet 2 Configuration 7-5

Connections 7-6

Troubleshooting 7-7

7-1
 Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2

EPS Specifications
Card Table 7-1. Card Specifications
Specifications )$.!# )$.!# )$.!#  !58
Auxiliary/
IDNAC NAC
Terminals

LEDs

Trouble Scroll
Button
A 4 Pin Harness
B
Address C Card Power /

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Switch D Comms
E
CH1
RUI+ Earth CH2 Connection
CH3 to PDI
Detect COM

IDNET 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IDNet 2
Card

Battery Disconect
Jumper
Connection
to Bridge

Connection to
Batterries
A- A+ B- B+ A- A+ B- B+
LOOP 2 LOOP 1

City Card Connection Earth Detect Jumper

Figure 7-1. EPS Card Layout
Operating oF 120oF (0oC-49oC)
32 -
Conditions Up to 93% relative humidity at 90oF (32oC), non-condensing.
AC Input Specifications: 120 V, 50/60 Hz, 4.6 A
Note: Maximum circuit breaker is 20A. 220/230/240 V, 50/60 Hz, 2.3 A
DC Output Specifications: 29 V @ 9 A
Electrical Up to 5A normal standby (AUX, "Card Power" and Backplane Power). Any non-
Specifications alarm current must be subtracted from 9A alarm current.
DC Input Standby – No alarms, SLCs normal: 135 mA / Alarm - 12A @ 24V
(battery With IDNet 2: 235 mA
standby)
Per IDNet/IDNAC device: 0.8 mA
Internal Charges up to 50 Ah (ULC-S527) or 115 Ah (UL-864 Listing) sealed lead-acid
Battery batteries connected to the power supply.
Charger High Voltage Output: 29 V
Output Current Limit: 3.3 A
IDNAC SLCs 29.5V maximum @ 3A per circuit; 4,000 bits/second
Earth Fault Earth fault detection is 10k minimum to any circuit.
SNAC wiring Short circuit detection is 5k ohms maximum for SNAC. Open circuit detection is
fault Detection 15k.
Battery standby requirements are dependent on system configuration. The
Battery 4100ES can support up to 115 Ah batteries (UL) and 50 Ah batteries (ULC).
Standby With 115 Ah batteries, a system could be configured to draw 3.8A for 24 hours,
(sealed lead- followed by 15 minutes at 9.375A. Or a configuration with 0.375A for 24 hours
acid batteries) and 5 minutes alarm at 9.375 would require 12.7 Ah batteries or larger. Refer to
Sales Engineering Calculation Tool for specific configurations.

7-2
 Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2

EPS Configuration

Setting the EPS The DIP Switch SW2 is used to set the EPS address as identified in the Panel Programmer job
Address (see the section on Programming for more information). From left to right, these switches are
designated as SW2-1 through SW2-8. The function of these switches is as follows:
• SW2-1. This switch sets the baud rate for the internal 4100 Most Significant Bit
Least Significant Bit
communications line running between the card and the
4100 CPU. Set this switch to ON. ON
• SW2-2 through SW1-8. These switches set the card’s address OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
within the FACP. Refer to Table 7-2 for a complete list of
the switch settings for all of the possible card addresses. (DIP Switch shown is set at address 31)

You must set these switches to the value assigned to the Figure 7-2. DIP Switch SW2
module by the Panel Programmer.
Table 7-2. EPS Card Addresses
Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8 Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8
1 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 61 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
2 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON 62 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
3 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 63 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
4 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON 64 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON
5 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 65 OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF
6 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 66 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON
7 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 67 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
8 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON 68 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON
9 ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 69 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF
10 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 70 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
11 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 71 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF
12 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 72 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON
13 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 73 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF
14 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 74 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
15 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 75 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF
16 ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON 76 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
17 ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 77 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF
18 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 78 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON
19 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 79 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
20 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 80 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON
21 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 81 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF
22 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 82 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON
23 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 83 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF
24 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 84 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON
25 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 85 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
26 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 86 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON
27 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 87 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
28 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 88 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON
29 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 89 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF
30 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 90 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
31 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 91 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
32 ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON 92 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON
33 ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 93 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
34 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 94 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
35 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 95 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
36 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 96 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON
37 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 97 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF
38 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 98 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON
39 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 99 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
40 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 100 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON
41 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 101 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF
42 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 102 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON
43 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 103 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF
44 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 104 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON
45 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 105 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF
46 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 106 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
47 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 107 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF
48 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 108 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
49 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 109 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
50 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 110 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
51 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 111 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
52 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 112 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
53 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 113 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
54 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 114 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON
55 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 115 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
56 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 116 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON
57 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 117 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
58 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 118 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON
59 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 119 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
60 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

7-3
 Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2

EPS Configuration (continued)

Earth Connect The EPS Earth Fault Enable/Disable jumper allows you to enable or disable Earth Fault
Jumper detection.
• To enable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 1 and 2
• To disable the function: Place the jumper block on pins 2 and 3

Function Enabled

3 2 1
P18

Function Disabled
Figure 7-3. Earth Connect Jumper Positions

Earth Fault detection is set to active on one EPS per battery location. A battery location is any
cabinet connected to the master 4100 communications channel without a TIC. A transponder
cabinet is another battery location. Only ONE earth fault circuit should be active on all power
supplies (EPS, TPS, SPS, RPS) within a battery location. Disable earth fault detection on all
other power supplies at a battery location. Any system that includes one or more EPS MUST
have earth detection from an EPS.

Battery Jumper P16 selects Low Battery operation.

Disconnect • Jumper in Top position (pins 2-3) will cause panel shutdown when batteries are depleted.
Jumper • Jumper in Bottom position (pins 1-2) will allow panel to continue operating.
For S527 compliance, jumper must be installed to top position of P16.

Note: When jumper is set to pins 2-3, EPS will not power-up from battery.

P16
Shut Down
When 3
Depleted 2 Continue
Operation
1 When Depleted

Figure 7-4. Battery Disconnect Jumper Positions

7-4
 Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2

EPS IDNet 2 Configuration

Setting the The DIP Switch SW1 is used to set the IDNet 2 address as identified in the Panel Programmer
Address job (see the section on Programming for more information). From left to right, these switches
are designated as SW1-1 through SW1-8. The function of these switches is as follows:
• SW1-1. This switch sets the baud rate for the internal 4100 Most Significant Bit
Least Significant Bit
communications line running between the card and the
4100 CPU. Set this switch to ON. ON
• SW1-2 through SW1-8. These switches set the card’s address
OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
within the FACP. Refer to Table 7-3 for a complete list of
the switch settings for all of the possible card addresses. (DIP Switch shown is set at address 31)
You must set these switches to the value assigned to the card by
Figure 7-5. DIP Switch SW1
the Panel Programmer.
Table 7-3. 4100-3109 Card Addresses
Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8 Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8
1 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 61 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
2 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON 62 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
3 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 63 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
4 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON 64 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON
5 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 65 OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF
6 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 66 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON
7 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 67 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
8 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON 68 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON
9 ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 69 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF
10 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 70 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
11 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 71 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF
12 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 72 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON
13 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 73 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF
14 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 74 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
15 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 75 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF
16 ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON 76 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
17 ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 77 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF
18 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 78 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON
19 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 79 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
20 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 80 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON
21 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 81 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF
22 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 82 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON
23 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 83 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF
24 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 84 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON
25 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 85 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
26 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 86 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON
27 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 87 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
28 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 88 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON
29 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 89 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF
30 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 90 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
31 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 91 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
32 ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON 92 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON
33 ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 93 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
34 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 94 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
35 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 95 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
36 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 96 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON
37 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 97 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF
38 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 98 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON
39 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 99 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
40 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 100 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON
41 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 101 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF
42 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 102 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON
43 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 103 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF
44 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 104 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON
45 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 105 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF
46 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 106 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
47 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 107 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF
48 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 108 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
49 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 109 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
50 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 110 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
51 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 111 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
52 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 112 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
53 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 113 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
54 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 114 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON
55 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 115 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
56 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 116 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON
57 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 117 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
58 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 118 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON
59 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 119 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
60 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

7-5
 Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2

Connections

Connection to the The EPS is powered by the Power Distribution Module (PDM). The PDM takes power directly
Power from a dedicated AC line and the two backup batteries, and distributes power to each bay in the
Distribution cabinet.
Module
To connect the EPS to the PDM using Harness 734-257:

1. Ensure that the PDM is connected to an incoming 120 VAC power source. Keep the AC
wires to the right side of the cabinet, in the non-power-limited area, and at least one inch
away from all other wires.
2. Connect the harness connector to the PDM.
3. Connect the separate Red and Black wires (with Yellow female terminations) to Plugs P2
(Black) and P3 (Red) on the EPS.
4. Connect the White and Black wires, which terminate together in a White snap-on connector,
to the bulkhead connector at the bottom of the EPS assembly.

FERRITE
BEAD

*220/230/240 V PART NUMBERS 120 VAC

APPEAR IN ITALICS. 50, 60 Hz, 4.6 A
Bottom view GROUND
of the EPS assembly 120 V
NEUTRAL
P1
HARNESS
(734-257) P2 BACK BOX
(734-258)* P3 GROUND
P4 SCREW
Bulkhead connector P5
BATTERY
HARNESS
FUSED AT 20 A
PDM
(566-246)
(or 566-248;
P2 BLACK WIRE see below)*
EPS P3
RED WIRE

Second bulkhead HARNESS 733-015

connector here in 120 V TO TRANSFORMER TO 24 V BATTERY
THROUGH BULKHEAD
220/ 230/240 V CONNECTOR
version 566-248
23 0 V A C
2 2 0 V AC

2 4 0 V AC

PDM TERMINAL
BLOCK
NEUT

50/60 Hz
2.3 A

Figure 7-6. PDM/Battery Connections

7-6
 Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2

Troubleshooting
LED Trouble The code produced by the lit indicator LEDs corresponds to a trouble that is either occurring on
Indicator the System or on the SLC Channels. See Table 7-4 for the LED definitions.
Overview See Table 7-5 and Table 7-6 for the LEDs and their codes.
Table 7-4. The 8 EPS indicator LEDs.
LED: These 5 yellow LEDs are used to signal
LEDs
A, B, C, D, E various trouble conditions on the EPS and
its SLC. See the troubleshooting section for Trouble
LED system codes. Scroll
Button A
B
LED: These LEDs report any troubles on the C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D
CH1, CH2, CH3 corresponding SLC channels. E
CH1
CH2
LED COMM Indicates a 4100 Comms trouble. CH3
COM
Scroll Push The “Trouble Scroll” button to is used to
Button (SW1) scroll through multiple troubles, since only
one trouble can be displayed at a time.
Figure 7-7. LED Location

System Trouble System troubles are indicated by LEDs A to E.

LED Codes Table 7-5. System Trouble LED Codes

A B C D E Description:
No Trouble: There are no troubles detected on the system.

AC Fail: The AC power is disconnected but the battery is working.

Low Battery: The battery charge is under 22 V.

Battery Cutout: The Battery charge is below 20V. At this point if jumper
P16 is set to “battery disconnect when depleted” the system will shut
down.
Depleted/Missing Battery: If jumper P16 is not set to “battery
disconnect when depleted” this trouble will appear when the battery
charge is below 20 V. This code will also appear if the system cannot
detect the battery.
Charger Trouble: There is a trouble with the battery charger.

Card Overcurrent: The EPS module is drawing too much current.

Negative Earth: The circuit is shorted to ground on the negative wire.

Positive Earth: The circuit is shorted to ground on the positive wire.

Negative Earth on RUI+: The RUI circuit is shorted to ground on the

negative wire
Positive Earth on RUI+: The RUI circuit is shorted to ground on the
positive wire.
City Circuit 1 Trouble: The trouble configured on the City Card’s circuit
one has bee triggered.
City Circuit 2 Trouble: The trouble configured on the City Card’s circuit
two has bee triggered.
AuxNAC Open: Depending on the chosen configuration, either is the
Aux circuit or the NAC circuit is open.
AuxNAC Short: Depending on the chosen configuration, either is the
Aux circuit or the NAC circuit is experiencing a short circuit.
AuxNAC Overcurrent: Depending on the chosen configuration, either is
the Aux circuit or the NAC circuit drawing too much current.
Unassigned.

Unassigned.

7-7
 Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2

Troubleshooting (continued)

SLC Channel SLC Channel troubles are indicated by LEDs A to E, as well as LEDs CH1, CH2, and CH3.
Trouble LED The channel LEDs, CH1, CH2, and CH3 indicate the channel which is experiencing the
Codes trouble. For example, if the CH1 LED is lit, the trouble is occurring on SLC channel 1.
The lettered LEDs, A to E, describe the trouble.

Table 7-6. SLC Channel Trouble LED Codes

CH1 CH2 CH3 A B C D E Description:

IDNAC Channel Fail: The channel is not
responding.
IDNAC Short Circuit: There is a short circuit on
the channel.
IDNAC Duplicate Device: There are 2 devices on
the channel that have the same address.
IDNAC Missing device: There is a device
programmed on the channel that it cannot detect.
IDNAC Extra Device: The channel is detecting the
address of a device that has not been programmed.
IDNAC Wrong Device: The channel is detecting a
device that had been programed as the wrong
“type”.
IDNAC Controller Fail: The channel can no longer
detect the controller.
IDNAC Address Out of Range: There is a device
with an unsupported address on the channel.
IDNAC Isolator Trouble: An isolator on the
channel is open.
IDNAC Overcurrent: A device on the Channel is
drawing too much current.
IDNAC Earth Trouble: There is a positive or a
negative earth fault on the channel.
Unassigned

Unassigned

7-8
 Chapter 7 EPS with IDNet 2

Troubleshooting (continued)

Trouble Messages Table 7-7 explains the EPS trouble messages that may appear on the FACP display.

Table 7-7. EPS Trouble Messages

Message Definition

AC Fail AC power is not present or is too low for proper system operation

Low Battery The battery voltage is below the 24 V nominal level by 10% or more.

Depleted/Missing The battery is either below 20 V or completely undetected.

Battery

Card Overcurrent The EPS is drawing more current than it should. Check for faults on the
circuit.

Charger The battery charger is either defective or being heavily loaded by

batteries. Read charger current at front panel, if charger current is
approximately 3 A, batteries are likely loading the charger. Remove
battery connection and measure the output of the EPS. If the output is
27.6 (or close, temperature dependent), there is a possibility of
depleted batteries or a bad set of batteries. Allow batteries to charge or
replace them if they do not take a charge.

Extra Device Appears if one or more extra devices (i.e., devices that have not been
configured for the IDNAC channel) are one the system. Only one
message appears, regardless of the number of extra devices found.

Earth Fault Search Comes up during the Earth Fault Search diagnostic function. Once the
search is initiated, the front panel display indicates how far along the
search process has progressed (10%, 25%…75%), and then shows the
results of the search. The result either identifies the offending circuit or
indicates that the earth fault could not be found. EPS circuits (IDNet,
IDNAC, and aux power) are searched. System alarm and trouble
processing is suspended during the search.

Short Circuit Appears when a short is detected on the IDNAC channel. This status
clears automatically when the short circuit is removed.

Channel Fail Appears when each device on the IDNet channel has been configured,
and when none of the devices are communicating on the channel. This
message does not appear if there are no configured devices on the
IDNAC channel.

7-9
 Chapter 8
EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring
Introduction This chapter describes the EPS wiring. This includes the wiring of the IDNet 2 card.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

EPS Wiring Overview 8-2

EPS Class B IDNAC Wiring 8-3

EPS Wiring Tables 8-5

EPS Wiring to Devices 8-7

EPS Auxiliary Power Wiring 8-9

IDNet 2 Card Wiring 8-10

8-1
 Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

EPS Wiring Overview

General Wiring • Conductors must test free of all grounds.

Guidelines • All wiring must be done using copper conductors only, unless noted otherwise.
• If shielded wire is used:
- the metallic continuity of the shield must be maintained throughout the entire cable
length.
- the entire length of the cable must have a resistance greater than 1 Megohm to 
earthground.
• Underground wiring must be free of all water.
• In areas of high lightning activity, or in areas that have large power surges, the 2081-9027
Transient Suppressor should be used on monitor points.
• Wires must not be run through elevator shafts.
• Splicing is permitted. All spliced connections must either be soldered (resin-core solder),
crimped in metal sleeves, or encapsulated with an epoxy resin. When soldering or crimped
metal sleeves are used, the junction must be insulated with a high-grade electrical tape that is
as sound as the original insulating jacket. Shield continuity must be maintained throughout.
• A system ground must be provided for earth detection and lightning protection devices. This
connection must comply with approved earth detection per NFPA780.
• Only system wiring can be run together in the same conduit.

Power-Limited • Non-power limited field wiring (AC power, batteries, City connection) must be installed and
Guidelines routed in the shaded areas shown in Figure 8-1.
• Power-limited field wiring must be installed and routed in the non-shaded shown in Figure
8-1, with the exception of City wiring.Excess slack should be kept to a minimum inside the
back box enclosure. The wiring should be neatly dressed and bundled together using wire
ties. Anchor power-limited wiring to tie points.
• Tie the wiring located between bays to the internal wiring troughs, if applicable.
• When powering remote units or switching power through relay contacts, power for these
circuits must be provided by a power-limited power supply listed for fire-protective
signaling use.

Conduit Entrance for

Non-Power Limited
Conduit Entrance for Wiring
Power-Limited Wiring

Non-Power Limited
Wiring (Route in
Power-Limited Wiring Shaded Area Only)

Tie Point
(Location
May Vary)

Figure 8-1. Power-Limited Wiring Guidelines

8-2
 Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

EPS Class B IDNAC Wiring

Wiring Overview The EPS has three SLCs for power and communication wiring.
Each SLC powers and communicates with up to 127 IDNAC devices. The EPS is wired to
compatible devices and appliances, such as the TrueAlert ES and TrueAlert Addressable lines
(both multi and fixed candela), using Class B circuitry.
Class B wiring allows “T” tapping. EPS wiring is inherently supervised due to individual
device level communications. End-of-line resistors are not required.

IDNAC Wiring Review the following guidelines for IDNACs before you begin the field wiring.
Guidelines • Only IDNAC and other compatible devices are allowed on the SLCs.
• Maximum of 127 devices or 139 unit loads per channel. The maximum number of visuals
that can be synchronized on one circuit is 127.
• Maximum of six isolators between any appliance and SLC terminals. Maximum 12
isolators per SLC.
• Maximum 30 devices connected directly to any isolator terminal pair.
• The required wire is UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair). This wiring must have a capacitive
rating of less than 60 pF/ft and a minimum 3 twists (turns) per foot.
• All wiring is 18 AWG to 12 AWG.
• All wiring is supervised and power-limited.
• The maximum alarm current is 3 A per circuit.
• Maximum cable load is 10,000 feet (3,048 m) per channel. Maximum wire length from
panel to any device is 2,500 feet (762 m).
• The nominal voltage rating is 29 VDC.
• The total available current from the EPS is 9 A.
• All visible appliances wired from an EPS are synchronized to appliances on SPS, XPS,
TPS, 4009A, 4009T and other EPS within the system. Appliances wired from TrueAlert
Adapter (4905-9816) are not synchronized to other system appliances.

IDNAC Speaker Note: TrueAlert ES speaker appliances supervise connected audio circuits for open-circuit conditions and
Wiring report those troubles to the host FACP through the EPS. They can also detect short circuit conditions,
but the EPS reports such events as an open circuit. The panel reports these conditions as AUDIO
Application
WIRING TROUBLE. The amplifier electronics and power supply of a connected audio NAC must still
Guidelines supervise that circuit for short circuit conditions and earth faults.

Do not mix TrueAlert ES speakers with conventional speakers on an audio NAC.

IDNAC wire length limitations dictate the maximum audio NAC wire run length between a
TrueAlert ES speaker and the connected 4100ES amplifier. The maximum IDNAC wire run
length from the EPS to a device, with a Repeater extension is 8,000 feet. Because the
maximum distance between the amplifier and the EPS is 2500 feet over RUI/RUI+, the total
allowable distance between the amplifier and the TrueAlert ES device speaker is 10,500 feet.
This distance may be further restricted by the Speaker Circuit Wiring Distance Tables of the
connected amplifier.

Continued on next page

8-3
 Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

EPS Class B IDNAC Wiring (continued)

IDNAC Speaker CLASS B Audio Wiring: Connect a maximum of 127 IDNAC speakers to Class B wired audio
Wiring NAC. A Class B wired audio NAC connected to TrueAlert ES speakers can employ T-Tap and
Application Wire Branch wiring topologies.
Guidelines Do not connect an End-Of-Line Resistor to a class B wired audio NAC connected to
TrueAlert ES speakers.
CLASS A Audio Wiring: Connect a maximum of 70 TrueAlert ES speakers to a Class A audio
NAC. Speakers must be wired in a standard Class A loop fashion.

Except as noted above, audio NAC wiring connected to TrueAlert ES speakers must follow the
requirements of the connected 4100ES amplifier.

Ferrite Beads Ferrite beads must be used for Class B wiring.

1. Install the ferrite bead close to the EPS field wiring

terminals for lowest radiated emissions (before the wires
leave the box).
2. Loop the wires through the bead as shown.

Figure 8-2. Ferrite Bead Installation

8-4
 Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

EPS Wiring Tables

Class B Wiring Use the following tables to calculate the load.

Tables
TrueAlert ES Speakers and Speaker/Visible appliances must use Table 8-4 in place of Table
8-2.

Maximum wiring distance is the shorter of the distance limits as calculated by alarm current
voltage drop or by reaching the communications distance limit.

Table 8-1. UTP Wiring Limit Based on Table 8-2. UTP Wiring Limit Based on Communication
Alarm Current
Distance to the Last Appliance Line Distance to the Last Appliance
Alarm
20 18 16 14 12 Impedance Devices 20 18 16 14 12
Current
AWG AWG AWG AWG AWG (Ohms) AWG AWG AWG AWG AWG
0.050 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 14.54 1 1252 ft 2038 ft 3241 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft
0.100 2644 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 12.96 5 1142 ft 1815 ft 2887 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft
0.150 1763 ft 2802 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 11.38 10 1003 ft 1595 ft 2536 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft
0.200 1322 ft 2102 ft 3342 4000 ft 4000 ft 10.14 15 893 ft 1420 ft 2258 ft 3590 ft 4000 ft
0.250 1058 ft 1681 ft 2674 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft 9.12 20 804 ft 1278 ft 2033 ft 3231ft 4000 ft
0.300 881 ft 1401 ft 2228 ft 3542 ft 4000 ft 8.28 25 730 ft 1160 ft 1845 ft 2934 ft 4000 ft
0.350 755 ft 1201 ft 1910 ft 3036 ft 4000 ft 7.58 30 668 ft 1061 ft 1688 ft 2683 ft 4000 ft
0.400 661 ft 1051 ft 1671 ft 2657 ft 4000 ft 6.97 35 614 ft 977 ft 1553 ft 2469 ft 3928 ft
0.450 588 ft 934 ft 1485 ft 2362 ft 3756 6.45 40 568 ft 904 ft 1437 ft 2285 ft 3634 ft
0.500 529 ft 841 ft 1337 ft 2125 ft 3380 6.00 45 528 ft 840 ft 1336 ft 2124 ft 3378 ft
0.750 353 ft 560 ft 891 ft 1417 ft 2254 ft 5.60 50 493 ft 784 ft 1247 ft 1982 ft 3152 ft
1.000 264 ft 420 ft 668 ft 1063 ft 1690 ft 5.24 55 462 ft 734 ft 1168 ft 1856 ft 2952 ft
1.250 212 ft 336 ft 535 ft 850 ft 1352 ft 4.92 60 434 ft 690 ft 1097 ft 1744 ft 2774 ft
1.500 176 ft 280 ft 446 ft 708 ft 1127 ft 4.75 63 419 ft 665 ft 1058 ft 1682 ft 2675 ft
1.750 151 ft 240 ft 382 ft 607 ft 966 ft 4.64 65 409 ft 650 ft 1034 ft 1643 ft 2613 ft
2.000 132 ft 210 ft 334 ft 531 ft 845 ft 4.38 70 386 ft 614 ft 976 ft 1552 ft 2468 ft
2.250 118 ft 187 ft 297 ft 472 ft 751 ft 4.15 75 366 ft 581 ft 924 ft 1469 ft 2337 ft
2.500 106 ft 168 ft 267 ft 425 ft 676 ft 3.94 80 347 ft 551 ft 877 ft 1394 ft 2217 ft
2.750 96 ft 153 ft 243 ft 386 ft 615 ft 3.74 85 330 ft 524 ft 833 ft 1325 ft 2107 ft
3.000 88 ft 140 ft 223 ft 354 ft 563 ft 3.56 90 314 ft 499 ft 794 ft 1262 ft 2006 ft
Wiring distance must not exceed 4000 ft 3.40 95 299 ft 476 ft 757 ft 1203 ft 1913 ft

3.24 100 286 ft 454 ft 723 ft 1149 ft 1827 ft

Table 8-3. Ohms per 1000 ft 3.10 105 273 ft 435 ft 691 ft 1099 ft 1748 ft

Gage Ohms/1000 ft 2.97 110 262 ft 416 ft 662 ft 1052 ft 1673 ft

20 AWG 11.347 2.85 115 251 ft 399 ft 634 ft 1009 ft 1604 ft
18 AWG 7.137 2.73 120 241 ft 383 ft 609 ft 968 ft 1539 ft
16 AWG 4.488 2.58 127 228 ft 362 ft 576 ft 915 ft 1456 ft
14 AWG 2.8230 Wiring distance must not exceed 4000 ft
12 AWG 1.7750

Note: Although the required wire for IDNAC circuits is twisted pair (controlled impedance) wiring, some applications will wish to
take advantage of existing wiring that is not twisted pair. This is only allowed if both conductors of the IDNAC circuit reside
in the same metal conduit, and only under certain conditions. Check with your local sales office before using wiring that is
not twisted pair.

Continued on next page

8-5
 Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

EPS Wiring Tables (Continued)

Table 8-4. UTP Wiring Limit for Speakers and Speaker/Visible devices based on Communication

Distance to the Last Appliance

Devices 20 18 16 14 12
AWG AWG AWG AWG AWG

1 1218 ft 1936 ft 3079 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft

5 1028 ft 1634 ft 2599 ft 4000 ft 4000 ft

10 853 ft 1356 ft 2156 ft 3428 ft 4000 ft

15 715 ft 1137 ft 1807 ft 2873 ft 4000 ft

20 603 ft 959 ft 1525 ft 2424 ft 3855 ft

25 548 ft 871 ft 1385 ft 2201 ft 3500 ft

30 501 ft 797 ft 1266 ft 2013 ft 3201 ft

35 461 ft 733 ft 1165 ft 1853 ft 2946 ft

40 427 ft 678 ft 1078 ft 1714 ft 2726 ft

45 397 ft 631 ft 1002 ft 1593 ft 2534 ft

50 370 ft 588 ft 935 ft 1487 ft 2365 ft

55 347 ft 551 ft 876 ft 1393 ft 2215 ft

60 326 ft 518 ft 823 ft 1308 ft 2081 ft

63 314 ft 500 ft 794 ft 1262 ft 2007 ft

65 307 ft 488 ft 776 ft 1233 ft 1960 ft

70 290 ft 461 ft 733 ft 1165 ft 1852 ft

75 275 ft 436 ft 694 ft 1103 ft 1753 ft

80 261 ft 414 ft 658 ft 1046 ft 1663 ft

85 248 ft 394 ft 626 ft 994 ft 1581 ft

90 236 ft 375 ft 596 ft 947 ft 1505 ft

95 225 ft 357 ft 568 ft 903 ft 1436 ft

100 215 ft 341 ft 543 ft 862 ft 1371 ft

105 206 ft 326 ft 519 ft 825 ft 1311 ft

110 197 ft 313 ft 497 ft 790 ft 1256 ft

115 189 ft 300 ft 476 ft 757 ft 1204 ft

120 181 ft 288 ft 457 ft 726 ft 1155 ft

127 171 ft 272 ft 432 ft 687 ft 1092 ft

Wiring distances must not exceed 4000 ft

8-6
 Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

EPS Wiring to Devices

Class B Wiring to To connect the EPS to appliances using Class B wiring:

IDNAC Devices 1. Route the wire from the “+” and the “-”outputs on the EPS IDNAC terminal blocks (TB1,
TB2 or TB3) to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral notification appliance.
2. Route wire from the first appliance to the next one. “T” tapping is allowed. Repeat for each
appliance.
3. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each IDNAC output you want to use.
Note: Notification appliances are rated per individual nameplate label. Maintain correct polarity on terminal
connections.

IDNAC IDNAC IDNAC

Device Device Device

IDNAC IDNAC IDNAC

Device Device Device

Ferrite
Bead

+ + - - + + - - + + - -

IDNAC1 IDNAC2 IDNAC3

-05
Figure 8-3. Class B Wiring

4009 IDNAC Using a 4009 IDNAC Repeater extends the possible wiring distance and increases the current
Repeater capacity of an IDNAC channel. Each IDNAC repeater has a capacity of 3A, and regenerates
the IDNAC signal. Models 4009-9601 (platinum enclosure) and 4009-9602 (red enclosure) are
compatible with the EPS. Refer to installation instructions 579-1019 for wiring details. All
IDNAC devices wired to the IDNAC repeater are synchronized to IDNAC devices wired to
other EPS within the system.

Dual Class A To wire an IDNAC as a Class A circuit, one or more DCAI modules (4100-6103) is required.
Isolator (DCAI) Each DCAI includes 2 circuits, Class A, with fault isolation. Refer to 579-1029 for wiring
details and installation instructions. Synchronization of audible/visible devices is maintained
with the use of DCAI.

TrueAlert ES Speakers and Speaker/Visible appliances wired in a Class A circuit must use
Table 8-4 here in place of Table 4 in publication 579-1029 (4100 ES/4007 ES Installation
Instructions; 4100-6103 DCAI Card). The wiring limit distances shown in this table apply to
maximum wiring loop length. The final maximum loop length is the shorter of this value or the
value from Table 8-1.

8-7
 Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

EPS Wiring to Devices (continued)

Calculating Class When using Isolators, the maximum wire distance of each of these SLC branches from panel to
B wiring with any device is the smaller of the values obtained from Table 8-2, and the Equation 1. See Table
Isolators 8-3 for the ohms per 1000 ft.

Equation 1: Maximum SLC Wire Branch Length Based on Appliance Alarm Current Load
Distance (feet) = 6V - (.1 ohm * number of isolators on branch * branch alarm amps)

2 * (resistance per foot) * (branch alarm amps)

• Add the alarm loads of all the devices on an SLC wire branch and apply to Equation 1.
• Add the unit loads for all devices on an SLC wire branch and the number of isolators and
apply to Table 8-2.
Maximum wire resistance protected by 1 isolator is 1.5 ohm (total, both wires).

Wire the devices as instructed in the “Class B Wiring to IDNAC Devices” section.
.
TO OTHER TO OTHER
DEVICES DEVICES

PORT PORT
4905-9929 2 4905-9929 2
ISOLATOR ISOLATOR
PORT PORT
1 1

APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE

TO OTHER
DEVICES

PORT PORT
4905-9929 2 1 4905-9929
ISOLATOR ISOLATOR
PORT PORT
1 2

TO OTHER
DEVICES
Ferrite
Bead

+ + - - + + - - + + - -

IDNAC1 IDNAC2 IDNAC3

Figure 8-4. Class B Wiring With Isolators

8-8
 Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

EPS Auxiliary Power Wiring

AUX/ NAC The AUX/NAC terminal block is located on the top right corner of the EPS.
Terminal
Through the ES Panel Programmer, this point can be configured as either a 24V Auxiliary
(AUX) power or as a simple reverse polarity Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC).
IDNAC1 +IDNAC2
+ - - +IDNAC3
+ - - +AUX-
+ + - -
Auxiliary Power
Terminal Block
IDNAC1 IDNAC2 IDNAC3 AUX

Figure 8-5. AUX/NAC Terminal

Table 8-5. AUX/NAC Wiring Specification

Voltage 24V Special Application

TYPICAL APPLIANCES
rating:
Rating: 2 A, maximum 733-894 NAC -
10K EOLR
Wiring 18 AWG (min.)
gage: to 12 AWG (max.)
NAC+

B+
B-
Wiring Notes:
1. All wiring from the AUX/NAC is IDNAC1 +IDNAC2
+ - - +IDNAC3
+ - - +AUX-
+ + - -
power limited.

2. Conductors must test free of all

grounds and stray voltages before
connection to appliances and panel.

Figure 8-6. Simple NAC Wiring

3. Terminate Class B NACs as shown using 733- 894. For Canadian applications, mount end-of-line resistor to
TEPG-US Model 431537 EOL plate in accordance with ULC-S527.
4. If circuit is terminated with a 10k EOLR, at the terminals, remove this resistor before wiring.
5. If wiring is routed outside the building, use of a listed secondary protector is required. Use Simplex 2081-
9028 or 2081-9044. A protector must be installed at each building exit/entrance. Each 2081-9028 adds
0.2 ohms wiring resistance. 2081-9044 adds 6 ohms wiring resistance, and will greatly reduce wiring
distance.

Table 8-6. NAC Wiring Limits

Alarm Current 20 AWG 18 AWG 16AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG Line Resistance (Ohms)
0.25 617 ft 981 ft 1560 ft 2480 ft 3944 ft 14.00
0.50 308 ft 490 ft 780 ft 1240 ft 1972 ft 7.00
0.75 206 ft 327 ft 520 ft 827 ft 1315 ft 4.67
1.00 154 ft 245 ft 390 ft 620 ft 986 ft 3.50
1.25 123 ft 196 ft 312 ft 496 ft 789 ft 2.80
1.50 103 ft 163 ft 260 ft 413 ft 657 ft 2.33
1.75 88 ft 140 ft 223 ft 354 ft 563 ft 2.00
2.00 77 ft 123 ft 195 ft 310 ft 493 ft 1.75
Note: This Chart indicates the maximum distance for 1/4 -2A loads. Wiring distance is from the panel termi-
nals to the last appliance. Use of a 2081-9044 protector reduces wiring distance.

Note: Output of AUX or NAC is 24V nominal. Minimum voltage is 19.5 @ full load and minimum battery;
maximum is 31.5V at light load, high AC line. Aux Loads include 4601-9101 Annunciator, 4100-96xx
series Annunciators, 4090 series of IDNet ZAMs and IAMs and any Listed device operating within the
output limits of the AUX. Calculate wiring loss for actual devices used. Compatible Appliances include
4904 series of free-run strobes, 4901 series non-smartsync horns, 4098 series TrueAlarm Sounder
Base, 4090-9005 and -9006 SRP and 4009 NAC extenders, used in reverse-polarity activation mode.

8-9
 Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

IDNet 2 Card Wiring

Wiring Overview Each output from the IDNet 2 card can be wired as either an isolated Class A circuit or as two
isolated Class B circuits.
Class A wiring provides an alternate communication path that allows communication to all
devices to be maintained when a single open circuit fault occurs. Class A wiring requires two
wires to be routed from the IDNet 2 Primary Terminals (B+, B-) to each device, and then back
to the IDNet 2 Secondary Terminals (A+, A-). Wiring is in/out, “T” tapping is not allowed.

Class B wiring allows “T” tapping. IDNet 2 wiring is inherently supervised due to individual
device level communications. End-of-line resistors are not required.

Wiring Table 8-7 identifies the IDNet 2 card wiring parameters that must be considered when 
Parameters installing this card. For additional wiring information see the applicable installation
documentation, or contact your authorized Simplex Product Supplier.
Table 8-7. IDNet 2 Card Wiring Parameters
Wiring Capacitance Parameters
Parameter Value
Maximum Supported Channel Capacitance; The sum of line-to-line capacitance, plus the capacitance of either
Total of both loops line-to-shield (if shield is present) = 0.6 µF (600 nF)

Capacitance between IDNet SLCs wiring

(between wires of the same polarity; plus to
plus, minus to minus)
Wiring Distance Limits (see note below)
Channel Loading
1 µF maximum (this is for multiple IDNet loops)
Class B Wiring, Total Channel Wir- Class A Wiring, Total Channel Wiring
ing Parameters, Including T-Taps Parameters

Up to 125 126 to 250 Up to 125 126 to 250

devices devices devices devices

Total Loop Resistance 50 Ω maximum 35 Ω maximum 50 Ω maximum 35 Ω maximum

12 500 ft (3810m) 4000 ft (1219 m) 2500ft (762 m) per
18 AWG (0.82 mm2) per loop, 12 500ft loop, 10 000ft
(3810m) total (3048m) total
16 AWG (1.31 mm2)
5000 ft (1524 m) 2500ft (762 m) per
14 AWG (2.08 mm2) 12 500 ft (3810m) per loop, 12 500ft loop, 10 000ft
(3810m) total (3048m) total
12 AWG (3.31 mm2)
Notes: Maximum wiring distance is determined by either reaching the maximum resistance, the maximum capacitance, or the stated
maximum distance, whichever occurs first. Class A maximum distances are to the farthest device on the loop from either “B” or
“A” terminals. For Class B wiring, the maximum distance to the farthest device is limited to the stated Class A wiring distances.
Shielded wire is not required. Twisted wire is recommended for improved noise immunity.
Wiring Considerations Note: External wiring must be shielded (for lightning suppression) and 2081-9044 Overvoltage
using 2081-9044 Protectors must be installed at building exit and entrance locations.
Overvoltage Protectors
 Capacitance: Each protector adds 0.006 μF across the connected line.
(2081-9044 is UL listed to Resistance: Each protector adds 3 Ω per line of series resistance; both IDNet lines are
Standard 1459, Standard protected; 6 Ω per protector will be added to total loop resistance.
for Telephone Equipment)
Maximum distance of a single protected wiring run is 3270 ft (1 km).

Refer to document number 574-832: 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector Installation

Instructions for additional information.

8-10
 Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

IDNet 2 Card Wiring (continued)

Class A Wiring To wire the Loop terminals as a Class A circuit:

1. Set the jumper assigned to the loop to the “A” position, as shown in
Figure 8-7.
• Loop A= Jumper P1 on the IDNet 2 card " "
• Loop B= Jumper P2 on the IDNet 2 card
! !
• Loop C= Jumper P1 on the first IDNet Loop cards
• Loop D= Jumper P1 on the second IDNet Loop card
2. Shielded wire is not recommended. If shielded wires are present, cut and Figure 8-7. Class A
tape off the shield to prevent it from coming in contact with other com- Jumper Setting
ponents.

3. Route the wiring from the Primary Terminals (B+, B-) to the corresponding inputs on the first
device.
4. Route wiring from the first device to the next as in/out. See Figure 8-8. Repeat for each
device.
5. Route the wiring from the last device to the panel.
6. Connect the wiring to the corresponding Secondary Terminals (A+, A-).

Devices
1 2 1 2 1 2
+

18 to 12 AWG

IDNet 2 Card

Figure 8-8. IDNet 2 Class A Wiring

Class A wiring notes:
1. If no remote isolators or isolator bases are on the loops, device addressing can be assigned
without concern for sequence.
2. If remote isolators or isolator bases are on the loops, the required addressing approach is to
start from the “B” side and assign each successive isolator a higher address than the isolator it 
proceeds.

8-11
 Chapter 8 EPS and IDNet 2 Wiring

IDNet 2 Card Wiring (continued)

Class B Wiring When wiring the loop for Class B circuits, both the B+, B- and A+, A- terminals are available
for parallel connections. Within the IDNet 2 circuitry, A+ is connected to B+, and A- is
connected to B- so circuits can stem from either one. Additionally, two wires can be connected
to each screw terminal.

To wire the Loop terminals as a Class B circuit:

1. Set the jumper assigned to the loop to the “B” position, as shown in
Figure 8-9.
• Loop 1 = Jumper P1 on the IDNet 2 card " "
• Loop 2 = Jumper P2 on the IDNet 2 card
! !
• Loop 3 = Jumper P1 on the left IDNet Loop card
• Loop 4 = Jumper P1 on the right IDNet Loop card
2. Route wiring from the Primary Terminals (B+, B-) to the corresponding Figure 8-9. Class B
inputs on the first device. Jumper Setting

It is possible to add up to 4 circuits per IDNet loop on the terminal block

when using Class B wiring. See Figure 8-10 for the diagram.
3. Route wiring from the first device to the next as in/out as shown in
Figure 8-10. Repeat for each device.

Devices

1 Different Circuit Configurations

1
2 3

2
IDNet CIRCUIT A 4
B+, B- B+ B- A+ A-
Terminals

TB1
B+ B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A-
2 Circuit Configuration 4 Circuit Configuration

Note: For Class B wiring only, up to 4 parallel wiring “T”

taps may be made at the output terminal blocks

Figure 8-10. IDNet 2 Class B Wiring

Class B wiring Notes:

1. If no remote isolators or isolator bases are on the loops, device addressing can be assigned
without concern for sequence.
2. If remote isolators or isolator bases are on the loops, the required addressing approach is to start at
the output and assign each successive isolator a higher address than the isolator it proceeds. For
Class B wiring only, the “A” output and “B” output per loop are connected together in parallel for 
wiring convenience.

8-12
 Chapter 9
PC Software Connections
Introduction The service port on the CPU daughter card allows the 4100ES panel to connect to a PC’s
running important utilities, such as diagnostics, programming, CPU firmware downloading,
and channel monitoring.

The panel can also connect to a remote PC through the 4100-9832 Service Modem or through
the Ethernet.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

Software Modes 9-2

Ethernet Service Port and Serial Service Port 9-4

9-1
 Chapter 9 PC Software Connections

Software Modes

Software Modes There are three basic software modes that the service port or service modem can be used to
connect to:
• Service and Diagnostics Mode
• Data Transfer Interface Mode
• Master Bootloader Interface Mode
Each mode is described below.

Service and Diagnostics Mode:

This is the default functionality when a PC is connected to the FACP. On a PC, this mode
provides application startup messages, an ASCII interface to a UI command set for diagnostics,
and event reporting. A pre-configured terminal emulator is part of the 4100ES software and
can be launched from the programmer. The connection to a PC is made either through the serial
port, through the service modem, or through the Ethernet port.

Option 1 Option 2

serial download
cable

Modem
Laptop/PC running 4100 Panel (with CPU modem card) Laptop/PC running
terminal emulation software running application terminal emulation software

Figure 9-1. Service and Diagnostic Interface

Data Transfer Interface Mode:

In this mode, the ES Panel Programmer is enabled. This allows for slave downloading, as well
as downloading a configuration and audio messages to the FACP, and uploading a configura-
tion or history log from the FACP. Connection to a PC is made through the serial port, through
the service modem or through the Ethernet port.

Option 1 Option 2

serial download
cable

Modem
Laptop/PC running 4100 Panel (with CPU modem card) Laptop/PC running
Programmer software running application Programmer software

Figure 9-2. Data Transfer Interface

Continued on next page

9-2
 Chapter 9 PC Software Connections

Software Modes (continued)

Software Modes Master Bootloader Interface Mode:

This interface should be used when the Master executable is not functioning. It downloads the
Master CPU Exec firmware and the CFG.TXT file to the CPU using the serial port.

serial download
cable

Laptop/PCrunning
Laptop/PC running 4100 Panel
terminal emulation
programming software
file transfer running Bootloader

Figure 9-3. Bootloader Interface

9-3
 Chapter 9 PC Software Connections

Ethernet Service Port and Serial Service Port

Ethernet Service The Ethernet service port J1 on the CPU card (0566-719) is used to connect the panel to a local
Port Overview PC. See Figure 9-4 for the port location.
(0566-719 only)
SERVICE PORT (P5) DISPLAY PORT (P6)
(for a serial connection)

SERIAL NUMBER
CHIP
ETHERNET PORT
(J1) RJ45 TYPE
CONNECTOR TO CPU
MOTHERBOARD (P9)
Figure 9-4. CPU card ports

The Ethernet service port connects to the front panel Ethernet connection through a standard
straight (non-crossover) Ethernet Patch Cable. The service technician should connect his PC to
the CPU card through this front panel connection with a standard straight Ethernet cable (see
Figure 9-5). If this connection is not available, you may plug directly into the CPU Card 
connector J1 to the PC with a standard straight Ethernet cable.

Front Panel
Ethernet Service Port

Emergency Op

Figure 9-5. Front Panel Ethernet Service Port

Serial Service The Serial Service Port P5 on the CPU card (0566, 149, 0566-692 and 0566-719) can also be
Port Overview used to connect the Panel to a local PC. See Figure 9-4 for the port location.

To use this port, the technician must connect the serial service port cable on the PC directly to
the serial Service Port (P5) on the card.

9-4
 Chapter 10
MNS/ECS Application
Introduction This chapter covers the configuration of a 4100ES system to operate as a mass notification
system (MNS).

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

Application of 4100ES as a UL2572 Mass Notification System 10-2

Programming and Configuration 10-5

10-1
 Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application

Application of 4100ES as a UL2572 Mass Notification System

General A 4100ES system with Basic Voice option 4100-9620 (analog) or 4100-9621 (digital) can be
Information configured for operation as a Mass Notification System (MNS). Configuration of the system is
to be done per UL2572, taking into account any special requirements resulting from a Risk
Analysis.

Hierarchy of The 4100ES main user interface serves as the primary local control unit for the in-building
Operator MNS, called the Autonomous Control Unit. It is an “authorized personnel” operator interface,
Interfaces that can take control of the paging and messaging features of the 4100ES system.

The ACU serves as the primary control station in the MNS, and as such has the highest priority
among all operator interfaces attached to the 4100ES system, including network interfaces
such as a TrueSite Workstation. The hierarchy of operation is specified by UL2572 as:
• Autonomous Control Unit (ACU)
• Local Control Unit (LOC)
• Central Command Station (CCS)

A Local Control Unit (LOC) is an in-building operator interface for authorized personnel to
initiate messages and signaling in an emergency situation. An example of an LOC is a 4100
Remote Annunciator, configured with remote microphone and LED/Switch modules for
activation of the paging and emergency message features of the 4100ES.

A Central Command Station (CCS) is a networked user interface, such as TrueSite

Workstation. These units can activate signaling over a local in-building or campus network. A
CCS is provided with a microphone, which may be a remote microphone, such as 4003-9803
wired from a 4100ES fire alarm node in the system. Another possibility would be a 4100-1244
remote microphone in a transponder bay installed into a console at the CCS location.
Alternately, a 4100ES may be rack-mounted as part of the command console, and the master
microphone would be available for this function.

The hierarchy of the operator interfaces is programmed using Custom Control. For example,
the ACU could have a switch programmed to be a priority 3, an LOC switch could be
programmed as priority 4 and a CCS could have a switch programmed as priority 5. Refer to
the ES Panel Programmer’s Manual (574-849) for detailed information about programming
switch priority and writing custom control.

If transfer of control is required, LED/Switch points must be programmed to activate and to

indicate the transfer of control to each desired location. These switches would be programmed
at different priorities and the LEDs would indicate the status of control.

Refer to document 900-249, 4100 Upgrade Audio Enhancement Guide for details on how to
configure an audio system with multiple command centers.

When any unit is in control, an LED must indicate the active control at each location. If a
higher priority service takes control from a lesser priority service, that should be indicated by
extinguishing the LED or indicator for the lesser priority service and lighting the LED or
indicator for the greater priority service.

For example, if the LOC takes control, the CCS must be locked out from taking control and an
indicator at the CCS must show that the LOC is in control. If the ACU then takes control from
the LOC, the indication must change at both the LOC and CCS that the ACU now has control.
In this case, both the LOC and CCS must be locked from taking control.

10-2
 Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application

Application of 4100ES as a UL2572 Mass Notification System, Continued

Priority of Signals A Mass Notification System is often a combination of fire alarm and other signals. As such, it
may receive signals that affect life safety that are other than fire alarm signals. Any signal that
indicates a danger to Life Safety, including fire alarm, is the highest priority. The highest
priority could also include intruder alert, tornado warning, or other signals as determined by the
Risk Analysis.

If multiple signals are received simultaneously, the priority of signals is:

1. Signals associated with life safety
2. Signals associated with property safety
3. Supervisory signals and trouble signals associated with life and/or property safety
4. All other signals

In the 4100ES system, signal priority can be selected by assignment of point type and further
by custom control. Refer to the ES Panel Programmer’s Manual (574-849) for detailed
information about programming input point priority and writing custom control.

Overriding Fire An MNS/ECS system must have the capability to override any other notification signals. When
Alarm Signals the 4100ES is used as a combination fire alarm/MNS, the system programming determines
which signal has priority. Just as an Evacuation Message has higher priority than an Alert
Message, system programming gives priority to MNS functions over other alarm functions.

In the event that a fire alarm signal is overridden by the MNS signal, and the MNS signal is
then “silenced”, the building occupants need to be assured that the evacuation system is still
functioning.

During the period the mass notification system has seized control of audible and/or visible
notification appliances of a fire alarm, but before the mass notification relinquishes control, an
audible and visible signal shall be actuated by the notification appliances at least once every
thirty seconds, unless there is an active signal present, to be recognized by the usual building
occupants.

With a 4100ES system, use Custom Control equations. A single flash and a short beep of
audible and visible appliances meets this requirement. Alternately, an appropriate prerecorded
message may be played. For example, a message instructing occupants to “shelter in place”
may be played after a live microphone message. Risk Analysis by the AHJ should guide the
appropriate pre-recorded messages. Switches for activation of special messages should be
marked so as to be identifiable during an emergency by trained personnel.

Custom Control equations for the “chirp/flash” of audible and visible appliances are suggested
below.

10-3
 Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application

Application of 4100ES as a UL2572 Mass Notification System, Continued

Timing Equations [INPUTS]

STATUS ON
P711 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | MAS PAGING - MASS PAGING HAS PRIORITY
CYCLE CONSTANT 3 25
A272 | Analog Timer | ANALOG | TIMER | CUSTOM CONTROL - TIMER
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P714 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | TIMER FOR PAGING STROBE
[END OUTPUTS]

Appliance Control [INPUTS]

Equations STATUS ON
P714 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | TIMER FOR PAGING STROBE
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
SIG903 | SIGB | RVISUAL | TRUEALERT ZONE 4 - ALL VISUAL DEVICES
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
SIG901 | SIGB | SSIGNAL | TRUEALERT ZONE 2 - ALL AUDIBLE DEVICES
UPLAYQ CHL4=4 VOLUME=NOEFFECT NORESET NOFLUSH SPK=L260 TRK=NONE
PRI=9,9
PRINT PANEL "MASS NOTIFICATION ACTIVE"
USILENCE CHL4 PRI=9,9
[END OUTPUTS]

Public Accessible Some applications call for panic switches that are accessible to the public. Panic switches are
Panic Switches input devices used to signal a non-fire emergency, and could be used to trigger events and/or
announcements in the building. If these switches are installed in public areas of a building they
would typically not automatically trigger a Mass Notification event. Instead, they would trigger
the Command Center to investigate the signal and make the appropriate announcement.

A variety of devices can be connected to a Simplex 4100ES via an individual addressable

module (IAM). The IAM should be programmed as a priority 2 device, or other non-fire alarm
point. The IAM may be used to monitor any contact type initiating device. Use a contact-type
initiating device listed to ANSI/UL 2017.

The Command Center may also use security cameras and/or intercom capabilities to allow
them to make a more rapid response and a Mass Notification announcement if necessary.

10-4
 Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application

Programming and Configuration

Programming the The programming for an MNS is not special; it can be accomplished using priority, modes, and
4100ES to Meet Custom Control. Any technician who has attended training and become a certified 4100ES Fire
MNS Alarm Technician should be capable of programming the 4100ES for MNS combined with Fire
Requirements Alarm service.

Program a key for the reset of MNS panic switch alarms. The key mode should be type “PBT”,
with the reference address of P216. The adjacent LED should be programmed to track the
status of the reset window timer, illuminating for the duration of the reset cycle. The reset
window timer is A214.

MNS requires that dedicated LEDs be programmed for any MNS-specific service. It is
appropriate to use Priority 2 for MNS alarms. Pri 2 could also be used to indicate another
alarm, such as CO. In a case of multiple Pri 2 alarms, LEDs must be added for each type of
service. Program these LEDs to track the state of the points involved in that service.

Figure 10-1. Supervisory and Trouble LEDs for both MNS and Fire

MNS can also have Supervisory inputs, which should still be programmed as Supervisory in
order to activate the sounder and the Supervisory indicator. A dedicated LED for each type of
service must also be programmed. For example, a fire supervisory would light a dedicated fire
supervisory LED, as well as the general supervisory LED. An MNS supervisory would light a
dedicated MNS supervisory LED as well as the general supervisory LED. This is to comply
with a UL2572 requirement for an indication of each type of service without activating any
controls.

The same requirement holds when there are MNS specific points. They should light the general
trouble LED and sound the piezo. They should also be programmed such that an LED tracks
the trouble status of MNS points and a separate LED tracks the trouble status of fire alarm
points.

Minimum The minimum configuration for LOC and ACU is listed below.
Configuration for
LOC and ACU Table 10-1. Minimum Configuration for LOC and ACU

Controls • MNS Reset

• MNS Alarm activation
• MNS Take Command/Relinquish Command
• CO Reset
Indicators • MNS Supervisory LED
• MNS Trouble LED
• CO Alarm LED
• ACU in Control LED
• CCS in Control LED
• LOC in Control LED

10-5
 Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application

Programming and Configuration, Continued

Access and Communications Security: Level 1

Security Stored Data Security: Level 0
Information for Physical Security: Level 1
the 4100ES Access Control: Level 1
System
Voice Control The primary solution for controlling and activating voice messages on a Simplex fire alarm
Centers network is utilizing the standard 4100ES LED and Switch user interface along with a
microphone for live voice announcements.

In the example below the operator first selects the destination for a message on the left and then
selects the audio source or pre-recorded message to play on the right.

Figure 10-2. Voice Message Configuration Example

In a system with multiple voice command centers a take control button with an in-control
indicator would also be appropriate to configure on your annunciator with microphone.

The 4100ES and 4120 network support a variety of programmable options for utilizing
prioritization and request/cancel procedures for taking control of the system. This feature
prevents operators from interfering with each other in a system with multiple command
centers.

In some cases different colored peripherals or boxes are specified for Mass Notification.
Contact sales engineering for information on meeting these requirements.

Configuration A 4100ES is not UL Listed for Background Music/General Paging or Security when
Limitations configured for MNS, because the UL testing did not include these services in the test scope.

Note: The TrueSite Workstation is not listed for UL 2017 operation. The TSW functionality must be limited to
remote annunciator active when used for MNS operations.

10-6
 Chapter 10 MNS/ECS Application

Programming and Configuration, Continued

Amber Strobes The 4100ES is compatible with the amber strobes listed below:
• 4906-9205, -9206, -9207 (addressable, visible only, “ALERT” lettering)
• 4906-9107, -9108 (non-addressable, visible only, “ALERT” lettering)
• 4906-9208, -9211 (visible only, with both an amber and a clear lens strobe, respectively
marked “ALERT” and “FIRE”)

Other models of Simplex brand strobes are available with “ALERT” instead of “FIRE”. Refer
to the installation instructions for each power supply for complete lists of compatible
appliances.

MNS Wiring The 4100ES field wiring is “power-limited”, with the exception of AC input, battery and the
City Circuit option module wiring. For MNS, the term “power limited” has been replaced by
the NEC term “class 2”. Wherever this document uses the UL864 term “power limited”, it can
be taken to mean class 2. Any wiring deemed “power limited” for UL864 is deemed “class 2”
for MNS.

10-7
 Appendix A
The Device Configuration DIP Switch
Overview Addressable cards include a bank of eight DIP switches. From left to right (see Figure A-1)
these switches are designated as SWx-1 through SWx-8. The function of these switches is as
follows:
• SWx-1. This switch sets the baud rate for the internal 4100 communications line running
between the card and the CPU. Set this switch to ON.
• SWx-2 through SWx-8. These switches set the card’s address within the 4100 FACP.
Refer to Table A-1 for a complete list of the switch settings for all of the possible card
addresses.
Note: You must set these switches to the value assigned to the card by the ES Panel Programmer.

DIP Switches SWx-2 through

4100 Comm. Baud Rate. SWx-8 set the Card Address.
Switch (SWx-1) Figure shows an Address of 3.
Must Be Set to ON

ON

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure A-1. DIP Switch SWx

A-1
 Appendix A

The Service Port

Overview
Table A-1. Card Addresses

Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8 Address SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4 SW 1-5 SW 1-6 SW 1-7 SW 1-8
1 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 61 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
2 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON 62 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
3 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 63 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
4 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON 64 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON
5 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 65 OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF
6 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 66 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON
7 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 67 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
8 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON 68 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON
9 ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 69 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF
10 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 70 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
11 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 71 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF
12 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 72 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON
13 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 73 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF
14 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 74 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
15 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 75 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF
16 ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON 76 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
17 ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 77 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF
18 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 78 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON
19 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 79 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
20 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 80 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON
21 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 81 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF
22 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 82 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON
23 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 83 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF
24 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 84 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON
25 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 85 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
26 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 86 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON
27 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 87 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
28 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 88 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON
29 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 89 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF
30 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 90 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
31 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 91 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
32 ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON 92 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON
33 ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 93 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
34 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 94 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
35 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 95 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
36 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 96 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON
37 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 97 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF
38 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 98 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON
39 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 99 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
40 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 100 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON
41 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 101 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF
42 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 102 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON
43 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 103 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF
44 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 104 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON
45 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 105 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF
46 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 106 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
47 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 107 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF
48 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 108 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
49 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 109 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
50 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 110 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
51 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 111 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
52 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 112 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
53 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 113 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
54 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 114 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON
55 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 115 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
56 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 116 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON
57 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 117 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
58 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 118 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON
59 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 119 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
60 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

A-2
 Appendix B
Installing 4100 FACP Components (Non-4100ES/4100U)
Introduction 4100 back boxes are available in one, two, and three-bay sizes. Each can be equipped with a
solid or glass door. This chapter describes how to mount all types of non-4100ES/4100U back
boxes to a wall, and how to mount system electronics bays into the boxes.

This chapter describes every installation procedure that applies directly to the FACP as well as
each step of the host panel installation.

Before beginning the installation, review the next few pages to get a sense of the types of bays
and modules that make up the FACP.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

Introduction to FACPs B-2

Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes B-8

Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes B-10

Step 3. Configuring Modules B-14

Step 4. Interconnecting Master Controller Bay Cards B-17

Step 5. Installing Motherboards into Expansion Bays B-18

B-1
 Appendix B

Introduction to FACPs

Overview 4100 FACPs are back boxes that contain the master controller, operator interface, universal
power supply (UPS), backup batteries, and any additional modules that the panel requires. The
FACP is the central hub (often referred to as a host panel) of a standalone or MINIPLEX fire
alarm system. In a networked system, the FACP can be connected to other system FACPs, so
that each host panel is a node on the network.

Master Controller Every FACP contains a master controller bay. The master controller bay consists of the master
Bay controller motherboard, the universal power supply (UPS), the operator interface, and four
open motherboard slots.

In a standalone or MINIPLEX system, the master controller motherboard is supplied with a

master controller daughter card attached to it. In a networked system, a network interface card
is attached as a second daughter card to the master controller motherboard.

Figure B-1 is an illustration the master controller bay.

MASTER CONTROLLER NETWORK / RS-232 DAUGHTER CARD

DAUGHTER CARD WITH MEDIA CARD

UNIVERSAL POWER
OPTIONAL MOTHERBOARDS SUPPLY (UPS)

MASTER CONTROLLER
MOTHERBOARD

Figure B-1. Master Controller Bay (4100)

B-2
 Appendix B

Introduction to FACPs (continued)

Master The 4100 master motherboard and controller is the central memory and control point for the
Motherboards 4100 system. It mounts in the leftmost side of the master controller bay.
and Controllers
The figures below are illustrations of the three types of master controller motherboards. They
are commonly referred to as Universal Transponder (UT) motherboards, because they can be
used across different types of older Simplex fire alarm systems.

Note: See “Step 3. Configuring Modules,” later in this chapter, for information on configuring switches and
jumpers.

FIELD WIRING UT MASTER POWER/COMM BUS

TERMINAL BLOCK (TB1) CONTROLLER CONNECTOR (J1) 2120 COMM/RS-232
CONNECTOR (J3) CARD CONNECTOR (J2)
1

RESRV

J1
24C
PIEZO
GND
TB1

CTS

PORT1
COMM

RCV
RTS

P1
P2

P3
XMIT

1
INTERNAL COMMS SYSTEM POWER FIELD WIRING
POWER/COMM BUS TERMINAL
CONNECTOR (P2) CONNECTOR (P1) CONNECTOR (P3)
BLOCK (TB2)
Figure B-2. UT Motherboard (565-161)
FIELD WIRING UT MASTER POWER/COMM BUS CITY CONNECT
2120 COMM/RS-232 CARD
TERMINAL BLOCK (TB1) CONTROLLER CONNECTOR (J3) JUMPERS (P4)
CONNECTOR (J1)
CONNECTOR (J2)
CITY CONNECT JUMPERS GND3 FRONT
1

BACK
J1 P4 RESRV
NC T
C B 24C
TB1 NO L PIEZO
GND
P7 NC C CTS
COMM

P5 P6 P8 + I RCV
JW1 JW2
JW1 T
P2 P3 NO Y RTS
P1 - XMIT
GND4

INTERNAL COMMS SYSTEM POWER FIELD WIRING

POWER/COMM BUS
CONNECTOR (P2) CONNECTOR (P3) TERMINAL
CONNECTOR (P1)
BLOCK (TB2)
Figure B-3. UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-213)

FIELD WIRING
TERMINAL UT MASTER POWER/COMM BUS CITY CONNECT 2120 COMM/RS-232 CARD
BLOCK (TB1) CONTROLLER CONNECTOR (J3) JUMPERS (P4)
CONNECTOR (J1)
CONNECTOR (J2) (Non-4100U)

RS-232 / NETWORK RS-232 / NETWORK

JUMPERS (P5, P6, JW1) POWER/COMM BUS
JUMPERS (P7, P8, JW2)
CONNECTOR (P1)
INTERNAL COMMS FIELD WIRING
SYSTEM POWER
CONNECTOR (P2) TERMINAL
CONNECTOR (P3)
BLOCK (TB2)
Figure B-4. UT Motherboard with City Connection (565-274)

Continued on next page

B-3
 Appendix B

Introduction to FACPs (continued)

Master The figures below are illustrations of the two UT master controllers.
Motherboards
and Controllers Note: See “Step 3. Configuring Modules,” later in this chapter, for information on configuring switches and
jumpers.

PROGRAMMER PORT (P1) SYSTEM TROUBLE MASTER DISPLAY

LED (LED1) PORT (P6)

LED1

1
2
P6

P1 P7
MODEM JUMPER (P2) MASTER DISPLAY SW1
MODEM
JUMPER (P7)
P2
RESET BUTTON
BATTERY BACKUP FLASH EPROM (SW1)
JUMPER (P3) JUMPER (P5)
UT MASTER
CONTROLLER
565-333 H
P3
P5

Not used (P8)

EDGE CONNECTOR TO
565-161 MOTHERBOARD (P4)

P4

Figure B-5. UT Master Controller (565-333)

PROGRAMMER PORT (P1) SYSTEM TROUBLE MASTER DISPLAY

LED (LED1) PORT (P4)

LED1
1
2

P6

P1 P7
SW1
MODEM

P2
RESET BUTTON
BATTERY BACKUP FLASH EPROM (SW1)
JUMPER (P2) JUMPER (P3)
UT MASTER
CONTROLLER
565-333 H
P3
P5

EDGE CONNECTOR TO
565-161 MOTHERBOARD (P5, P6))

P4

Figure B-6. UT Master Controller (565-148)

B-4
 Appendix B

Introduction to FACPs (continued)

Universal Power The power supply controller card contains the switches and jumpers for configuring the power
Supply (UPS) supply, as shown in Figure B-7.

Note: See “Step 3. Configuring Modules,” later in this chapter, for information on configuring switches and
jumpers.

“B” TAP OUTPUT (P15)

OUTPUT EARTH DETECT

CONNECTIONS JUMPER (P16)
(TB2)

POWER “C” TAP

HARNESS OUTPUT (P17)

“A” TAP OUTPUT

(P14) CURRENT-LIMIT
RESISTOR 2 FOR
“C” TAP CHARGER
OUTPUT (P11)
SWITCHER
PORT (P9)
CURRENT-LIMIT
RESISTOR 2 FOR
“B” TAP CHARGER
OUTPUT (P12)

AUDIO
CONTROLLER
INTERFACE (P8)

BATTERY/NO
BATTERY
JUMPER (P6)
ADDRESS
CONFIGURATION
DIP SWITCH (SW2)

UPS
CONFIGURATION
DIP SWITCH (SW1)

“A” TAP
RETURN (P1)
PMSI PORT (P5)

“B” TAP “C” TAP COMM PORT

RETURN (P2) RETURN (P3) (P4)

Figure B-7. Universal Power Supply

B-5
 Appendix B

Introduction to FACPs (continued)

Operator Interface Shown below is the operator interface which is available for the 4100. The Operator Interface
is used to obtain alarm, supervisory, trouble and other status via the Liquid Crystal Display and
LEDs. Control functions are accessed using dedicated keys.

SYSTEM IS NORMAL
12:35:15 am MON 29 JAN 96
FIRE PRIORITY 2 SYSTEM SYSTEM SIGNALS POWER

ALARM ALARM SUPERVISORY TROUBLE SILENCED ON

ALARM ALARM SUPV TBL ALARM SYSTEM

ACK ACK ACK ACK SILENCE RESET

ACKNOWLEDGE

Figure B-8. Operator Interface

Additional CPU The master controller bay can be equipped with many additional types of modules. The cards
Bay Modules listed below are limited to the CPU bay only.

• 4100/4120-0139 Service Modem Card. Master controller mezzanine card: Provides a

connection to remote PCs for diagnostics and programming purposes.
• 4100/4120-6014 Modular Network Interface Card (NIC). A daughter card that mounts
to the CPU motherboard. Performs 4100 networking operations. May be installed with the
4100-6056 Wired Media Card, the 4100-6057 Fiber Media Card, and/or the 4100-6055
Modem Media Card.

Expansion Bays An FACP always has one master controller bay, and may have one or two expansion bays as
well. Expansion bays contain a variety of additional modules that the system might require.
Expansion bays are always below the master controller bay.

MASTER
CONTROLLER
BAY

TWO-BAY
CABINET

EXPANSION
BAY

Figure B-9. Master Controller and Expansion Bays

B-6
 Appendix B

Introduction to FACPs (continued)

System Power The FACP is powered primarily by the universal power supply (UPS), which in turn takes
power directly from the AC mains and the two backup batteries.

TO BATTERY

MASTER
CONTROLLER
UPS

POWER
AND TO AC
COMM MAINS

BATTERY BATTERY

Figure B-10. Power and Comm Lines

B-7
 Appendix B

Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes

Overview There are one-bay, two-bay, and three-bay back boxes. The one-bay back box is typically used
as a standalone master controller cabinet, while the two and three-bay cabinets may contain
any combination of modules.
• Back boxes are usually shipped in large containers separate from the system electronics. If
system electronics containers are shipped with the back box containers, store the system
electronics containers in a safe, clean, and dry location until the back box installation is
completed, and you are ready to install the system electronic bays.
• All back box PIDs are listed in Chapter 1.

Specifications Table B-1 lists the specifications for the back boxes.

Table B-1. Back Box Specifications

PID Description Height Width Rough Opening

Number Size Weight Box Trim Door Box Height Width
4100-2001/2011 1 Bay 55 lb. 20-¾ in. 23-½ in. 26-3/8 in. 25-¾ in. 21-¼ in. 26 ¼ in.
2975-9190/9191 (25 kg) (527 mm) (597 mm) (670 mm) (654 mm) (540 mm) (667
mm)
4100-2002/2012 2 Bay 125 lb. 36-¼ in. 39-1/8 in. 26-3/8 in. 25-¾ in. 36-¾ in. 26 ¼ in.
2975-9192/9193 (57 kg) (921 mm) (994 mm) (670 mm) (654 mm) (933 mm) (667
mm)
4100-2003/2013 3 Bay 185 lb. 52-1/8 in. 55 in. 26-3/8 in. 25-¾ in. 52 5/8 in. 26 ¼ in.
2975-9194/9195 (84 kg) (1,324 mm) (1,397 mm) (670 mm) (654 mm) (1,337 (667
mm) mm)

Make certain that you have the necessary hardware before you begin the installation procedure.
The Back Box Mounting Hardware Kit should have all of the items listed in Table B-2.

Table B-2. Contents of the Back Box Mounting Hardware Kit

Quantity per back box

Part Number Description
1-Bay Box 2-Bay Box 3-Bay Box
268-010 Lockwasher 6 8 10
(No. 8)
490-011 Washer 6 8 10
426-033 Screw (No. 8 6 8 10
Torx, 5/16 in.)

B-8
 Appendix B

Step 1. Mounting Back Boxes (continued)

Installing the Install the back box as shown in Figure B-11. Use the holes in the back box to secure it to the
Back Box(es) wall.
• For mounting to a wooden wall structure, the back box must be attached with 
four 1-½-inch-long (38 mm) lag bolts and four ½-inch-diameter (13 mm) washers.
• The enclosure must be level and plumb when installed. The front surface of the back box
must protrude at least three inches from the wall surface for semi-flush back box
installations (refer to Table B-1 and the “Rough Opening” section of the table for semi-
flush installations).

Figure B-11. Back Box Installation Diagram

Figure Notes:Figure B-11 notes:

1. The dimensions shown are typical for all surface and semi-flush installations.
2. Use a suitable punch when conduit is required and no knockout is present.
3. Box mounting:
• Minimum 5 inches from an obstruction on the hinged side of the box to permit at least 90 degree
angle when the door is open.
• Minimum distance of 3 ¼ inches (83 mm) between boxes.
• Maximum distance of 10 inches (254 mm) between boxes.
4. Conduit A denotes internal panel interconnect harnesses and non power-limited wiring. 
Conduit B denotes contractor wiring.
5. Do not install any power-limited wiring in the shaded area of the back box as shown in Figure B-11.
This area is reserved for non power-limited devices and circuits (for example, AC power, batteries,
and city circuits). The non power-limited area is determined by the internal barriers, but is always
below and to the right of these barriers. Do not use the upper right, right, or bottom knockouts for
entrance of power-limited wiring.
6. When the two back boxes are mounted side-by-side, remove the hinge and the lock catch on the
second back box (box on the right). Remount the hinges on the right side of the second back box.
Remount the lock catch on the left side of the second box. Mount the door 
upside-down so the locks on both boxes are side-by-side.

B-9
 Appendix B

Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes

Overview Before the system cards can be configured, the system electronics bays must be mounted to the
FACP back boxes. This section describes that process for the master controller cabinet and
expansion cabinets.

Installing the The system electronics bays for each back box are mounted on two rails. These rails are
System secured inside a cardboard shipping container when shipped from the factory.
Electronics Bays
Perform the following procedure to install the system electronics bays.

1. Remove everything from the electronics shipping container. To remove the 635-852 Battery
Terminal Block, unscrew the two 8-2 shipping screws that secure it to the container as
shown in Figure B-12. Save the two lockwashers and nuts.
2. Remove the 10-32 shipping studs that secure the vertical rails to the shipping container as
shown in Figure B-12.

Figure B-12. Removing the Shipping Studs

Continued on next page

B-10
 Appendix B

Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes (continued)

Installing the 3. Using the hardware provided (as referenced in Table B-2), insert a mounting screw in both
System the top right and top left track support holes in the back box as shown in Figure B-13.
Electronics Bays

BACK BOX

MOUNTING SCREWS

Figure B-13. Inserting the Mounting Screws

4. Tighten the two mounting screws, but leave a 1/8-inch (3-mm) gap from the seated position
of each screw.
5. Using the vertical rails as handles, carefully lift the system electronics bay assembly and the
terminal block from the shipping container.

Continued on next page

B-11
 Appendix B

Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes (continued)

Installing the 6. Install the system electronics bay assembly in the back box by carefully placing the rail 
System teardrop holes, located at the top of the rails, onto the two extended screws in the back box,
Electronics Bays allowing the electronics bay assembly to hang from the screws. See Figure B-14.
Note: Make sure you do not pinch the terminal block wiring behind the rails as you mount the bay assembly
in the back box.

BACK BOX

PREMOUNTED SCREWS

TEARDROP HOLES

NUT
LOCKWASHER
TERMINAL
BLOCK
SYSTEM ELECTRONICS
BAY ASSEMBLY

SCREW HOLES

Figure B-14. Installing the System Electronics Bay Assembly

7. Insert the remaining mounting screws through the screw holes in the rails.
8. Securely tighten all mounting screws. Refer to Table B-3 for the recommended torque.

Table B-3. Recommended Torque for Mounting Hardware

Screw / Nut Size Recommended Torque

No.6 7.9 to 8.7 inch/ounces
(569 to 626 cm/grams)
No.8 16.1 to 17.8 inch/ounces
(1,159 to 1,282 cm/grams)
No.10 26.8 to 29.7 inch/ounces
(1,930 to 2,139 cm/grams)

Continued on next page

B-12
 Appendix B

Step 2. Mounting Electronics Bays to Back Boxes (continued)

Installing the 9. Place the 635-852 terminal block on the two mounting studs on the right side of the back box
System as shown in Figure B-14.
Electronics Bays 10. Secure the 635-852 Terminal Block using the two lockwashers and nuts that you set aside
in step 1. Use the torque recommendations listed in Table B-3 when securing the terminal
block.
At this point, the system is ready for system card installation.

CAUTION: Do not apply power to the system at this time.

For more detailed system installation instructions, refer to one of the following publications:
• 4100+/4120/UT System Cards Installation Instructions: FA4-21-305 (574-038)
• 4100+ Contractor Installation Instructions: FA4-21-202 (574-019)
• UT Contractor Installation Instructions: FA4-21-300 (574-901)

B-13
 Appendix B

Step 3. Configuring Modules

Overview The master controller, UPS, and all other modules to be mounted in the FACP back boxes must
be configured to operate correctly in the system via their DIP switch and jumper ports. This
section describes the hardware configuration for the master controller and UPS, since they will
always be used in the master controller bay.

Master The following settings apply to the master motherboard.

Motherboard P4. City Connect jumpers.
Configuration
• Local Energy: install jumpers 2, 5, 7, 9, 12, and 13.
• Reverse Polarity: install jumpers 1, 3, 7, 8, and 12.
• Shunt: install jumpers 1, 5, and 13.
• Form C: install jumper 13.
P5-P8, JW1, JW2. (565-274, 565-213 only) Used to enable RS-232/DC Comms or 4120
Network operation.
• If RS-232/DC Comms card is used on the motherboard: install jumpers P5, P6, P7, and P8.
• If a 4120 Network board is used on the motherboard: install jumpers JW1 and JW2.

565-333 Master If the 565-333 Master Controller is being used, use the jumper settings described below.
Controller P2. Controls whether software downloads to the programmer port (P1) or to a service
Configuration modem.
• Position 1 – 2: Use port P1.
• Position 2 – 3: Use the service modem.
P3. Controls whether RAM battery backup is enabled.
• Position 1 – 2: Enable RAM battery backup.
• Position 2 – 3: Disable RAM battery backup.
P5. Controls whether Flash EPROM writes are enabled.
• Position 1 – 2: Enable Flash EPROM writes.
• Position 2 – 3: Disable Flash EPROM writes.
P7. Makes the card compatible with a given master display.
• Position 1 – 2: Makes the card compatible with the 565-331 Master Display (5 V LCD).
Note that Rev B1 of the 565-331 Master Display will not work with this setting.
• Position 2 – 3: Makes the card compatible with the 565-173 and 565-331 Rev B1 Master
Displays (12 V LCD).

B-14
 Appendix B

Step 3. Configuring Modules (continued)

565-148 Master If the 565-148 Master Controller is being used, use the jumper settings described below.
Controller P2. Controls whether RAM battery backup is enabled.
Configuration
• Position 1 – 2: Enable RAM battery backup.
• Position 2 – 3: Disable RAM battery backup.
P3. Controls whether Flash EPROM writes are enabled.
• Position 1 – 2: Enable Flash EPROM writes.
• Position 2 – 3: Disable Flash EPROM writes.

UPS
IMPORTANT: Always configure the UPS as described below.
Configuration
Note: ON = 0; OFF = 1.

DIP Switch SW1. Controls various UPS functions.

SW1-1. Set to 0. Used when the UPS must be retrofitted to for Intelligent Power Supply
capabilities.
• Position 0: UPS acts like an Intelligent Power Supply in terms of messages sent to and
received from the master controller.
• Position 1: UPS does not use Intelligent Power Supply functionality at all.
SW1-2. Set to 1 unless UPS B-tap is providing power to a 25-Watt Amplifier. Controls
how the amplifier uses the backup battery.
• Position 0: Amplifier switches to battery backup when told to do so by the master
controller.
• Position 1: Amplifier switches to battery backup upon loss of AC power.
SW1-3 through SW1-6. These switches work together to configure the UPS for different
types of batteries (or no batteries at all). Refer to Table B-4 to determine what settings
should be used.

Table B-4. UPS SW1 Battery Configurations

DIP Switch Position UPS Configuration

3 4 5 6
1 0 0 1 Lead-acid battery
1 0 1 0 No battery charger
1 1 0 1 Audio (25 W Amp) and lead-acid battery
1 1 1 0 Audio (25 W Amp) without battery charger
1 0 0 0 NICAD battery
1 1 0 0 Audio (25 W Amp) and NICAD battery

Continued on next page

B-15
 Appendix B

Step 3. Configuring Modules (continued)

UPS SW1-7. Controls battery charging current.

Configuration • Position 0: 50 Ah battery charging.
• Position 1: 110 Ah battery charging.
SW1-8. Not used.

DIP Switch SW2. Device address DIP switch. See Appendix A for details.

Use the following jumper settings to continue configuring the UPS.

P6. Battery backup configuration.

• Position 1 – 2: Normal configuration (battery backup).
• Position 2 – 3: No battery backup.

IMPORTANT: Do not use jumper P6 to bypass troubles from a

temporarily disconnected battery.

P7. Amplifier shutdown selection.

• Position 1 – 2: Tap A shutdown enabled.
• Position 3 – 4: Tap B shutdown enabled.
• Position 5 – 6: Tap C shutdown enabled.

P16. Controls Earth Detect configuration.

• Position 1 – 2: Enable Earth Detect.
• Position 2 – 3: Disable Earth Detect.

Note: Jumpers P10, P13, and JW1 through JW7 are not field adjustable.

Configuring Other Refer to 4100/4100+ Fire Alarm Universal Transponder (UT) Service Instructions
Cards (FA4-51-207) to configure other cards that are located in master controller bays and expansion
bays.

B-16
 Appendix B

Step 4. Interconnecting Master Controller Bay Cards

Overview Each card has to be interconnected with every other card in the master controller bay. Read this
section to ensure that cards are interconnected.

Interconnecting Use the following instructions and Figure B-15 to interconnect master controller bay cards.
Cards
1. Use the 733-659 Harness to connect P14 on the UPS to P3 on the master controller 
motherboard. Note that the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on
either the top four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
2. Use 733-672 Harness to connect P4 on the UPS to P2 on the master controller motherboard.
Like the P2 connector, P3 has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top four
pins or the bottom four pins.
3. If you are installing a new motherboard, orient the motherboard with the connector labeled
J1 on the right and the header labeled P1 on the left.
4. Slide the motherboard to the left until the pins are completely inserted in the connector of the
previously installed motherboard.
5. Secure the motherboard to the chassis with four torx screws.

IMPORTANT: The leftmost board must always be the master controller

motherboard.

733-659

P14

UPS P1
P2

P3
P4 J1 or
J3

733-672

Figure B-15. Master Controller Bay Interconnections

B-17
 Appendix B

Step 5. Installing Motherboards into Expansion Bays

Overview This section describes how to interconnect motherboards in expansion bays, and how to
connect the expansion bays electrically to the master controller bay.

Guidelines Up to eight 2 (51 mm) x 11 ½-inch (292 mm) motherboards can be installed in an expansion
bay. Adhere to the following guidelines when installing a motherboard in an expansion bay:
• If a power supply is installed, it must be placed on the far right of the bay.
• Relay cards must be installed in the rightmost possible slots (just left of the power supply,
if there is one). This is necessary to allow for the proper routing of non-power limited
wiring (typically 120 VAC wiring), which could be connected to a relay module.
• If a 4100/4120-0155 SDACT or a 4100/4120-0153 CCDACT is installed in the bay, it
must be installed in the far left or far right slot. Neither of these modules contains the J1 or
P1 connectors, which are used to distribute power and communications to adjacent
modules.

Installing Use the following directions and Figure B-16 to install a motherboard into an expansion bay.
Motherboards
1. Orient the motherboard with the connector labeled J1 on the right and the header labeled P1
on the left.
2. Match the connector on the previously installed motherboard with the pins on the mother-
board you are installing. Slide the motherboard to the left until the pins are completely
inserted in the connector of the previously installed motherboard. If you are installing the
leftmost board, the pins will remain unconnected.
3. Secure the motherboard to the chassis with four torx screws.

The motherboard can be installed in any of the

eight slots.

P1

J1 or
J3

Figure B-16. Installing the Motherboard in an Expansion Bay

4. If you are installing the leftmost motherboard, connect a 733-525 Power and
Communication Harness. Continue to the next topic to connect the harness.

B-18
 Appendix B

Step 5. Installing Motherboards into Expansion Bays (continued)

Connecting the If you need to connect a 733-525 Harness to a motherboard, refer to Figure B-17 and follow
733-525 Harness these steps. Make sure to route the power and communication wiring on the left side of the bay.

1. Connect one end of the harness to a motherboard in an adjacent bay.

If the adjacent bay is a master controller bay, connect the harness to the P2 and P3 
connectors of the master controller motherboard and continue to step 2.
If the adjacent bay is an expansion bay, connect the harness to the P2 and P3 connectors of
the motherboard installed in the leftmost slot. (If a 4100/4120-0155 SDACT or a 
4100/4120-0153 CCDACT occupies the leftmost slot, connect the harness to the 
motherboard in the second slot from the left.) Connect the harness as follows:
a. Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that
the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top
four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
b. Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that
the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top
four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

Continued on next page

B-19
 Appendix B

Step 5. Installing Motherboards into Expansion Bays (continued)

Connecting the 2. Connect the other end of the harness to the leftmost motherboard in the next bay, as
733-525 Harness described below. Make sure to route the wiring on the left side of the bay.
a. Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that
the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top
four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
b. Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that
the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top
four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

733-659 Harness

Connector with
Blue Wire Goes
to P2
(Blue = Top)

Connector with
White Wire Goes
to P3
(White = Top)

733-672 Harness

733-525 Harness

Figure B-17. Power and Communication Wiring for Motherboards

B-20
 Appendix C
Installing 4100 MINIPLEX Components (Non-4100ES/4100U)
Introduction MINIPLEX remote interface cards (RICs) allow for data and power interconnections between
the 4100 host panel and remote locations. This chapter describes the transponder installation
procedure for all MINIPLEX systems in non-4100ES/4100U systems.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

Introduction to MINIPLEX Systems C-2

MINIPLEX System Components C-4

MINIPLEX System Guidelines C-6

Installing Modules into Back Boxes C-7

MINIPLEX Wiring C-11

C-1
 Appendix C

Introduction to MINIPLEX Systems

Overview The 4100 MINIPLEX Fire Alarm System uses transponder cabinets containing remote
interface cards (RICs) to extend power and communication across large areas. MINIPLEX
transponders allow the system to provide applications for up to 1000 monitor and/or control
points and 2000 annunciator points (see note). Using 4100-style serial communications, up to
31 distributed MINIPLEX transponder locations are possible for initiating device circuit cards,
MAPNET II/ TrueAlarm addressable communications interfaces, notification appliance circuit
cards, LED/switch controls, auxiliary relay control cards, power supplies, and audio amplifiers.

By selecting the required combinations of modules and mounting MINIPLEX transponders at

the appropriate building locations, wire quantities are significantly reduced for all monitor and
control functions. Since power for the local modules is provided from the local power supply,
the wiring from the control panel need only be separate twisted, shielded pairs for data, voice,
and telephone.

Notes:
• One point consists of one LED or one switch on an LED/switch module, one LED driver output on a
graphic driver, or one switch input on a graphic switch input module.
• Up to 32 modules can be controlled by one MINIPLEX transponder.
• The 4100 0117 MINIPLEX Expansion Power Supply is available with a power-limited 8 A output.

Continued on next page

C-2
 Appendix C

Introduction to MINIPLEX Systems (continued)

Overview Figure C-1 is an outline of a MINIPLEX system.

Seventh floor
Seventh floor
MINIPLEX transponder
with solidMINIPLEX
door transponder
with solid door

Legend:
Sixth floor Legend:
Sixth floor
Speaker NAC
Speaker NAC

TrueAlarm sensors
TrueAlarm
and MAPNET II sensors
Fifth floor and circuits
addressable MAPNET II
Fifth floor addressable circuits

Audio riser wiring,

Audio riser wiring,
twisted pair
twisted pair
RUI communications
RUI communications
wiring, twisted pair
Fourth floor wiring, twisted,
Fourth floor shielded pair

MINIPLEX transponder with

MINIPLEX
LED/switch modulestransponder with
on door panel
LED/switch modules on door panel
Third floor
Third floor

ACKNOWLEDGE

ACKNOWLEDGE

Second floor
Second floor

FACP
First floor FACP
First floor

Figure C-1. MINIPLEX System Design

C-3
 Appendix C

MINIPLEX System Components

Overview The 4100 MINIPLEX system is comprised of a host panel containing everything required in a
standalone cabinet (see Chapter 3), plus:

• An RUI module in the master controller bay

• One or more remote MINIPLEX transponder cabinets
• A RIC II card in each transponder cabinet

This section describes each component in turn.

The RUI Card The RUI module consists of a motherboard and daughter card, which are used in the master
controller bay of a MINIPLEX system to extend the length of communications wire to reach
remote bays.

Figure C-2 is an illustration of the RUI card.

Figure C-2. The Remote Unit Interface Card

The RUI card mounts onto a 562-799 or 562-856 Motherboard.

Transponder Communication wiring from the RUI module in the host panel extends to the RIC II card in a
Cabinets remote transponder cabinet. The transponder cabinet is simply a 2975-91xx Back Box with a
RIC II module in it, and can have one, two, or three bays.

C-4
 Appendix C

MINIPLEX System Components (continued)

The Remote Remote interface cards (RICs) in the transponder cabinets allow for data, power, and audio
Interface Card interconnections between the 4100 host panel and remote locations. They support RUI
(RIC) connections in Style 4 and Style 7 wiring configurations.

Figure C-3 illustrates the RIC circuit board.

TB2 LED1 COMMS TROUBLE LED 8 +COMM

PIEZO/MICROPHONE TBL
(LED 1): POWER/COMM PRIM
PIEZO +COMM
TERMINAL BLOCK (TB2) CTRL
LED Lights if there is a line short TERMINAL BLOCK (TB1) PRIM
SEC
CTRL -COMM

PTT+
on either primary or -COMM

PTT- secondary lines, or if both HEADER CONNECTOR +24 V

+COMM
REMOTE MICROPHONE comms inputs are absent. +24 V
+COMM
CONNECTOR (P1)
SHLD
(J1)
MI C

GRN 24C
WHT
24C

Figure C-3. The RIC II Card

C-5
 Appendix C

MINIPLEX System Guidelines

Overview The rules on this page apply exclusively to MINIPLEX systems. Review each guideline before
installing a MINIPLEX 4100 system.

Guidelines • The MINIPLEX master control panel must be a 4100-8210 Voice and Sound Control
Panel.
• The Style 4 RUI card supports MINIPLEX transponders and 4602/4603 serial 
annunciators on the same signaling line circuit.
• Up to 4 RUI cards in the 4100 Control Panel can be used for distributing transponder
wiring in different directions or for supporting different wiring requirements (such as
using a Style 7 RUI for serial annunciators).
• Up to 31 MINIPLEX transponders can be controlled from the 4100 Control Panel, and can
be distributed as required among the RUI cards.
• “T” tapping is allowed for Style 4 communications only (Style 7 wiring does not support
“T” tapping).
• *Wiring from RUI cards is a minimum of 18 AWG twisted, shielded pair.
• The maximum wiring distance from the 4100 RUI card to a MINIPLEX transponder is
2500 feet (762 m). For Style 4 wiring, this can be extended to 10,000 feet (3 km)
maximum if “T” tapping is used.
• Voice and telephone wiring for 4100-8210 systems is via separate twisted, shielded pairs.
• 4100U system cards are not compatible with 4100 miniplex transponders that are
controlled by a 4100 RIC II card.

*The RUI+ has the same limitation as the RUI, except shielded wire is not required.

C-6
 Appendix C

Installing Modules into Back Boxes

Overview This section contains guidelines and instructions for mounting the RUI and RIC II modules
into 4100 back boxes.

• The RUI motherboard mounts into the CPU bay or, if necessary, an expansion bay.
• The RIC II mounts into expansion bays only.

Guidelines Review the following guidelines before installing a motherboard into a cabinet.

• If a power supply is installed in the bay, it must be installed on the far right of the bay and
any relay modules must be installed in the slots immediately to its left.
• Relay cards must be installed in the rightmost possible slots. This is necessary to allow for
the proper routing of non-power limited wiring (typically 120 VAC wiring), which could
be connected to a relay module.

Installing the RUI Mount the RUI motherboard (562-799 or 562-856) in a master controller bay as described
Motherboard below.

1. Orient the motherboard with the connector labeled J1 on the right and the header labeled P1
on the left.
2. Match the connector on the previously installed motherboard with the pins on the mother-
board you are installing. Slide the motherboard to the left until the pins are completely
inserted in the connector of the previously installed motherboard. If you are installing the
leftmost board, the pins will remain unconnected.
3. Secure the motherboard to the chassis with four torx screws.

Figure C-4. Installing the RUI Motherboard in the CPU Bay

Note: RUI motherboards may also be installed in expansion bays.

C-7
 Appendix C

Installing Modules into Back Boxes (continued)

Installing the RIC The RIC II motherboard is installed into a remote transponder cabinet (back box PID series
II Motherboard 2975-91xx). Review the following guidelines before mounting RIC II motherboard.

• If a power supply is installed in the bay, it must be installed on the far right of the bay and
any relay modules must be installed in the slots immediately to its left.
• Relay cards must be installed in the rightmost possible slots. This is necessary to allow for
the proper routing of non-power limited wiring (typically 120 VAC wiring), which could
be connected to a relay module.
• If a 4100/4120-0155 SDACT or a 4100/4120-0153 CCDACT is installed in the bay, it
must be installed in the far left or far right slot. Neither of these modules contains the J1 or
P1 connectors, which are used to distribute power and communications to adjacent
modules.

Use the following directions and Figure C-5 to install a RIC II motherboard into a transponder
cabinet.

1. The RIC II motherboard must be installed in the leftmost slot. Orient the motherboard with
the connector labeled J1 on the right.
2. Secure the motherboard to the chassis with four torx screws.

The RIC II motherboard must be installed in the

leftmost slot.

J1

RIC II

Figure C-5. Installing the RIC II Motherboard into a 4100 Expansion Bay

3. If you are installing the RIC II in a transponder cabinet with additional bays, you must 
connect a 733-525 Power and Communication Harness. Continue to the next topic for
instructions.

C-8
 Appendix C

Installing Modules into Back Boxes (continued)

Connecting the If you need to connect a 733-525 Harness to a motherboard, refer to Figure C-6 and follow
733-525 Harness these steps. Make sure to route the power and communication wiring on the left side of the bay.

1. Connect one end of the harness to a motherboard in an adjacent bay.

If the adjacent bay is a master controller bay, connect the harness to the P2 and P3 
connectors of the master controller motherboard and continue to step 2.
If the adjacent bay is an expansion bay, connect the harness to the P2 and P3 connectors of
the motherboard installed in the leftmost slot. (If a 4100/4120-0155 SDACT or a 
4100/4120-0153 CCDACT occupies the leftmost slot, connect the harness to the 
motherboard in the second slot from the left.) Connect the harness as follows:
a. Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that
the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top
four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
b. Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that
the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top
four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

Continued on next page

C-9
 Appendix C

Installing Modules into Back Boxes (continued)

Connecting the 2. Connect the other end of the harness to the leftmost motherboard in the next bay, as
733-525 Harness described below. Make sure to route the wiring on the left side of the bay.
a. Insert the harness connector with the blue wire into the P2 connector. Note that
the P2 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top
four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.
b. Insert the harness connector with the white wire into the P3 connector. Note that
the P3 connector has eight pins. Insert the harness connector on either the top
four pins or the bottom four pins, not in the middle.

TO 24 VDC

RIC II
(565-233)

Connector with
Blue Wire Goes
to P2 (OPTIONAL)
UNIVERSAL
POWER SUPPLY
Connector with
White Wire Goes
to P3

733-672 Harness
733-525 Harness

Figure C-6. Power and Communication Wiring for the Transponder Cabinet (4100)

C-10
 Appendix C

MINIPLEX Wiring

Overview The RIC must be connected to the host panel via RUI cabling. This section explains how to
wire the two together, and how to set up a system with multiple transponders connected to the
same host panel.

Wiring RUI cabling can be accomplished either through Class A or Class B wiring.
Configurations
Class A wiring allows transponder cabinets to communicate with the FACP even in the event
of an open circuit somewhere in the loop. Class A wiring requires that two wires are routed
from the CPU motherboard to each RIC, and then back again to the CPU motherboard.

Class B wiring allows “T” tapping, and therefore requires less wiring distance per installation
than Class A. Additionally, Class B wiring does not require end-of-line resistors, because each
RIC communicates directly to the CPU.

IMPORTANT: Make sure these prerequisites are accounted for before

wiring:

• All transponder cabinets are installed within 2500 feet (762 m) of the FACP.
• Conductors test free of all grounds.
• All wires are between 12 and 18 AWG, or as the local code dictates.

Class A Wiring To connect the RUI card to RICs using Class A wiring, read the following instructions and
refer to Figure C-7, on the next page.

1. Route wire between 12 and 18 AWG from the + (TB1-8) and - (TB1-6) terminals on the
COMMS “A” block of the 562-856/565-217 RUI card to the TB1-8 (+) and TB1-6 (-) 
terminals on the 565-233 RIC.
2. Route wire from the first RIC to the next one. Repeat for each transponder cabinet within
2500 feet (762 m).
3. Route wire from TB1-7 (+) and TB1-5 (-) on the last RIC to + (TB1-4) and - (TB1-2) on the
COMMS “B” block of the 562-856/565-217 RUI card.

Class B Wiring To connect the RUI card to RIC II cards using Class B wiring, read the following instructions
and refer to Figure C-7, on the next page.

1. Route wire between 12 and 18 AWG from the + (TB1-8) and - (TB1-6) terminals on the
COMMS “A” block of the 562-856/565-217 RUI card to the TB1-8 (+) and TB1-6 (-) 
terminals on the 565-233 RIC.
2. Route wire from the first RIC to the next one. Repeat for each transponder cabinet within
2500 feet (762 m).

C-11
 Appendix C

MINIPLEX Wiring (continued)

Wiring Illustration Figure C-7 illustrates Class A and Class B wiring.

4100 MINIPLEX MASTER

562-856 W/565-217
RUI +24 V
COMMS "A" COMMS "B" 24 C
T
B
1 T T
B 8 1
B 8 1
1 1
RIC 11
II RIC 11
II
565-233 565-233
See
Note 1

MINIPLEX MINIPLEX
TRANSPONDER TRANSPONDER
CLASS B CLASS A

Figure C-7. MINIPLEX Wiring

Notes:
1. Power wiring is not shown. Connect the RIC II card to the UPS or expansion power supply in the tran-
sponder cabinet.
2. If a UPS is not provided in the transponder cabinet, then 24 VDC must be provided from the host panel.
3. Maintain correct polarity on terminal connections. Do not loop wires under terminals.
4. All wiring is supervised and power limited.

C-12
 Appendix D
Checking System Wiring
Overview This appendix contains instructions on how to use a volt/ohm meter to check system wiring.

Using the Volt/ When using the volt/ohm meter to check each circuit, make sure to adhere to the notes and
Ohm Meter instructions below.
Note:

• Ensure that no power is applied to the 4100 fire alarm panel and that all wiring is properly connected
(terminal blocks, LED/switch module ribbon cables, etc.).
• Use the green grounding lug in the control panel for all measurements to ground.
• Each circuit must test free of all grounds and extraneous (stray) voltages.
• If there are problems removing all power from the fire alarm system, there is an alternate method of
testing for stray voltage. The wires may be lifted from the panel and terminated with appropriate
resistors. Use 3.3 Kohms across conductor pairs and 50 Kohms from any conductor under test to
ground. All conductors must read less than 1.0V AC or DC.

Use the volt/ohm meter as described in the steps below to check each circuit type.

1. At the control panel, locate wires from each initiating device or indicating appliance circuit.
2. Check each circuit for extraneous voltage by setting the volt/ohm meter to AC. Place the
meter probes so that the black probe is on the “-” wire and the red probe is on the “+” wire.
Meter readings must show less than 1.0 VAC.
3. Set the volt/ohm meter to DC and repeat step 2. The meter must read less than 1.0 VDC.
4. Test all conductors for voltage to ground. The meter must read no more than 1.0V AC or
DC.
5. Set the volt/ohm meter to OHMS and place the meter probes as described in step 2. Check
the circuits using the resistance measurements in Table D-1. Locate and correct any 
abnormal conditions at this time.
Note: If the reading indicates an open circuit in an initiating circuit, make sure the smoke 
detector heads are properly mounted and seated. The circuit may be open if smoke detector power
is not present, and if separately powered 4-wire devices are used.

6. Check all other system wiring to verify that each circuit is free of grounds and extraneous
voltages.

D-1
 Appendix D

Checking System Wiring

Meter Readings Table D-1 lists the correct meter readings for indicating appliances and initiating devices.

Table D-1. Acceptable Zone and Signal Circuit Meter Readings

Circuit Type Meter Reading

Class B/Style B Initiating Device (Zone) Circuit
From zone + to zone – (each zone) 3.3 K Ohms
From zone + to ground Infinity
From zone - to ground Infinity
Class A/Style D Initiating Device (Zone) Circuit
From zone + to zone – (each zone) Infinity
From zone + to ground Infinity
From zone - to ground Infinity
From zone + OUT to + IN Less than 25 Ohms
From zone - OUT to - IN Less than 25 Ohms
Class B/Style Y Notification Appliance Circuit (each signal circuit)
From + to ground Infinity
From - to ground Infinity
Resistance across circuit:
In one direction 10 K Ohms
In opposite direction Less than 200 Ohms
Class A/Style Z Notification Appliance Circuit (each signal circuit)
From + to ground Infinity
From - to ground Infinity
From zone + OUT to + IN Less than 50 Ohms
From zone - OUT to - IN Less than 50 Ohms
Resistance across circuit:
In one direction Infinity
In opposite direction Less than 200 Ohms
Shielding
Shield to ground Infinity
Shield to - Infinity
Shield to + Infinity
MAPNET II Loops (ZAMs and IAMs)
From MAPNET II + to ground Infinity
From MAPNET II - to ground Infinity

D-2
 Appendix E
References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions
Overview

Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions

PID Description Installation

Instructions
4100-0156 8V DC CONVERTER 574-123
4100-0620 TRANSPONDER IF MODULE 574-848
4100-0621 ANALOG AUDIO RISER MODULE 574-848
4100-0622 DIGITAL AUDIO RISER MODULE 574-848
4100-0623 NETWORK AUDIO I/F MODULE 574-848
4100-0625 LOCAL MODE TPR IF 574-848
4100-0632 UTILITY BLOC, 16 TERMINALS 579-248
4100-0633 TRANSPONDER TAMPER SWITCH 579-195
4100-0634 POWER DIST MODULE 120V 574-848
4100-0635 POWER DIST MODULE 220V 574-848
4100-1210 ANALOG AUDIO CONTROLLER 579-159
4100-1240 AUX AUDIO INPUT MODULE 579-160
4100-1241 MESSAGE EXPANSION, 8 MINUTES 579-172
4100-1242 MESSAGE EXPANSION, 32 MINUTES 579-172
4100-1245 FLEX 50 NAC EXPANSION, 3 CLS B 579-175
4100-1246 FLEX 50 CLASS A ADAPTER 579-175
4100-1248 100W NAC EXPANSION, 6 CLASS B 579-175
4100-1249 100W CLASS A ADAPTER 579-175
4100-1252 AUDIO IF MODULE, SGL CHANNEL 579-168
4100-1253 AUDIO IF MODULE MULTI-CHANNEL 579-168
4100-1254 AUDIO IF 2 CHANNEL 579-168
4100-1255 AUDIO IF 3-8 CHANNEL 579-168
4100-1259 CONSTANT SUPV NAC 25V RMS A/B 579-515
4100-1259 CONSTANT SUPV NAC 25V RMS A/B - 579-515
Non-Alarm Audio Mode
4100-1260 CONSTANT SUPV NAC 70V RMS A/B 579-515
4100-1260 CONSTANT SUPV NAC 70V RMS A/B - 579-515
Non-Alarm Audio Mode
4100-1265 FAIL SAFE MICROPHONE MASTER 579-571
4100-1266 EXPANSION NAC CARD FOR EXP SIG 579-175
4100-1267 EXP SIG CARD CLASS A 579-175
4100-1268 EXP SIGCARD CONSTANT SUPV 579-515
4100-1269 FAIL SAFE MICROPHONE SLAVE 579-571
4100-1270 MASTER TELEPHONE, 3 NACS 579-226
4100-1271 REMOTE MASTER PHONE 579-226
4100-1272 EXPANSION PHONE CONTROLLER 579-226
4100-1273 PHONE CLASS A NAC ADAPTER 579-226
4100-1274 MICROPHONE MUX MODULE 579-879
4100-1276 8 RED PLUGGABLE LED MODULE 574-843
4100-1277 16 RED/YEL PLUGGABLE LED MOD 574-843
4100-1278 16 SW/16 RED/YEL PLUG LED 574-843
4100-1279 2” BLANK DISPLAY MODULE 574-843
4100-1280 8 SWITCH, 8 RED LED MODULE 574-843

E-1
 Appendix E

References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions

Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions (Continued)

PID Description Installation

Instructions
4100-1281 8 SWITCH, 8 YELLOW LED MODULE 574-843
4100-1282 8 SW, 16RED/YEL LED MOUDLE 574-843
4100-1283 8 SWITCH, 16 YELLOW LED MODULE 574-843
4100-1284 8 SW, 16 RED/GREEN LED MODULE 574-843
4100-1285 16 SWITCH, 16 RED LED MODULE 574-843
4100-1286 HOA MODULE 24SWI/24RED LED 574-843
4100-1287 24 SWITCH, 24 RED LED MODULE 574-843
4100-1288 64/64 LED/SWITCH CONTROLLER 574-843
4100-1289 EXPANSION 64/64 LED/SW MODULE 574-843
4100-1290 24 POINT I/O MODULE 579-183
4100-1291 REMOTE UNIT INTERFACE (RUI) 579-213
4100-1292 REM PANEL MOUNT LCD ANUCIATOR (Backlight On) 579-265
4100-1292 REM PANEL MOUNT LCD ANUCIATOR (Backlight Off) 579-265
4100-1293 PANEL MOUNT PRINTER 579-249
4100-1295 HOA MODULE,NO TEXT,24SW/24LED 574-843
4100-1296 8 SW, 16 GREEN/ YELLOW LED MOD. 574-843
4100-1297 TFX PHONE CARD 579-862
4100-1298 4100U/4100ES MASTER FIREFIGHTER PHONE ASSEMBLY w/TFX Phone Card 579-862
4100-1311 AUDIO CONTROL BOARD - DIGITAL 579-159
4100-1312 50W AMP W/3 CLASS B NACS 25V 579-173
4100-1313 50W AMP W/3 CLASS B NACS 70V 579-173
4100-1314 100W AMP W/6 B NACS 120VAC 25V 579-174
4100-1315 100W AMP W/6 B NACS 120VAC 70V 579-174
4100-1316 100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,25V-CAN 579-174
4100-1317 100W AMP,6NAC, 120VAC, 70V-CAN 579-174
4100-1318 100W AMP,6NAC,220/30/40VAC,25V 579-174
4100-1319 100W AMP,6NAC,220/30/40VAC,70V 579-174
4100-1320 BACKUP 100W AMP - 120VAC 25V 579-174
4100-1321 BACKUP 100W AMP - 120VAC 70V 579-174
4100-1322 BACKUP 100W AMP-120VAC 25V-C 579-174
4100-1323 BACKUP 100W AMP-120VAC 70V-C 579-174
4100-1324 BACK 100W AMP-220/240VAC,25V 579-174
4100-1325 BACK 100W AMP-220/240VAC,70V 579-174
4100-1311 AUDIO CONTROL BOARD - DIGITAL 579-159
4100-1312 50W AMP W/3 CLASS B NACS 25V 579-173
4100-1313 50W AMP W/3 CLASS B NACS 70V 579-173
4100-1314 100W AMP W/6 B NACS 120VAC 25V 579-174
4100-1315 100W AMP W/6 B NACS 120VAC 70V 579-174
4100-1316 100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,25V-CAN 579-174
4100-1317 100W AMP,6NAC, 120VAC, 70V-CAN 579-174
4100-1318 100W AMP,6NAC,220/30/40VAC,25V 579-174
4100-1319 100W AMP,6NAC,220/30/40VAC,70V 579-174
4100-1320 BACKUP 100W AMP - 120VAC 25V 579-174
4100-1321 BACKUP 100W AMP - 120VAC 70V 579-174
4100-1322 BACKUP 100W AMP-120VAC 25V-C 579-174
4100-1323 BACKUP 100W AMP-120VAC 70V-C 579-174
4100-1324 BACK 100W AMP-220/240VAC,25V 579-174
4100-1325 BACK 100W AMP-220/240VAC,70V 579-174

E-2
 Appendix E

References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions (continued)

Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions (Continued)

PID Description Installation

Instructions
4100-1326 FLEX 50W AMP W/3 NACS - 25V 579-173
4100-1327 FLEX 50W AMP W/3 NACS - 70V 579-173
4100-1328 DIG.100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,25V 579-174
4100-1329 DIG. 100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,70V 579-174
4100-1330 DIG.100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC, 25V-C 579-174
4100-1331 DIG.100W AMP,6NAC,120VAC,70V-C 579-174
4100-1332 DIG100W AMP,6NAC,220VAC,25V 579-174
4100-1333 DIG100W AMP,6NAC,220VAC,70V 579-174
4100-1334 BACKUP DIG.100W AMP,120VAC,25V 579-174
4100-1335 BACKUP DIG.100W AMP,120VAC,70V 579-174
4100-1336 BACK DIG.100W AMP,120VAC,25V-C 579-174
4100-1337 BACK DIG.100W AMP,120VAC,70V-C 579-174
4100-1338 BCK DIG.100W AMP,220VAC,25V 579-174
4100-1339 BCK DIG.100W AMP,220VAC,70V 579-174
4100-1340 4100U/4100ES TFX AUDIO INTERFACE MODULE 579-815
4100-1361 FLEX 35W AMP W/3 NACS - 25V 579-173
4100-1341 Multiple Command Center Digital Audio Riser module 574-844
4100-1362 FLEX 35W AMP W/3 NACS - 70V 579-173
4100-1363 DIGITALFLEX 35W AMP, 3NACS-25V 579-173
4100-1364 DIGITALFLEX 35W AMP, 3NACS-70V 579-173
4100-3101 IDNET MODULE, UP TO 250 POINTS- Each IDNet Device (Add to 574-800
IDNet current) 4100-3101 with full channel - 250 IDNet devices
4100-3102 MAPNET MODULE, UP TO 127 PTS 579-222
Each MAPNET Device (Add to MAPNET current) 4100-3102 with full
channel - 127 MAPNET devices
4100-3103 MAPNET/IDNET ISOLATOR MODULE 579-514
4100-3104 IDNET MODULE, UP TO 127 POINTS 574-800
4100-3105 IDNET MODULE, UP TO 64 POINTS 574-800
4100-3106 IDNET MODULE QUICK CONNECT 2 574-800
4100-3107 IDNET+ MODULE, UP TO 250 POINTS 579-786
Each IDNet Device (Add to IDNet+ current)
4100-3108 IDNet1+ MODULE 579-1014
4100-3109 IDNET 2 MODULE, UP TO 250 POINTS - Two Isolated Loops per 579-1169
IDNet Device (Add to IDNet Current)
4100-3110 IDNET 2+2 MODULE, UP TO 250 POINTS - Four Isolated Loops per 579-1169
IDNet Device (Add to IDNet Current)
4100-3115 XA LOOP INTERFACE CARD (Master) 579-513
4100-3115 XA LOOP INTERFACE CARD (Slave) 579-513
4100-3202 4 RELAYS, 10 AMP CONTACTS 579-220
4100-3204 4 POINT 2 AMP AUX RELAY MODULE 579-220
4100-3206 8 POINT 3 AMP AUX RELAY MODULE 579-220
4100-5005 ZONE MODULE, 8 IDC, CLASS B 579-205
4100-5015 ZONE MODULE, 8 IDC, CLASS A 579-205
4100-5101 XPS POWER, 3 NACS, 120VAC 574-772
4100-5102 XPS POWER, 3 NACS, 220VAC 574-772
4100-5103 XPS POWER, 3 NACS, CANADA 574-772
4100-5111 X SPS PWR, IDNET, 3 NACS, 120V 574-246
Each IDNet Device (Add to IDNet current)

E-3
 Appendix E

References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions (continued)

Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions (Continued)

PID Description Installation

Instructions
4100-5112 SPS POWER,3 NACS,120VAC CAN 574-246
Each IDNet Device (Add to IDNet current)
4100-5113 SPS POWER, 3 NACS, 220/240V 574-246
Each IDNet Device (Add to IDNet+ current)
4100-5115 XPS EXPANSION MODULE, 3 NACS 574-772
4100-5116 EXPANSION AUDIO SIGNAL CARD 579-516
4100-5120 TPS POWER, 3 CHANNELS, 120VAC 579-336
4100-5121 TPS POWER, 3 CHANNELS,CAN 579-336
4100-5122 TPS POWER, 3 CHANNELS, 240VAC 579-336
4100-5124 TPS CLASS A ADAPTER MOD 579-337
4100-5125 RPS POWER, 3 NACS, 120VAC 574-246
4100-5126 RPS POWER, 3 NACS, CANADIAN 574-246
4100-5127 RPS POWER, 3 NACS, 220VAC 574-246
4100-5128 BATTERY DIST TERM MODULE 579-332
4100-5130 4100U/4100ES TFX Voltage Regulator Module 579-812
4100-5152 POWER MODULE, 2A, 12 VOLTS 579-218
4100-5311 EPS POWER, 120V with IDNet 2 Card 579-1015
4100-5313 EPS POWER, 240V with IDNet 2 Card 579-1015
4100-5325 EPS POWER, 120V 579-1015
4100-5327 EPS POWER, 240V 579-1015
4100-6014 NETWORK IFC CARD, MODULAR 579-182
4100-6029 SMOKE MANAGEMENT APPLICATION GUIDE 574-465
4100-6030 SERVICE MODEM (566-276) 579-194
4100-6031 CITY MODULE W/DISCONNECT 574-839
4100-6032 CITY MODULE W/O DISCONNECT 574-839
4100-6033 ALARM RELAY 574-839
4100-6034 TAMPER SWITCH W/IDNET IAM 574-195
4100-6036 PHYSICAL BRIDGE, STYLE 4 579-184
4100-6037 PHYSICAL BRIDGE, STYLE 7 579-184
4100-6038 DUAL RS-232 IF CARD 579-221
4100-6045 DECODER MODULE 574-037
4100-6047 BUILDING NETWORK INTERFACE CARD 579-949
4100-6048 VESDA INTERFACE KIT 574-050
4100-6052 EVENT REPORTING DACT 574-836
4100-6055 DIAL-IN SERVICE MODEM (566-338) 574-046
4100-6056 NETWORK MEDIA CARD WIRED 579-182
4100-6057 NETWORK MEDIA CARD F/OPTIC 579-182
4100-6060 SAFELINC FP INTERNET INTERFACE 579-349
4100-6061 MODULAR NIC, REDUNDANT 579-331
4100-6062 TFX NETWORK INTERFACE 579-575
4100-6063 FIBER OPTIC MODEM LEFT PORT 579-581
4100-6064 FIBER OPTIC MODEM RIGHT PORT 579-581
4100-6066 4100U/4100ES TFX Addressable Loop Interface Card 579-811
4100-6069 BACpac Ethernet 579-842
4100-6080 DACT SIDE MOUNTED 574-836
4100-7150 MASTER UPGRADE, 2X40 LCD 579-229
4100-7151 MASTER UPGRADE, NO DISPLAY 574-918
4100-7152 LEGACY MSTR UPGRADE, W/ DSPLY 579-229

E-4
 Appendix E

References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions (continued)

Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions (Continued)

PID Description Installation

Instructions
4100-7153 FP UPGRADE W/ Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC 579-229
4100-7154 LEGACY MSTR UPGRADE W/Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC 579-229
4100-7155 FP UPGRADE W/ Flexible User Interface, INTERNATIONAL 579-229
4100-7156 LEGACY MSTR UPGRADE W/Flexible User Interface, INTERNATIONAL 579-229
4100-7158 NXP Master Controller Upgrade w/o Display (Legacy 4100 to Rev 13 or 579-943
higher)
4907-9001 TrueAlert Text Messaging Appliance 579-829
4100-9111 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. DOMESTIC 120V; 250 Devices 574-848
4100-9111 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. DOMESTIC 120V; 0 Devices 574-848
4100-9112 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. CAN/ENG 120V; 0 Devices 574-848
4100-9113 PRECONF, CANADIAN FRENCH 120V; 0 Devices 574-848
4100-9114 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. W/ Flexible User Interface DOMESTIC 574-848
120V; 0 Devices
4100-9115 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. W/ Flexible User Interface CAN/ENG 574-848
120V; 0 Devices
4100-9116 PRECONF W/ Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN FRENCH 120V; 0 574-848
Devices
4100-9121 4100U/4100ES Preconfig.REDUNDANT 120V 579-331
4100-9122 4100U/4100ES Preconfig. w/ Flexible User Interface REDUNDANT 120V 579-331
4100-9131 MASTER CONTROLLER NO DISPLAY 574-848
4100-9132 MSTR CANADIAN ENG. NO DISPLAY 574-848
4100-9133 MSTR CANADIAN FRENCH w/o UI 574-918
4100-9141 NETWORK DISPLAY UNIT, DOMESTIC 579-269
4100-9142 NDU W/VOICE, DOMESTIC 579-269
4100-9143 NDU CANADIAN/ENGLISH 579-269
4100-9144 NDU CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-269
4100-9145 NDU W/VOICE CANADIAN/ENGLISH 579-269
4100-9146 NDU W/VOICE CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-269
4100-9151 NDU W/ Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC 579-269
4100-9152 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC 579-269
4100-9153 NDU W/Flexible User Interface CANADIAN/ENGLISH 579-269
4100-9154 NDU W/Flexible User Interface CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-269
4100-9155 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN/ENGLISH 579-269
4100-9156 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-269
4100-9211 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/DISPLAY (230V) 574-848
4100-9212 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface (230V) 574-848
4100-9214 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface, CHINA (230V) 574-848
4100-9213 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface (120V) 574-848
4100-9222 Redundant Mstr w/ Flexible User Interface International (230V) 579-269
4100-9230 MSTR INTERNATIONAL NO DISPLAY (230V) 574-848
4100-9241 NDU INTERNATIONAL 579-269
4100-9242 NDU W/VOICE INTERNATIONAL 579-269
4100-9243 NDU W/Flexible User Interface INTERNATIONAL (230V) 579-269
4100-9244 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface INTERNATIONAL (230V) 579-269
4100-9245 NDU w/ Flexible User Interface International (120V) 579-269
4100-9246 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface INTERNATIONAL (230V) 579-269
4100-9311 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. DOMESTIC 120V; 250 Devices, EPS 574-848
with IDNet 2 Card

E-5
 Appendix E

References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions (continued)

Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions (Continued)

PID Description Installation

Instructions
4100-9312 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. CAN/ENG 120V; 0 Devices, EPS with 574-848
IDNet 2 Card
4100-9313 PRECONF, CANADIAN FRENCH 120V; 0 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 574-848
Card
4100-9314 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. W/ Flexible User Interface DOMESTIC 574-848
120V; 0 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card
4100-9315 4100U/4100ES PRECONFIG. W/ Flexible User Interface CAN/ENG 574-848
120V; 0 Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card
4100-9316 PRECONF W/ Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN FRENCH 120V; 0 574-848
Devices, EPS with IDNet 2 Card
4100-9131 MASTER CONTROLLER NO DISPLAY, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-848
4100-9332 MSTR CANADIAN ENG. NO DISPLAY, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 574-848
4100-9342 NDU W/VOICE, DOMESTIC, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 579-269
4100-9352 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, DOMESTIC, EPS with 579-269
IDNet 2 Card
4100-9355 NDU W/VOICE and Flexible User Interface, CANADIAN/ENGLISH, EPS 579-269
with IDNet 2 Card
4100-9401 Remote Display Assembly w/ Flexible User Interface, RED, DOMESTIC 579-687
4100-9402 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, BEIGE, DOMESTIC 579-687
4100-9421 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, RED, CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-687
4100-9422 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, BEIGE, CANADIAN/FRENCH 579-687
4100-9441 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, RED, INTERNATIONAL 579-687
4100-9442 RDA w/Flexible User Interface, BEIGE, INTERNATIONAL 579-687
4100-9511 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/DISPLAY (220,230, 240V), EPS with 574-848
IDNet 2 Card
4100-9512 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface (220,230, 240V), EPS 574-848
with IDNet 2 Card
4100-9513 MSTR INTERNATIONAL w/Flexible User Interface (120V), EPS with 574-848
IDNet 2 Card
4100-9531 MASTER CONTROLLER 1 LOOP– 220/230/240V, EPS with IDNet 2 574-848
Card
4100-9532 MASTER CONTROLLER 2 LOOP–220/230/240V, EPS with IDNet 2 574-848
Card
4100-9533 MASTER CONTROLLER 3 LOOP–220/230/240V, EPS with IDNet 2 574-848
Card
4100-9534 MASTER CONTROLLER 5 LOOP–220/230/240V, EPS with IDNet 2 574-848
Card
4100-9542 NDU W/VOICE INTERNATIONAL, EPS with IDNet 2 Card 579-269
4100-9600 BASIC TRANSPONDER 574-844
4100-9601 LOCAL MODE TRANSPONDER 574-844
4100-9607 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN 579-271
4100-9608 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN 579-271
4100-9609 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN 579-271
4100-9610 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR 579-271
4100-9611 REMOTE ANNUN EXTERNAL POWER 579-271
4100-9612 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN 579-271
4100-9613 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN 579-271
4100-9614 FLEX UI REMOTE ANNUN 579-271
4100-9620 BASIC AUDIO W/MIKE-ANALOG 748-589
4100-9621 BASIC AUDIO W/MIKE-DIGITAL 748-589

E-6
 Appendix E

References to 4100ES Module Installation Instructions (continued)

Table E-1. References to 4100ES module installation instructions (Continued)

PID Description Installation

Instructions
4100-9816 MASTER CLOCK INTERFACE KIT 574-913
4100-9832 SERVICE MODEM MODULE (566-276) 574-046
4100-9833 4020 RETRO-FIT KIT 579-229
4100-9854 4100 Module Legacy Bay Mounting Kit 579-913
4190-9018 FIBER MODEM AUDIO Exp BOARD 579-581
4905-9835 Temporal Code 4 Module 579-840
4907-9001 TrueAlert Text Messaging Appliance 579-829
Notes:
1. The current for all LED and Switch modules is included with the current for 4100-1288 and 4100-1289.
2. Amplifier standby current has two settings. The .085 A number is used if the System Option for
"Audio Power Conservation" is selected. This option shuts down the power stage when operating
on secondary power (battery standby).
3. Add .8 mA (standby) / 1 mA (alarm) per device to calculate the current requirements for 
4100-3101, 4100-3104, 4100-3105, 4100-3106 or 4100-3107 module.
4. Add 1.7 mA per device to calculate the current requirements for 4100-3102 MAPNET module.

E-7
 Appendix F
Labels

GRAPHIC I/O (ASSY

562-789) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO 32 POINT
MOTHERBOARD (562-727)

8-POINT MONITOR CLASS B

(ASSY 562-731) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO CLASS B
MOTHERBOARD (562-856)

8-POINT MONITOR CLASS A

(ASSY 562-813) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO CLASS A
MOTHERBOARD (562-727)

MAPNET CHANNEL CLASS

A OR B LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO 562-727
MOTHERBOARD AND
565-158 DAUGHTER CARD

MAPNET TRANSCEIVER (ASSY

562-926) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO 562-974
MAPNET POWER SUPPLY

RS-232/2120 INTERFACE BOARD

(ASSY 565-004) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO CLASS B
MOTHERBOARD (562-856) OR
TBI MOTHERBOARD (565-161
OR 565-213)

3 A AUX RELAY (ASSY

565-045) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO 32-POINT
MOTHERBOARD (562-727)
2 A AUX RELAY (ASSY
562-760) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO 32-POINT
MOTHERBOARD (562-727)

10 A AUX RELAY (ASSY

562-951) LABELS TO BE
APPLIED TO ASSY 562-952

Continued on next page

F-1
 Appendix F

Labels, (continued)

AUDIO NAC LABELS

PHONE LABELS

FLEX 50 LABELS

SPS/RPS LABELS

XNAC LABELS

XPS LABELS

100 W
AMP
LABELS

F-2
 Appendix G
Earth Fault Diagnostics
Overview This appendix contains instructions on how to use the Earth Fault Search feature of the
4100ES diagnostics menus. The minimum Earth Fault detection level for the 4100ES is 10k
ohms for all circuits.

Earth Fault Search is a diagnostic search of external field wiring that assists in locating circuits
with earth faults. An earth fault occurs when an electrical circuit is shorted to ground.
Although most circuits operate with a single earth fault, multiple earth faults can disable
communications. Because of this, earth faults must be located and repaired.

Earth Fault Search is conducted by the FACP. The diagnostic may be activated using either the
front panel interface or the Computer Port Protocol (CPP), using a service port.

The 4100ES supports two types of Earth Fault Searches:

• Location Search. Searches all circuits at a location, such as a transponder or the main
panel. For the purposes of Earth Fault Searching,
- A location is composed of a group of slaves connected to each other via 4100 Comm
(local RUI).
- The main panel is defined as all slaves local to the Master CPU.
- A transponder denotes all slaves associated with a single Transponder Interface Card
(TIC)/Local Mode TIC slave.
• IDNet Channel Search. Selectively enables channel isolators and repeaters to detect
which segment of the channel wiring has a fault.
- Earth faults are detected by one of the following:
- A single designated power supply at a location. The power supply that detects the fault
is designated via a jumper setting on the power supply slave. For any given location,
only one power supply should detect earth faults.
- Each 4009 IDNet NAC Extender on an IDNet channel.

In this chapter This chapter covers the following topics:

Topic Page

General Guidelines G-2

Earth Fault Searching from the Front Panel G-3

Search Results G-6

Earth Fault Search Example G-8

G-1
 Appendix G

General Guidelines

General Review the guidelines below before initiating an Earth Fault Search.
Guidelines • The Detect Earth Fault jumper must be installed at each SPS, RPS, TPS, IPS, or 4009T for
earth fault detection to occur.
• Only one power supply per location is configured to detect earth faults.
• For more reliable earth fault searching:
- Use a Firefighter Telephone NAC for each telephone riser connection to a transponder.
- Use IDNet channel isolators to isolate channel faults to a specific segment of channel
wiring.
- Set IDNet channel isolator addresses to the lowest IDNet device addresses, increasing
with communication distance from the IDNet card.
• If an earth fault is suspected on the IDNet channel with multiple isolators, start an IDNet
Channel Search before doing a Location Search. If the Location Search is done first, it
may not yield the correct location (this is a by-product of the extended amount of time
required for the IDNet channel to initialize during a Location Search). Note: The 4009
IDNet NAC Extender has a common ground fault trouble that reports to the panel without
running the Earth Fault Search.
• Earth Fault Search detects only one fault at a time. Multiple faults require fixing the first
fault and then repeating the search.
• The FACP suspends normal operation for the duration of the Earth Fault Search.
• Location Earth Fault Searches optionally allow exclusion of auxiliary power circuits from
the search, so that modules connected to the 24 V auxiliary outputs can remain in
operation during the search.
• The option to exclude auxiliary power circuits does not apply to IDNet devices, because
the entire IDNet communication channel is isolated during each search.
• During the search, all related troubles are suppressed and a single trouble pseudo-point is
activated (P438).
• At the completion of the search, all slaves are restarted and normal panel operation
resumes.
• Earth Fault Search is only supported by new 4100ES modules. 4100 Legacy (slot format)
modules are not supported, with the following exceptions:
- MAPNET channel isolation during location search
- IPS for earth fault detection (not recommended). The Earth Fault Search may fail
because the isolation circuits of some 4100ES slaves (such as the 4100ES telephone
slave) do not support IPS.

IMPORTANT: The fire panel cannot provide fire protection during an

Earth Fault Search.

G-2
 Appendix G

Earth Fault Searching from the Front Panel

Overview This section describes how to conduct an Earth Fault Search, from selecting the appropriate
access code to correcting the fault.

Access Level The panel must be at the appropriate access level (1, 2, 3, or 4) in order to run diagnostics. To
Selection get to the correct access level,

1. Press the Menu button. The following message comes up (press the Next or Previous 
buttons, if necessary, to display it):
Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll
Change Access Level?

2. Press the Enter button. Now you are prompted to log in or log out.
1=Login 2=Logout
CURRENT ACCESS LEVEL = x

3. Press the "1" key on the numeric keypad to log in, so that the passcode prompt comes up.
Enter a Passcode followed by <ENTER>

4. Enter the passcode and press the Enter button. ACCESS GRANTED displays briefly on the
LCD, and then the display goes back to:
1=Login 2=Logout
CURRENT ACCESS LEVEL = y

You can now open the diagnostic menu as described in the next topic.

Starting the Earth To start an Earth Fault Search,

Fault Search
1. If necessary, press the Menu button to access the menus.
2. Press the Previous or Next buttons until the diagnostic functions option appears:
Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll
Diagnostic Functions?

3. Press the Enter button. Then press Next or Previous buttons until the Earth Fault Search
option appears:
Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll
Earth Fault Search?

Continued on next page

G-3
 Appendix G

Earth Fault Searching from the Front Panel (continued)

Starting the Earth 4. Press the Enter button. The following options become available when you press the Next and
Fault Search Previous buttons:
Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll
Location Search
Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll
IDNet Channel Search

Press <NEXT> or <PREVIOUS> to scroll

Last Search Result

The search types are described below. When you have determined what kind of search to
initiate, display its option (one of the three shown above) and press the Enter button. Each
option has its own topic, below.

Search Option A: • If you select the Location Search menu item, a list of cards to search becomes available.
Select Location Use the Next and Previous buttons to scroll through the list.
• If you find a card that you suspect is connected to a circuit with an earth ground, press the
Enter button when that circuit is shown.
• Before you can start the search, the Aux Power Select option comes up.
1=Exclude 2=Include
Exclude AUXPWR circuits from search?

• The number you select, 1 or 2, determines whether the auxiliary power circuit on the
selected board is searched for earth grounds. If you exclude the auxiliary power circuit
from the search, the circuit will continue to operate normally.
• Press 1 (or just press the Enter button) to exclude the card's auxiliary power circuits from
the search, or press 2 to remove auxiliary power circuits from normal operation and search
them for earth grounds.
• Now you are prompted to start the search. When the location you want to search is shown
and "Press <ENTER> to start search" displays, the search is ready to start. A sample is
shown below.
CARD 1, SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY
Press <ENTER> to start search
Note: The FACP suspends normal operation for the duration of the search.
• Press the Enter button to start the search.
• As the search progresses, watch the display for an indication of how much of the search
has been completed. The search can be aborted at any time if you press the Clear button.
Earth Search In-Progress, Please Wait...

Earth Search In-Progress, Please Wait...

40%

• Skip ahead to the "Completing the Search" topic.

G-4
 Appendix G

Earth Fault Searching from the Front Panel (continued)

Search Option B: • If you select the IDNet Channel Search menu item, a list of IDNet channels to search
Select Channel becomes available. Use the Next and Previous buttons to scroll through the list. When the
IDNet channel you want to search is shown and "Press <ENTER> to start search" displays,
the search is ready to start. A sample screen is shown below.
IDNET CHANNEL M12
Press <ENTER> to select for search
Note: The FACP suspends normal operation for the duration of the search.
• Press the Enter button to start the search.
• As the search progresses, watch the display for an indication of how much of the search
has been completed. The search can be aborted at any time if you press the Clear button.
Earth Search In-Progress, Please Wait...

Earth Search In-Progress, Please Wait...

40%

Skip ahead to the "Completing the Search" topic.

Search Option C: This option simply displays the last Earth Fault Search result. If there has been no search since
Last Search the last system startup, or if the last search was aborted, the panel displays "RESULT NOT
Result AVAILABLE."

Completing the When a Location or IDNet Channel Search completes, all of the following occurs:
Search • All slaves automatically reset.
• The FACP turns off the Earth Fault Search trouble pseudo-point.
• The panel displays the specific fault information.

The panel can only return one Earth Fault Search result at a time. If another fault exists, it can
only be found via diagnostics after the first fault is cleared. Faults will continue to appear, one
by one, until each one has been found and corrected.

IMPORTANT: Once you have been directed to an earth ground fault and corrected
it, it is recommended that you restart the system (warm- or cold-
start).

Continue to the next topic for a list of search results and their required actions.

G-5
 Appendix G

Search Results

Overview There are several types of results that can display at the end of an Earth Fault Search. This
section covers all types of results.

IMPORTANT: Once you have been directed to an earth ground fault and
corrected it, it is recommended that you restart the system
(warm- or cold-start).

Non-Point Faults A non-point fault indicates a ground that cannot be traced to an addressable point (for example,
a shield or an audio riser). The earth fault in this example is not occurring at the audio
controller but somewhere in the riser:
CARD 17, ANALOG AUDIO CONTROLLER
AUDIO RISER 1 EARTH FAULT

Non-point faults can be displayed for each of the following items:

• Shield (Flex 50/100 W Amplifier)
• Audio Riser (Digital./Analog Audio Controller; Local Mode Transponder; may also
annunciate as "DAR SECONDARY" (Digital Audio Riser Secondary) on transponder)
• Remote Mic 1 and Push-to-Talk line (Digital./Analog Audio Controller) (other remote
mics are not supported)
• Channel Output (IDNet Card; MAPNET Interface Card)
• RUI Channel (Master Controller Card)
• Channel 1 to 3 (TrueAlert Power Supply)

Point Faults A point fault indicates a ground at a specific addressable point. The example below is a
location earth ground search result, where 3 is the card address, 10 is the point number, and 0 is
the sub-point number (not used):
CARD 003, FLEX 50 AMPLIFIER
3-10-0 EARTH FAULT

Point faults can be found at any point in the system that connects to field wiring.

Some IDNet channel point fault examples are illustrated below.

Fault not cleared. The message below shows that an IDNet channel that has been isolated for
fault detection still has the earth fault:
CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)
M1, EARTH FAULT SEARCH FAULT CLEAR FAIL

Fault between channel output and first isolator. The message below shows a fault between
the IDNet channel output and the first isolator on the line:
CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)
M1, CHANNEL OUTPUT EARTH FAULT

Continued on next page

G-6
 Appendix G

Search Results (continued)

Point Faults 4009 IDNet NAC Extender/TrueAlert Addressable Controller faults. The message below
shows a fault detected on the 4009 IDNet NAC Extender before the repeater connected to that
circuit is turned on:
CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)
M1-18, 4009A NAC EARTH FAULT

Conversely, the following example shows a fault detected after the repeater connected to that
circuit is turned on:
CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)
M1-18, 4009A REPEATER EARTH FAULT

IDNet isolator fault. The message below shows a fault detected after the IDNet isolator was
turned on:
CARD 2, IDNET CARD (250 POINTS)
M1-3, IDNET ISOLATOR EARTH FAULT

Fault Not Found If the message in the lower right corner of the LCD reads FAULT NOT FOUND (for a
Location Earth Fault Search) or FAULT CLEAR FAIL (for an IDNet Channel Earth Fault
Search), it means the search could not locate the fault, but it acknowledges that a fault exists.

There are three main possibilities behind this message:

• There are one or more internal wiring earth(s) in the system.
• There are system defects (hardware or software, such as a failed isolation circuit).
• An intermittent earth exists in the system (it occurs inconsistently and is therefore difficult
to track via diagnostics).
• The cable to the service port may be grounded due to the remote PC's 3-prong plug. Use a
non-grounded plug adapter to the remote PC to get rid of the earth ground.
• The fault is on an auxiliary output that was excluded from the search.

The problem may have to be found manually and then corrected in some of the above
scenarios.

No Fault If the message in the lower right corner of the LCD reads NO FAULT, it means the IDNet
channel search could not locate any earth faults on that channel.

Result Not If the message in the lower right corner of the LCD reads RESULT NOT AVAILABLE, it
Available means there is no result to view. This message comes up only when you have selected "Last
Search Result" on the menu.

G-7
 Appendix G

Earth Fault Search Example

Earth Fault The illustration below shows a MINIPLEX system with one transponder that has three earth
Search Example faults:
• SPS NAC on the SPS in the Main Panel
• RPS AUXPWR output on the RPS in Transponder 1
• IDNet channel in Transponder 1

SPS
SPS
NAC 2

Main
Panel
RPS
RPS
AUXPW R
RUI
Transponder
1
IDNet
Iso Iso
= Ground Fault IDNet Channel
1 2
M2

Figure G-1. Earth Fault Example

The panel reports two earth faults, one for each power supply. The third fault is as yet
unreported.

The example below shows the progression of events in finding and repairing the three faults.
They are presented as instructions to a technician who does not yet know about the third fault.

A. Find and repair the fault in the main panel.

1. After opening the Earth Fault Search diagnostic menu option, select Location Search.
2. .Select the SPS located in the Main Panel (this selects the Main Panel as the location for the
search).
3. When prompted, select exclusion of AUXPWR circuits.
4. Start the search. (The panel turns on the earth fault search trouble pseudo-point and the 
keypad inactivity utility pseudo-point to disable timeout during the search).
5. The search completes. The panel indicates that NAC 2 on the SPS has the earth fault. All
slaves are reset (and the panel turns off the earth fault search trouble pseudo-point).
6. Repair the earth fault on NAC 2.
When this is done, the trouble from the SPS clears but the trouble from the RPS is still
indicated.

Continued on next page

G-8
 Appendix G

Earth Fault Search Example (continued)

Earth Fault B. Find and repair the indicated fault on Transponder 1.

Search Example 1. Select Location Search.
2. Select the RPS located in Transponder 1 (this selects Transponder 1 as the location for the
search).
3. When prompted, select exclusion of AUXPWR circuits.
4. Start the search. (The panel turns on the earth fault search trouble pseudo-point and the 
keypad inactivity utility pseudo-point to disable timeout during the search).
5. The search completes. The panel indicates FAULT NOT FOUND because the fault is on the
excluded AUXPWR circuit. All slaves in Transponder 1 are reset (and the panel turns off the
earth fault search trouble pseudo-point).
6. Repeat the search but include the AUXPWR circuit this time.
7. The search completes. The panel indicates a fault on the AUXPWR point on the RPS. All
slaves in Transponder 1 are reset (and the panel turns off the earth fault search trouble
pseudo-point).
8. Repair the earth fault on AUXPWR.
Even though you have fixed the fault, the trouble from the RPS is still not clearing. Remember
that the only two faults you could see at first were from the SPS and RPS. It is time to find and
clear the next fault.

C. Find and repair the next indicated fault on Transponder 1.

1. Select Location Search.
2. Select the RPS located in Transponder 1.
3. When prompted, select exclusion of AUXPWR circuits.
4. .Start the search.
5. The search completes. The panel indicates a fault on IDNet Channel M2.
6. Start another search, this time an IDNet Channel Search on Channel M2.
7. When prompted, select exclusion of AUXPWR circuits.
8. The search completes. The panel indicates a fault on the IDNet channel between isolators 1
and 2.
9. Repair the earth fault. The trouble from the RPS is cleared.

G-9
 Appendix H
Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification
Appliances and Accessories

Table H-1. Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and

Accessories

P/N DESCRIPTION
4904-9168 V/O 15CD RED FREE-RUN TNA
4904-9171 V/O 15CD WHITE FREE-RUN TNA
4904-9176 V/O 24VDC 15CD RED VER F/S
4904-9177 V/O 24VDC 15CD WHT VER F/S
4904-9178 V/O 24VDC 15CD RED HORIZ F/S
4904-9183 V/O 24VDC 15CD RED CEIL F/S
4904-9331 V/O 15CD RED SYNC TNA
4904-9342 V/O 15CD WHITE SYNC TNA
4904-9345 V/O 24VDC 15CD WHT PLAIN F/S
4904-9174 V/O 24VDC 30CD RED VER F/S
4904-9180 V/O 24VDC 30CD RED HORIZ F/S
4904-9184 V/O 24VDC 30CD RED CEIL F/S
4904-9346 V/O 24VDC 30CD WHT PLAIN F/S
4904-9169 V/O 75CD RED FREE-RUN TNA
4904-9172 V/O 75CD WHITE FREE-RUN TNA
4904-9332 V/O 75CD RED SYNC TNA
4904-9343 V/O 75CD WHITE SYNC TNA
4904-9170 V/O 110CD RED FREE-RUN TNA
4904-9173 V/O 110CD WHITE FREE-RUN TNA
4904-9175 V/O 24VDC 110CD RED VER F/S
4904-9181 V/O 24VDC 110CD WHT VER F/S
4904-9182 V/O 24VDC 110CD RED HOR F/S
4904-9185 V/O 24VDC 110CD RED CEIL F/S
4904-9333 V/O 110CD RED SYNC TNA
4904-9344 V/O 110CD WHITE SYNC TNA
4906-9101 V/O 15/30/75/110cd W/M RED TNA
4906-9103 V/O 15/30/75/110cd W/M WHT TNA
4906-9102 V/O 15/30/75/110cd C/M RED TNA
4906-9104 V/O 15/30/75/110cd C/M WHT TNA
4906-9105 V/O WEATHERPROOF W/M RED
4906-9106 V/O WEATHERPROOF W/M WHT
4906-9113 V/O WEATHERPROOF W/M (CAN) RED
4903-9356 S/V 15CD RED 25/70V TNA
4903-9359 S/V 15CD WHITE 25/70V TNA
4903-9150 S/V 24VDC 15CD RED HORIZ F/S
4903-9153 S/V 24VDC 15CD RED VER F/S

H-1
 Appendix H

Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories

Table H-1. Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories

(Continued)

P/N DESCRIPTION
4903-9193 S/V 24VDC 15CD WHT HORIZ F/S
4903-9196 S/V15CD RND
4903-9148 S/V 24VDC 30CD RED HORIZ F/S
4903-9194 S/V 24VDC 30CD WHT HORIZ F/S
4903-9197 S/V, 30CD, RND TNA
4903-9357 S/V 75CD RED 25/70V TNA
4903-9360 S/V 75CD WHITE 25/70V TNA
4903-9358 S/V 110CD RED 25/70V TNA
4903-9361 S/V 110CD WHITE 25/70V TNA
4903-9198 S/V 110CD, RND TNA

4906-9151 S/V 15/30/75/110cd W/M RED TNA

4906-9153 S/V 15/30/75/110cd W/M WHT TNA
4906-9154 S/V 15/30/75/110cd C/M WHT TNA

4901-9820 HORN 24VDC RED TNA

4901-9822 HORN 24VDC RED

4009-9201 NAC EXTENDER 120VAC, IDNET

4009-9301 NAC EXTENDER, 240VAC, IDNET
4009-9401 4009 T/A ADDR CONTROLLER

4903-9252 A/V 24VDC 15CD RED HOR F/S

4903-9253 A/V 24VDC 30CD RED HOR F/S
4903-9254 A/V 24VDC 110CD RED HOR F/S
4903-9255 A/V 24VDC 15CD RED VER F/S
4903-9256 A/V 24VDC 110CD RED VER F/S
4903-9257 A/V 24VDC 15CD WHT HOR F/S
4903-9258 A/V 24VDC 30CD WHT HOR F/S
4903-9417 A/V 15CD RED SYNC TNA
4903-9418 A/V 75CD RED SYNC TNA
4903-9419 A/V 110CD RED SYNC TNA
4903-9425 A/V 15CD RED STD TNA
4903-9426 A/V 75CD RED STD TNA
4903-9427 A/V 110CD RED STD TNA
4903-9428 A/V 15CD WHITE SYNC TNA
4903-9429 A/V 75CD WHITE SYNC TNA
4903-9430 A/V 110CD WHITE SYNC TNA
4903-9431 A/V 15CD WHITE STD TNA
4903-9432 A/V 75CD WHITE STD TNA

H-2
 Appendix H

Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories

Table H-1. Special Application NAC-Compatible Notification Appliances and Accessories

(Continued)

P/N DESCRIPTION
4903-9433 A/V 110CD WHITE STD TNA

4906-9127 A/V 15/30/75/110cd W/M RED

4906-9129 A/V 15/30/75/110cd W/M WHT
4906-9128 A/V 15/30/75/110cd C/M RED
4906-9130 A/V 15/30/75/110cd C/M WHT
4906-9131 A/V WEATHERPROOF W/M RED
4906-9132 A/V WEATHERPROOF W/M WHT
4906-9143 A/V WEATHERPROOF W/M (CAN) RED

4906-9201 - 9204 MULTI-CANDELA

4906-9251 - 9254 MULTI-CANDELA
4906-9227 - 9230 MULTI-CANDELA
4906-9105 - 9106 WEATHERPROOF
4906-9131 - 9132 WEATHERPROOF
4906-9113 - 9143 WEATHERPROOF

49CMTV-APPLW1 MT HORN/STROBE

49CMTV-WWF1 MT HORN/STROBE

49CMTV-WWF-BA1 MT HORN/STROBE

49CMTV-WRF1 MT HORN/STROBE

49CMTV-WRF-BA1 MT HORN/STROBE

49CMT-APPLW1 MT HORN

49CMT-WWF1 MT HORN

49CMT-WWF-BA1 MT HORN

49CMT-WRF1 MT HORN

49CMT-WRF-BA1 MT HORN

4905-9815 SMARTSYNC ADAPTER, TNA

4905-9938 SMARTSYNC CTL MODULE
4090-9005 SRP
4090-9006 SRP w/ENCLOSURE
4098-9772 SENSOR BASE WITH 520 Hz SOUNDER
4098-9773 CO SENSOR BASE WITH 520 Hz
SOUNDER
1 A maximum of thirteen 49CMT/49CMTV appliances per SmartSync NAC

H-3
 Appendix I
EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices

EPS Compatible The following devices are compatible with the EPS.
Devices Table I-1. Compatible Devices

Addressable Appliance Description Model Numbers

4009-9601 (platinum)
4009 IDNAC Repeater
4009-9602 (red)
Dual Class A Isolator (DCAI) 4100-6103
TrueAlert Addressable Isolator+ module 4905-9929

EPS Compatible The following appliances are compatible with the EPS.
Appliances Table I-2. Compatible Appliances

TrueAlert ES Appliances TrueAlert Appliances

Addressable Appliance
Description Model Numbers Model Numbers

Audible Only Horn notification 49AO-WRF 49MT-APPLW1 4901-9850

appliances 49AO-WRF-BA 4901-9853
49AO-WRS-BA 49MT-WRF1
49AO-WWF 49MT-WRF-BA1
49AO-WWF-BA 49MT-WRS-BA1
49AO-WWS-BA
49MT-WWS-BA1
49AO-APPLC
49AO-APPLC-BA 49MT-WWF-BA1

Audible/Visible notification 49AV-WRF 49MTV-APPLW2 4906-9227

appliances 49AV-WWF 4906-9228
49AV-WRF-BA 49MTV-WWF2 4906-9229
49AV-WRQ-BA 49MTV-WWF-BA2 4906-9230
49AV-WRS-BA 49MTV-WRF2
49AV-WWF-BA
49MTV-WRF-BA2
49AV-WWS-BA
49AV-APPLC 49MTV-WRS-BA2
49AV-APPLC-BA 49MTV-WWS-BA2
49AVH-APPLC
49AVH-APPLC-BA
49AVH-APPLCA
49AVH-APPLCA-BA
49AVH-APPLCB
49AVH-APPLCB-BA
Visible Only notification 49VO-WRF 49VOH-APPLCB 4906-9201
appliances 49VO-WWF 49VOH-APPLCB-BA 4906-9202
49VO-WRA-A 49VO-WRS-BA 4906-9203
49VO-WWA-A 49VO-WWA-BA 4906-9204
49VO-WRA-BA 49VO-WWF-BA
49VO-WRF-BA 49VO-WWS-BA
49VO-WRQ-BA 49VO-WRA-A-BA
49VO-APPLC 49VO-WWA-A-BA
49VO-APPLC-BA 49VO-WWS-A-BA
49VOH-APPLC
49VOH-APPLC-BA
49VOH-APPLCA
49VOH-APPLCA-BA
Speaker/Visible notification 4906-9251
appliances - 4906-9253
4906-9254

Continued on next page

I-1
 Appendix I EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices

EPS Compatible Appliances and Devices

ES Compatible Table I-2. Compatible Appliances (Continued)

Appliances
TrueAlert
TrueAlert ES Appliances
Addressable Appliance Appliances
Description
Model Numbers Model Numbers

Audible/Visible Weatherproof 49AV-WRFO 49AV-WWFO-BA

-
notification appliances 49AV-WRFO-BA 49AV-APPLW-CO
Visible Only Weatherproof 49VO-WRFO 49VO-WWFO-BA
notification appliances 49VO-WRFO-BA 49VO-APPLW-CO -
49VO-WRSO-BA
LED Visible-Only Wall-Mount 59VO-WRF 59VO-WRFAB-BA
59VO-WRF-BA 59VO-WWFAB
59VO-WWF 59VO-WWFAB-BA
59VO-WWF-BA 59VO-APPLWR
59VO-WRFAB 59VO-APPLWW
LED Visible-Only High-Candela 59VO-WRFH-BA 59VO-WWFABH-BA
Wall-Mount 59VO-WWFH-BA 59VO-APPLWRH
59VO-WRFABH-BA 59VO-APPLWWH
LED Visible-Only Wall-Mount 59VO-WRFO 59VO-WRFABO-BA
Weatherproof 59VO-WRFO-BA 59VO-WWFABO-BA
59VO-WWFO-BA 59VO-APPLWR-O
59VO-WRFABO 59VO-APPLWW-O
LED Visible-Only High-Candela 59VO-APPLWRH-O
Wall-Mount Weatherproof 59VO-APPLWWH-O
LED Audible/Visible Wall-Mount 59AV-WRF 59AV-WRFAB-BA
59AV-WRF-BA 59AV-WWFAB
59AV-WWF 59AV-WWFAB-BA
59AV-WWF-BA 59AV-APPLWR
59AV-WRFAB 59AV-APPLWW
LED Audible/Visible Wall-Mount 59AV-WRFH 59AV-WWFABH-BA
High-Candela 59AV-WRFH-BA 59AV-APPLWRH
59AV-WWFH-BA 59AV-APPLWWH
59AV-WRFABH
59AV-WRFABH-BA
LED Audible/Visible Wall-Mount 59AV-WRFO 59AV-WRFABO-BA
Weatherproof 59AV-WRFO-BA 59AV-WWFABO-BA
59AV-WWFO-BA 59AV-APPLWR-O
59AV-WRFABO 59AV-APPLWW-O
LED Audible/Visible Wall-Mount 59AV-APPLWRH-O
High Candela Weatherproof 59AV-APPLWWH-O
Audible-Only Wall-Mount 59AO-WRS 59AO-WWS-BA
59AO-WRS-BA 59AO-APPLWR
59AO-WWS 59AO-APPLWW
Audible-Only Wall-Mount 59AO-WRSO 59AO-APPLWR-O
Weatherproof 59AO-WRSO-BA 59AO-APPLWW-O
59AO-WWSO-BA
Wall-Mount Speaker and Speaker/ 49SV-APPLW(-BA) 49SO-APPLW(-BA)
Visible (and Backplate) 49HFV-APPLW(-BA) 49HF-APPLW(-BA)
49MP-SVWR 49MP-SOWR
49MP-SVWW 49MP-SOWW
Ceiling-Mount Speaker and 49SO-APPLC(-BA) 49SVH-APPLC(-BA)
Speaker/Visible 49HF-APPLC(-BA) 49HFVH-APPLC(-BA)
49SV-APPLC(-BA) 49HFVH-APLCA-BA
49HFV-APPLC(-BA) 49HFVH-APLCB-BA
Plate 59AP-EUROBB
1 A maximum of thirty-two 49MT appliances per NAC
2 A maximum of twenty-one 49MTV appliances per circuit

I-2
 Appendix J
Cooper Wheelock Appliances Compatible With 4100ES
Wheelock Protocol For Special Applications
Overview The tables in this appendix list Cooper Wheelock appliances compatible with 4100ES
Wheelock protocol for special applications.

Synchronizing
Horn Strobes
Table J-1. Synchronizing Horn Strobes

Appliance Description
AS-241575W AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
AS-24MCW AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
AS-24MCC AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
AS-24MCWH AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
AS-24MCCH AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ASWP-2475W, ASWP-2475C AS Series WP Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 30Cd, Wall or Ceiling Mount
ASWP-24MCWH AS Series WP Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
ASWP-24MCCH AS Series WP Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ASA-24MCW, ASB-24MCW AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount. Amber/Blue
ASA-24MCC, ASB-24MCC AS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber/Blue
HSR HN STR, Red , 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8CD, 5 Mount
HSRC HN STR, Red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
HSRCS HN STR, Silver red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
HSRS HN STR, Silver Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8CD, 5 Mount
HSW HN STR, White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8CD, 5 Mount
HSWC HN STR, White, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
HSWCS HN STR, Silver white, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8 Cd, 5
Mount
HSWS HN STR, Silver White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 8CD, 5 Mount
HS4-241575W HS4 Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
HS4-24MCW HS4 Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
HS4-24MCWH HS4 Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
HS4-24MCC HS4 Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
NS-241575W NS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
NS-24MCW NS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
NS-24MCC NS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
NS-24MCCH NS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ZNS-MCW ZNS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
ZNS-MCWH ZNS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
ZNS-24MCC ZNS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ZNS-24MCCH ZNS Series Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount

J-1
 Appendix J

Compatible Appliances (continued)

Synchronizing
strobes
Table J-2. Synchronizing strobes

Appliance Description
RSS-241575W RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
RSSP-241575W RSSP Series Strobe. 12VDC or 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
RSS-24MCW, RSSP-24MCW RSS/RSSP Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
RSS-24MCWH, RSSP-24MCWH RSS/RSSP Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
RSS-24MCC, RSS-24MCCR RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount (R=Round)
RSS-24MCCH, RSS-24MCCHR RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount (R=Round)
RSSR-2415W, RSSR-2415C RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 15Cd, Red, Wall or Ceiling Mount
RSSR-2475W, RSSR-2475C RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 75Cd, Red, Wall or Ceiling Mount
RSSR-24110C RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 110Cd, Red, Ceiling Mount
RSSA-24110W, RSSB-24110W, RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, 110Cd, Wall Mount. Amber/Blue/Green/
RSSG-24110W, RSSR-24110W Red.
RSSA-24MCC, RSSB-24MCC, RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber/Blue/
RSSG-24MCC, RSSR-24MCC Green/Red.
RSSA-24MCCH, RSSB-24MCCH, RSS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber/
RSSG-24MCCH, RSSR-24MCCH Blue/Green/Red.
RSSPA-24MCC RSSP Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber
RSSWPA-2475W RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, Wall Mount. Amber
RSSWPA-24MCCH,RSSWPB-24MCCH, RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount. Amber/
RSSWPG-24MCCH,RSSWPR-24MCCH Blue/Green/Red.
RSSWP-2475W, RSSWP-2475C RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, 30Cd, Wall or Ceiling Mount
RSSWP-24MCWH RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
RSSWP-24MCCH RSS Series WP Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
STR STR, Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 12/24VDC, 8CD, 5 Mount
STRC STR, Red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
STRCS STR, Silver red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
STRS STR, Silver Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 12/24VDC, 8CD, 5 Mount
STW STR, White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 12/24VDC, 8CD, 5 Mount
STWC STR, White, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
STWCS STR, Silver white, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 8 Cd, 5 Mount
STWS STR, Silver White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 12/24VDC, 8CD, 5 Mount
ZRS-MCW ZRS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
ZRS-MCWH ZRS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
ZRS-24MCC ZRS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ZRS-24MCCH ZRS Series Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount

J-2
 Appendix J

Compatible Appliances (continued)

Appliances with
synchronizing
strobes
Table J-3. Appliances with synchronizing strobes

Appliance Description

(Only Strobe portion compatible with the 4008 Wheelock Protocol for Special Applications)
AMT-241575W, AMT Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
AMT-241575W-NYC
AMT-24MCW AMT Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
MT-241575W MT Series MT Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount.
MT-24MCW MT Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
MTWP-2475W, MTWP-2475C MTWP Series MT Horn Strobe. 24VDC, 30Cd, Wall or Ceiling Mount
MTWP-24MCWH MTWP Series MT Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
MTWP-24MCCH MTWP Series MT Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling
Mount
MTWPA-2475W, MTWPB-2475W MTWP Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Wall Mount. Amber/
MTWPG-2475W, MTWPR-2475W Blue/Green/Red
MTA-24MCCH, MTB-24MCCH, MT Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall
MTG-24MCCH, MTR-24MCCH Mount. Amber/Blue/Green/Red
MTWPA-24MCCH, MTWPB-24MCCH, MTWP Series Multi-Tone Horn Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall
MTWPG-24MCCH,MTWPR-24MCCH Mount. Amber/Blue/Green/Red
ET70WP-2475W, ET70WP-2475C ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 30Cd, Wall or Ceiling
Mount
ET70WP-24185W ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 185Cd, Wall Mount
ET70WP-24177C ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 177Cd, Ceiling Mount
ET70WPA-2475 ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Wall or Ceiling Mt. Amber
CH70-241575W CH70 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
CH70-24MCW CH70 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
CH90-24MCC CH90 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
CH70-24MCWH CH70 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
CH90-24MCCH CH90 Series Chime Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
E50-241575W E50 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
E50-24MCW E50 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
E50-24MCWH E50 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
E50A-24MCC, E50B-24MCC E50 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mt. Amber/
Blue
E60-24MCW E60 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
E60-24MCWH E60 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
E60-24MCC E60 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
E60-24MCCH E60 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
E70-241575W E70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
E70-24MCW E70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
E70-24MCWH E70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
E70-24MCC, E90-24MCC E70/E90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
E90-24MCCH E90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount

J-3
 Appendix J

Compatible Appliances (continued)

Table J-3. Appliances with synchronizing strobes (Continued)

Appliance Description
E60A-24MCC, E70A-24MCC, E60/E70/E90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling
E70B-24MCC, E90A-24MCC, E90B-24MCC Mount. Amber/Blue
ET70-241575W, ET90-241575W ET70/ET90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
ET70-24MCW ET70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
ET70-24MCWH ET70 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
ET70-24MCC, ET90-24MCC ET70/ET90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ET70WPG-2475, ET70WPB-2475W ET70WP Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Wall or Ceiling Mt. Green,
ET70WPG-2475W, ET70WPR-2475W Blue, Red
ET90-24MCCH ET90 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
ET80-241575W ET80 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, 15/75Cd, Wall Mount
ET80-24MCW ET80 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
ET80-24MCWH ET80 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Wall Mount
S8-24MCC S8 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling Mount
S8-24MCCH S8 Series Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-High-Cd, Ceiling Mount
SA-S70-24MCW SA-S70 Series Amp-Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Wall Mount
SA-S90-24MCC SA-S90 Series Amp-Speaker Strobe. 24VDC, Multi-Cd, Ceiling
Mount

Synchronizing
horns
Table J-4. Synchronizing horns

Appliance Description
AH-24 AH Series Horn. 24VDC
AH-24WP AH Series Weatherproof Horn. 12VDC or 24VDC
HS-24 HS Series Horn. 24VDC
HNR Horn, Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount
HNRC Horn, Red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24V, 3dB, 5 Mount
HNRCS Horn, Silver red, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24V, 3dB, 5 Mount
HNRS Horn, Silver Red, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount
HNW Horn, White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount
HNWC Horn, White, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount
HNWCS Horn, Silver white, 2-wire, Ceiling Mount, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5
Mount
HNWS Horn, Silver White, 2-Wire, Wall, 12/24VDC, 3dB, 5 Mount
MIZ-24S MIZ Series Horn. 24VDC
NH-12/24, NH-12/24R NH Series Horn. 12/24VDC (R=Round)
ZNH ZNH Series Horn. 12/24VDC

J-4
 Appendix J

Compatible Appliances (continued)

Coded audible
appliances
Table J-5. Coded audible appliances

Appliance Description
AMT-12/24, AMT-12/24-NYC AMT Series Multi-Tone Horn. 12/24VDC, Wall or Ceiling
Mount
CH70, CH90 CH70/CH90 Series Chime. 24VDC, Wall or Ceiling Mount
CSX10-24-DC, CSXG10-24-DC CSX Series Bell. 24VDC, Wall Mount
MT-12/24, MT4-12/24 MT Series Multi-Tone Horn. 12/24VDC, Wall or Ceiling Mount

Non-synchronizing
appliances
Table J-6. Non-synchronizing appliances

Appliance Description
MB-G6-24, MB-G10-24 MB Series Bell. 24V, Wall Mount

J-5
 Appendix K
Audio Equipment Compatible with 520 Hz Low Frequency
Alarm
Overview The following audio system components have been tested by UL to meet the requirements in
UL464 Section 24.3 "Determination of low frequency signal format". These components have
only been tested with Simplex speaker Notification Appliances and accessories. The only
compatible signal is the "Horn [520 Hz]" added in revision D of the audio library, chipset 42.

Compatible Audio
System
Table K-1. Compatible Audio System Components
Components
Audio System Component Description Model Numbers

Basic Audio with Microphone 4100-9620

4100-9621

Analog Audio Controller Board 4100-1210

4100-1311
Digital Audio Controller Board

Analog Flex 35 and Flex 50 Amplifiers 4100-1312

4100-1313
4100-1363
4100-1364

Digital Flex 35 and Flex 50 Amplifiers 4100-1326

4100-1327
4100-1363
4100-1364

Analog 100W Amplifiers 4100-1314

4100-1315
4100-1318
4100-1319
4100-1320
4100-1321
4100-1324
4100-1325

Digital 100W Amplifiers 4100-1328

4100-1329
4100-1332
4100-1333
4100-1334
4100-1335
4100-1338
4100-1339

Flex Amp Expansion NAC Board 4100-1245

Flex Amp Class A Adapter 4100-1246

100 Watt Expansion NAC Board 4100-1248

100 Watt Class A Adapter 4100-1249

Expansion Signal Card and Accessories 4100-1266

4100-1267
4100-5116

K-1
 Appendix K Audio Equipment Compatible with 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm

Compatible Audio Equipment (continued)

Compatible The list of compatible Simplex Speaker Notification Appliances and accessories is as follows.
Notification
Appliances Table K-2. Compatible Notification Appliances

Notification Appliance Description Model Numbers

Wall Mount Speaker Only 4902-9716

4902-9717

Ceiling Mount Speaker Only 4902-9721

Wall Mount Speaker Visible 4906-9151

4606-9153

Wall Mount ADDR Speaker Visible 4906-9254

4906-9255
4906-9256

Ceiling Mount ADDR Speaker Visible 4906-9254

4906-9255
4906-9256

Cover Accessories 4905-9811

4905-9812
4905-9814
4905-9827
4905-9845
4905-9846
4905-9980
4905-9981
4905-9988
4905-9989
4905-9991
4905-9996
4905-9997

Surface Mount Adapter Skirts 4905-9941

4905-9942
4905-9946
4905-9947

49XX Series Ceiling-Mount Speaker and Speaker/ 49SO-APPLC(-BA)

Visible 49SV-APPLC(-BA)
49SVH-APPLC(-BA)
49HFVH-APLCA-BA
49HF-APPLC(-BA)
49HFV-APPLC(-BA)
49HFVH-APPLC(-BA)
49HFVH-APLCB-BA

49XX Series Wall-Mount Speaker and Speaker/Visible 49SV-APPLW(-BA)

49SO-APPLW(-BA)
49HFV-APPLW(-BA)
49HF-APPLW(-BA)

K-2
 Appendix K Audio Equipment Compatible with 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm

Table K-2. Compatible Notification Appliances

Notification Appliance Description Model Numbers

49XX Series Dress Cover Accessories 49SOC-CK

49SOC-CR
49SOC-CW
49SOC-WRBA
49SOC-WRBC
49SOC-WRBF
49SOC-WRFEU
49SOC-WRFIRE
49SOC-WRS
49SOC-WWBA
49SOC-WWBC
49SOC-WWBF
49SOC-WWFEU
49SOC-WWFIRE
49SOC-WWS
49SVC-CK
49SVC-CRALT
49SVC-CRBA
49SVC-CRBC
49SVC-CRBF
49SVC-CRFEU
49SVC-CRFIRE
49SVC-CRS
49SVC-CWALT
49SVC-CWBA
49SVC-CWBC
49SVC-CWBF
49SVC-CWFEU
49SVC-CWFIRE
49SVC-CWS
49SVC-WRALT
49SVC-WRBA
49SVC-WRBC
49SVC-WRBF
49SVC-WRFEU
49SVC-WRFIRE
49SVC-WRS
49SVC-WWALT
49SVC-WWBA
49SVC-WWBC
49SVC-WWBF
49SVC-WWFEU
49SVC-WWFIRE
49SVC-WWS

K-3
 Appendix K Audio Equipment Compatible with 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm

Compatible Audio Equipment (continued)

Audio Options The following equipment is not part of the signal path for the 520 Hz Low Frequency Alarm
Alongside signal and therefore may be used along side compatible components of the audio system.
Compatible
Equipment Table K-3. Audio Options That May Be Configured Alongside Compatible Equipment

Notification Appliance Description Model Numbers

Auxiliary Audio Input Board 4100-1240

Audio Operator Interface Modules 4100-1252

4100-1253
4100-1254
4100-1255

Expansion Bay 4100-2300

Audio Expansion Bay Harness Kit 4100-2320

Constant Supervision Modules 4100-1259

4100-1260

Message Expansion Board 4100-1241

4100-1242

K-4
574-848
Rev. BD

© 2017 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision and are subject to change
without notice. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex® product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under
Simplex Time Recorder Co. Simplex, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).